Business
general

general:403bficaalternativecalculationnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-30T14:52:45+00:00

Create 1095 (B or C) AIR file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-12-01T15:41:59+00:00

Create 1095 (B or C) AIR file Depending on the form type (1095-B or 1095-C), use the Personnel > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS5250 - 1095-B Forms or HRS5255 - 1095-C Forms reports to create the Affordable Care Act Information Returns (AIR) files. Below is an example of creating an AIR file using the 1095-C Forms report. Note: The TCC is no longer validated during the creation of ACA files

Submit AIR file to the IRS

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-20T20:47:55+00:00

Submit AIR file to the IRS After you create the AIR files and populate the Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1094-C tab (if submitting at least one 1095-C form), you must electronically submit the AIR files to the IRS using the Affordable Care Act Information Return (AIR) Program. The file must be submitted in XML format.

Verify 1094 historical data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-18T16:51:57+00:00

Verify 1094 historical data Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1094 YTD Data > 1094‐C Hist Verify that a historical copy of the 1094‐C (Transmittal of Employer‐Provided Health Insurance Offer and Coverage Information Returns) record is saved for the applicable tax year.

Complete 1094-C (Authoritative Transmission) data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-30T16:36:00+00:00

Complete 1094-C (Authoritative Transmission) data Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1094 YTD Data > 1094-C Complete and save data on the ALE Member Information and ALE Member Information - Monthly tabs. Note: Only one authoritative transmittal should be filed for each employer. Use the Personnel > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS6720 - ACA 1095 YTD Report to verify the

Generate the comparison report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T14:20:42+00:00

Generate the comparison report Personnel > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS5250 - 1095-B Forms or HRS5255 - 1095-C Forms Generate the W2/1095 comparison report to verify that each employee with a W-2 for the specified reporting tax year has a 1095 form. [Sample HRS5250 Report Parameters] [Sample HRS5250 Comparison Report] LEAs with less than 50 full‐time equivalents are required to provide form 1095‐B for ALL covered employees and ONLY covered employees, not necessarily everyone…

general:1095_generate_validation_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-31T21:11:25+00:00

Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1095-B Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1095-C

Perform 1095 maintenance as needed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-12-01T15:48:19+00:00

Perform 1095 maintenance as needed Use the following tabs to perform maintenance: Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1095-B Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1095-C The 1095-C maintenance page consists of two grids: VCV Complete the top grid for: * Full-time and part-time employees who are enrolled in coverage including HMO enrollees and COBRA participants

Finalize the 1095 data and print forms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-13T20:00:54+00:00

Finalize the 1095 data and print forms After all of the 1095 data is accurate, generate the Personnel > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS5250 - 1095-B Forms or HRS5255 - 1095-C Forms report to finalize and print 1095 forms. 1095-B: [HRS5250 Finalize Data Report Paramters] 1095-C: [HRS5255 Finalize Data Report Paramters] Keep in mind that the Plan Start Month (01-12) parameter is now required.

Set up ACA code table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-12-06T20:41:52+00:00

Set up ACA code table Add or edit Offer of Coverage and Safe Harbor tabs as needed. If your LEA is classified as a small employer and plans to file 1095-B forms, complete the Personnel > Tables > ACA 1095 Codes > 1095-B Coverage Type tab: [1095B Coverage Type Tab] If your LEA is classified as an ALE and plans to file 1095-C forms, complete the following tabs:

Set up insurance company codes table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-12-15T15:21:26+00:00

Set up insurance company codes table Personnel > Tables > Insurance Company Codes Add codes for health insurance plans. Note: It is not necessary to add separate codes for each health insurance plan since you can see the current detail in their deduction screens. [Insurance Codes] Add Click to add insurance company data. A blank insurance company code record is displayed.

general:1095_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T20:14:38+00:00

Term DescriptionALEApplicable Large Employers are those employers with at least 50 full-time employees including full-time equivalent employees in the prior calendar year.IRSInternal Revenue ServiceMECMinimum Essential Coverage is a qualifying health coverage plan (e.g., marketplace plans; job-based plans; Medicare; and Medicaid/CHIP) that meets the Affordable Care Act (ACA) requirements.

Verify reporting contact information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-12-01T15:35:39+00:00

Verify reporting contact information District Administration > Tables > District Information > Reporting Contact Before creating the ACA electronic file, verify the LEA's reporting contact information (Contact Name, Phone, and TCC fields) and update as needed. The SHOP fields can be left blank as it should only be used if reporting a Form 1095-A for employees who obtained coverage in the marketplace.

Add or update staff insurance data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-12-15T15:45:46+00:00

Add or update staff insurance data Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Insurance This tab contains insurance information for the employee. The data includes the insurance company, the plan type, coverage information, the individuals covered by the plan, and the demographics of the covered dependents.

Verify 1095 historical data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-18T16:51:37+00:00

Verify 1095 historical data Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data > 1095-B Hist or 1095-C Hist Verify that a historical copy of the 1095 record is saved for the applicable tax year.

general:1095electconsent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T15:47:18+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select whether or not the employee provided consent to receive the 1095 form electronically rather than receive a printed, mailed copy. This field is updated to reflect any changes made by the employee in EmployeePortal. If the 1095 Electronic Consent

general:1095electronicconsent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-13T16:45:03+00:00

Select to allow the 1095 Consent button to be displayed. If not selected, 1095 forms are printed and mailed to all employees. Note: If 1095 Information is selected giving the employee access to the EmployeePortal > Inquiry > 1095 Information page, the

general:1099_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:47:58+00:00

Enter an account code using either of the following: Type the account number, if known. Click [Ellipsis Icon] to open the Account Code directory. Type the applicable account code components or leave blank for all account codes. Click Search. A list of available account code components is displayed.

general:1099_create_1099_object_codes_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-09T14:23:54+00:00

Finance > Tables > 1099 Object Codes In file ID C, review all of the object codes that were used when paying 1099-eligible vendors. You can add and/or delete object codes as needed. Generally, 62XX accounts are included. Ensure that you are appropriately capturing any end-of-year payable transactions from the current or prior year.

general:1099_create_1099_work_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-01-30T18:04:02+00:00

Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Create 1099 Work Table Process this utility to populate the work table from the check transactions. The table populates the Finance > Maintenance > 1099 Record Maintenance page and allows you to modify entries. The create 1099 work table process uses file ID C and the file ID in the Previous Year File ID

general:1099_delete_1099_work_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T20:59:45+00:00

Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Create 1099 Work Table Delete 1099 historical data from the tables before creating the new year 1099 work table. Note: The Finance transactions are not affected when the 1099 work table transactions are deleted. [Create 1099 Work Table Utility] VCV Leave the Beginning Date

general:1099_file_1099_misc_forms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-12-11T13:57:37+00:00

Use the appropriate IRS electronic filing system (Filing Information Returns Electronically (FIRE)/Information Returns Intake System (IRIS) system) to file 1099s. * The existing FIRE format is still available for 2025 processing; however, according the IRS website, the targeted date for the retirement of the FIRE system is tax year 2026/filing season 2027. Review the IRS website for additional information about FIRE:

general:1099_forms_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-30T17:05:12+00:00

Notes: The 1099-MISC (M) form prints the sum of all transactions (if at least $600) in the 1099 work file except those tied to an object code with a Type Payment of N - Non-employee compensation on the Finance > Tables > 1099 Object Codes page. The 1099-NEC (N) form prints the sum of all transactions (if at least $600, excluding credit card transactions) in the 1099 work file that are tied to an object code with a

general:1099_generate_1099_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-14T15:32:09+00:00

Finance > Finance Reports > Vendor/Purchase Order Reports > FIN2050 - 1099 Report Generate this report to review the vendors and transactions for accuracy. It is recommended to sort the report by the Employer Identification Number (EIN)/Social Security Number (SSN). This sorting option allows those vendors without an EIN/SSN to be displayed at the beginning of the report. A 1099 form is not generated for vendors without an EIN/SSN.

general:1099_misc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-20T16:46:40+00:00

Reference the following page on the IRS website for specific instructions about Form 1099-MISC: About Form 1099-MISC, Miscellaneous Income

general:1099_nec

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-20T16:46:26+00:00

Reference the following page on the IRS website for specific instructions about Form 1099-NEC: About Form 1099-NEC, Nonemployee Compensation

general:1099_perform_1099_record_maintenance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-14T15:38:20+00:00

Finance > Maintenance > 1099 Record Maintenance Perform any necessary updates to the payment information in the 1099 work file. You can verify, add, delete, or update check transactions for each vendor to ensure the accuracy of the vendor 1099 records. Only transactions that occurred in the prior year with object codes from the 1099 object codes table are displayed.

general:1099_po_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:48:24+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to open the PO Number directory. Select one of the following options and click Search: Only POs with Current File ID Only POs with Previous File ID A list of purchase order numbers is displayed. Select a purchase order to populate the

general:1099_print_1099_misc_forms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-12-05T16:45:45+00:00

Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Vendor/Purchase Order Reports > FIN2100 - 1099 Forms [FIN2100 Report Parameter Page] Generate this report after all of the necessary information is verified. If more than 10 information returns will be filed, you are required to create a 1099 file for electronic submission to the IRS. All LEAs should run this report using options

general:1099_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-01-20T16:09:51+00:00

Term DescriptionFIREFiling Information Returns ElectronicallyForm 1099-MISC Reference the following page on the IRS website for specific instructions about Form 1099-MISC: About Form 1099-MISC, Miscellaneous Income Form 1099-NEC Reference the following page on the IRS website for specific instructions about Form 1099-NEC:

general:1099_verify_1099_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T20:48:58+00:00

Finance > Finance Reports > Vendor/Purchase Order Reports > FIN2050 - 1099 Report [FIN2050 Report Parameter Page] Generate this report again and continue reviewing vendors and transactions for accuracy. If any vendors and/or transactions are missing, you can manually enter any exceptions on the Finance > Maintenance > 1099 Record Maintenance page, or make the corrections on the Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Name/Address tab and the Finance > Tables > 1099 Object Codes page (if extracting tr…

general:1099_verify_district_finance_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T20:55:16+00:00

Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options [District Finance Options Tab] VCV Verify that the following fields contain accurate information: * Current Finance Fiscal Year * School Year * Previous Year File ID - Verify that the Previous Year File ID field is not blank. If the field is blank, check transactions cannot be located for the current calendar year in the previous fiscal year. When creating the 1099 work table, only unique transactions are selected from both…

general:abbreviationcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-12T18:52:45+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an abbreviation code. If a D1 deduction code is added to the employee’s master deduction record, the system will calculate the amount to withhold based on the employee’s pay and the percentage in the 457 Deferred Compensation table. This amount is automatically entered in the

general:absencereason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-17T15:43:46+00:00

Click to open the Absence Reasons To Leave Type pop-up window. A list of available (active and inactive) absence reason codes is displayed. Select the absence reason codes that you want to assign to the selected leave type. Click OK. Otherwise, click

general:aca_copy_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-20T16:49:48+00:00

Copy prior year 1095-B and 1095-C records If you choose, you can copy records from the prior year to the new year. After you have copied the data, you can manually edit the records or add new records. On the Personnel > Tables > ACA 1095 Codes tabs, review the ACA tables to ensure that the relevant data exists.

general:aca_create_1095_records_manually_create_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-20T16:08:01+00:00

Manually create records To manually add records 1095-B or 1095-C records for each employee, use one of the following maintenance tabs. * Small LEAs with less than 50 FTEs will use the 1095‐B tab to add information on covered individuals. * Large LEAs (ALEs) with 50 or more FTEs will use the 1095‐C tab to update information on covered individuals and Offers of Coverage for employees who were full‐time at least one month or more out of the year.

general:aca_create_1095_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-20T16:46:25+00:00

The following methods are available to create the 1095 records. Depending on your LEAs procedures, you can select the method that best meets your needs. Remember, if your LEA initially planned to maintain employee insurance data in Personnel throughout the calendar year, you can use the extract method (b.) to create 1095 records. If not, then you can manually create records, import records, or copy records from the prior year.

general:aca_extract_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-12-15T16:00:15+00:00

Extract records Use the Personnel > Utilities > Extract Insurance Data to 1095 Data page to extract insurance data from the Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Insurance tab to the Personnel > Maintenance > ACA 1095 YTD Data maintenance page(s). Most data will populate accurately; however, there are some records that may require manual edits. [Extract Insurance Data to 1095 Data] VCV Under

general:aca_import_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-12-15T15:24:59+00:00

Import records Use the Personnel > Utilities > Import ACA 1095-B/1095-C Data page to import 1095 records. Review the 1095-C Offers of Coverage File Layout.

general:access_help

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-21T19:22:49+00:00

In the top-right corner of any page, click Help. The Help window opens. * A Table of Contents is displayed on the left, and the selected Help topic is displayed on the right. * The Help topic is specific to the application page. You can browse other Help topics using the Table of Contents.

general:access_permission

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:51:36+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the type of permission the user is granted to the address. BBB Select Ship to use the selected address to create a requisition. BBB Select Receive to view and receive a purchase order for the selected address in Purchasing.

general:account_code_check_issue

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-07T17:17:50+00:00

Type an account code, or with the cursor in the field, press F2 to display the Account Codes lookup. To view a list of account code components, place the cursor in one of the account code component fields, and then click [Ellipsis Icon] or press F2. Type the applicable account code components, or leave blank for all account codes, and then click

general:account_code_field_display

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-02T22:03:30+00:00

The 20-character account code mask with all Xs is displayed. Type only the account code elements (e.g., fund, function, object, etc.) to be included in the search. Each account code component is independent of the other components.

general:account_code_gl_acct_summary

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-01T18:15:07+00:00

Type an account code in each of the account code field components. Click [Ellipsis Icon] to select which account codes you want included in the mask. The account code components are displayed as a mask with all Xs. Fill in the digits that are used during the selection process, and only those account codes that match the ones specified are retrieved.

general:account_code_gl_emp_dist_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-01T18:16:05+00:00

general:account_code_gl

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-20T16:55:43+00:00

Type an account code for each of the account code components or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a code. Masked account code components (Xs) will retrieve any digit in that account code position. For example, the account mask XXX-XX-63XX-XX-XXX-XXXXXX would pull all grant expenditure amounts for supplies.

general:account_code_jv

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-16T14:31:51+00:00

general:account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:42:32+00:00

Type the account code, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the code which identifies the account from which funds are expended for the activity code. For extra duty accounts, the Account Code field is populated from the extra duty code table. Only expenditure accounts with object code 6XXX are allowed.

general:account_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-08T03:13:18+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-digit code of the account type for that job. Account Type B (Non-TRS taxable business allow) is used when the Tax column has been completed under Business Allowance on the Pay Info tab. Account Type G (Standard gross pay) represents the contract amount from the Job Info tab.

general:accounting_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-02T19:12:20+00:00

Year-to-Date (Y) and Accounting Period Current (C) Year-to-Date, Current and Next (A); and Accounting Period Current (C) Year-to-Date, Current and Next (A); and All Accounting Period (A)

general:accountingperiod_lock

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:10:52+00:00

Select to close the current accounting period. If selected, users can no longer post to the current accounting period. By default, Lock Current Accounting Period is not selected. When Lock Current Accounting Period is selected, users are restricted from posting in the current accounting period. Posting is allowed in the next accounting period if the next accounting period is opened prior to closing the current accounting period.

general:accrual_info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-07T15:19:17+00:00

CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-character, LEA-defined code required if the LEA is using the accrual pay special option. The code must match a code used to identify a calendar on the Accrual Calendar tab. If an accrual code is entered, it applies to the current job. Each job can have a different number of days earned per processed pay date; therefore, can be assigned a different accrual code.

general:accrualbackground

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-18T16:32:37+00:00

Why do we accrue? TEA Finance Accountability System Resource Guide: VCV Monthly Accruals: “Expenditures should be recorded and reported in the period in which they are incurred. Therefore, unpaid salaries and related benefits that have been earned, but not yet paid should be recorded as accrued expenditures.”

general:accrualexpenseexample1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-26T18:59:49+00:00

Employees’ distribution history records currently have transactions for fund 211, fiscal year 4, and payments need to be made from accruals for the summer months. You do not want any entries to be made to specific funds for that fiscal year, so you enter fund 211 and expense fiscal year as 5, and all payments from the employees’ distribution history (accruals) are posted to the new fiscal year for that fund

general:accrualexpenseexample2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-26T19:00:20+00:00

Employees’ master distribution record reflects fiscal year of 5, and the table reflects expense fiscal year 4 for the same fund. Then accrual entries are posted to fiscal year 4, any expense for payroll is posted to fiscal year 5, and any excess is posted to fiscal year 4 for the specified fund.

general:accrualexpensefund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-29T20:36:07+00:00

Type a three-digit fund that may be in the employees’ distribution history (accrual) records where an alternate fiscal year needs to be used for the posting of the accrual expense. The first search is for a specific fund (all three digits match). If the fund is not found, the next search starts with the first two digits of the fund, and if not found, it searches for the first digit of the fund. If no match is found, no change occurs, and the accrual expense is posted according to what is in the …

Accrual Overview

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-08-06T20:30:21+00:00

Accrual Overview [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this guide. What does it mean to “accrue”? Accrue means to accumulate. Relative to payroll, it means to accumulate expenses actually incurred and owed, but not paid. Payroll accrual amounts occur when an employee’s days worked for a specific accounting period are not paid during that same accounting period.

general:acct_code_cc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-28T14:41:39+00:00

Type the 20-digit account code of the payable account. The object code must be a class 2XXX account. All account code components must exist on the Finance > Tables > Account Code page. Note: You can use one account for all credit cards or set up a separate account for each credit card.

general:acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:27:05+00:00

Type the 20-digit account code. The object code must be a class 2XXX account. All account code components must exist on the Tables > Account Code page. The account code is divided into the following components: Fund Function Object Sub-Object

general:acct_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-16T15:01:54+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an accounting period to reconcile. Options include the following: YTD Processed * The program displays all the deposits and checks that are for the last closed accounting period or earlier. If a cash receipt or check transaction record has a process date and has not been cleared, it is displayed.

general:acct_rec_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-28T16:11:52+00:00

Type the account code which is to receive the funds from the invoice. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding account codes is displayed. Select an account code. BBB To view a list of account code components, place the cursor in one of the account code component fields and then click

general:acct_rec_add_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-19T15:31:06+00:00

Add - Clear AllClick to clear all data for the invoice and add a new invoice.Add - Clear CustomerClick to clear the customer information only and add a new invoice. The existing product and account data is not cleared.Add - Clear DetailClick to clear the product and account data only and add a new invoice. The existing customer information is not cleared.

general:acct_rec_customer_address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-19T16:50:21+00:00

AttentionType the customer point of contact or other pertinent address information (e.g., Business Office).Local UseType the local use information. The field can be a maximum of 35 characters.Street Nbr/NameType the customer's mailing or physical address. Use the apartment abbreviation (APT) or the suite abbreviation (STE) and number, if known.

general:acct_rec_customer_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-19T14:20:37+00:00

Click to add a customer record.

general:acct_rec_customer_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:17:33+00:00

In the Customer Name field, type the customer's name (e.g., Angel ISD). As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding customer names is displayed. Select a customer name. The field is required. BBB If the customer name is not known, click

general:acct_rec_delete_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-30T20:53:13+00:00

Click to delete a saved invoice. A message is displayed asking if you want to delete the invoice. Click Yes to delete the invoice. Click No to not delete the invoice.

general:acct_rec_delete

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-19T15:05:50+00:00

Click to delete a customer.

general:acct_rec_delete2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-11T13:19:30+00:00

Click to delete a customer record. Notes: Normally, the Delete function is used just after creating a customer in error or after using the Purge Prior Year Invoices utility, and you want to delete customers who no longer have invoices in the system. When you try to delete a customer record, the system checks that there are no invoices with this customer number. This includes both open (balance greater than zero) and closed (balance equal to zero) invoices. If the system finds either t…

general:acct_rec_email

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-18T20:56:55+00:00

Type the e-mail address to be used to send information to the contact person. The field can be a maximum of 45 characters. Click E-mail to send the e-mail using the user's default e-mail client. The To: e-mail address is populated if the E-mail field contains an e-mail address.

general:acct_rec_invoice_amount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:35:57+00:00

Type the amount to be applied from the invoice total, or leave blank and click Uniform Distribution to distribute the invoice total amount equally among multiple account codes. Note: If you have not entered any amounts for the account code records, once all the account numbers have been entered, click

general:acct_rec_invoice_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:15:59+00:00

BBB Needs Review (N) - Invoice has been created but cannot be printed until reviewed. BBB Returned (R) - Invoice has been reviewed but not approved. Returned to originator. BBB Approved (A) - Invoice has been reviewed and approved. If review not needed, approve when created.

general:acct_rec_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-25T15:23:04+00:00

Click to add notes to the selected invoice. Type the note that you want to be printed on the invoice. Click OK to continue and return to the Create/Modify Invoice page. Otherwise, click Cancel to not record notes and return to the Create/Modify Invoice page.

general:acct_rec_po_required

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-25T14:49:12+00:00

Select if the customer is required to submit a purchase order before the product/service can be invoiced. By default, P.O. Required is selected. If selected and no purchase order number is entered when creating an invoice for this customer, the error message

general:acct_rec_printcopy

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-25T15:21:19+00:00

Click to print a copy of the invoice. An invoice that is printed from this page is assumed to be a convenience copy, not the real invoice. Review the report.

general:acct_rec_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-25T14:48:58+00:00

By default, this field is set to Active. If the customer is set to Inactive, the record remains, but you cannot use it in posting data. If set to Inactive, you can use the customer name for transactions that were created prior to setting the flag (e.g., printing invoices, reversals, changes), but not to create new transactions.

general:acct_rec_submit_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-19T20:18:16+00:00

Click to submit the invoice for approval.

general:acct_rec_uniform_dist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-19T20:03:21+00:00

Click to distribute amounts. The Uniform Account Distribution window is displayed, which is used to split all the costs for an invoice between two or more funds. The percentage split does not have to be the same for each fund, but the sum of all percentages must total 100%.

general:acct_rec_update_totals

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-23T20:09:40+00:00

VCV Click Update Totals/Description to populate the default offset fields. Click [Small Picklist Icon] to select a different offset object code, subobject code, or organization code for the offset account. The Budget Total and Description are also updated. Notes

Invoice Directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-24T19:55:42+00:00

Invoice Directory Use the following fields to perform an invoice search. * To search for a specific invoice number, type data in one or more of the search fields. * To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. * Click Search

general:acct_recv_invoice_path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:28:21+00:00

Click to display the Approval Path page, which allows you to insert an approver. Under Insert Approver: Click Before or After to indicate where to insert the approver. In the Approver field, click [Dropdown Arrow Icon] to select an approver. Click OK to save the inserted approver and close the dialog box. Otherwise, click

general:acct_recv_search_for_invoice_retrieve_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:23:27+00:00

In the Invoice Number field, type the invoice number to be retrieved, if known. Leading zeros are not required. The field can be a maximum of six digits. If you type a partial invoice number (from one to five digits) and tab out of the field, the field is zero-filled to six digits. If alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:acct_recv_search_for_invoice_status_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:27:55+00:00

Invoice NumberType the invoice number to be retrieved, if known. Leading zeros are not required. The field can be a maximum of six digits. If you type a partial invoice number (from one to five digits) and tab out of the field, the field is zero-filled to six digits. If alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:acct_recv_search_for_invoice_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:17:31+00:00

In the Template Nbr field, type the specific template number that is to be retrieved. Click Retrieve. If the template number is not known, click Directory. A list of templates is displayed. Select an item from the list. Otherwise, click Cancel

general:acct_recv_search_for_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:17:16+00:00

In the Invoice Number field, type the invoice number to be retrieved if known. Leading zeros are not required. The field can be a maximum of six digits. If you type a partial invoice number (from one to five digits) and tab out of the field, the field is zero-filled to six digits. If alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:acct_recv_void_adjustment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:25:52+00:00

The difference between the remaining amount in the record and the adjusted amount you entered is determined, and an Invoice Adjustment record that reflects that amount is created. The Totals field changes to reflect the reduction in the amount. In the

general:acct_recv_void_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-22T20:00:13+00:00

Click to void an invoice. The balance in the existing invoice budget records is reversed in Finance and creates an adjustment record to record the date, person performing the void, and the adjustment reason. The invoice record is not deleted. Note: If a payment has already been made on an invoice, the invoice cannot be voided.

general:acct_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-01T19:27:24+00:00

Type the one-digit account type code. Or, select one of the following from the drop-down list. BBB 2 - Checking account BBB 3 - Savings account

general:accts_rec_cash_receipt_inquiry_process_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-07T15:12:18+00:00

Click [Dropdown Arrow Icon] to select one of the following: BBB Unprocessed Only - Select to include cash receipts without a process date. Unprocessed cash receipts can still be edited (reversed). When the End of Month Closing utility is run, the unprocessed cash receipts are processed.

general:accts_rec_cash_receipt_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-14T17:58:54+00:00

Type a six-digit cash receipt number, or click Cash Receipts to open the Cash Receipts lookup to search for and select a cash receipt number. Note: Only cash receipt transactions from the current Accounts Receivable accounting period and current Finance GL file ID are included in the Cash Receipts lookup.

general:accts_rec_change_fiscal_year

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T20:33:03+00:00

If any errors are encountered during the execution process, the Change Fiscal Year Error List report is displayed. Review the report. Review the report using the following buttons: Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page of the report. Click [Previous Page Button] to go back one page.

general:accts_rec_create_periodic_invoice

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:56:36+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. One invoice is created for each template listed and assigns the next available invoice number to the new periodic invoice. The system adds one to the Nbr Created field in the template record and updates the

general:accts_rec_delete_customer_records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:52:01+00:00

VCV Click Execute to delete the customers on the right side of the page. A message is displayed confirming that you are about to delete customer records. * Click Yes to continue with the deletion process. * Click No to return to the Delete Customer Records page.

general:accts_rec_distribute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T14:56:30+00:00

VCV Click Distribute to apply the payment amount to the displayed account codes in the invoice number and then account code order. This continues until the payment amount is exhausted. * If the payment amount does not equal the total balance due for all selected invoices, a message is displayed that the payment amount is not sufficient to pay all invoices.

general:accts_rec_general_ledger_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-02-01T20:35:06+00:00

The general ledger invoice description length is limited to 30 characters, which may cause some characters of a customer name to be truncated. For example, if the customer's name is Randall Cleaning Service: * The description for a new invoice is the six-digit invoice number and the customer name (e.g., 123456 Randall Cleaning Servic).

general:accts_rec_group_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-22T19:55:37+00:00

Click [Dropdown Arrow Icon] to select a specific group of invoice templates. Otherwise, leave blank to display all invoice templates. Click Retrieve.

general:accts_rec_import_invoices_process

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:29:36+00:00

VCV Click Process to proceed. A message is displayed indicating the invoices were created successfully.

general:accts_rec_import_invoices

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:29:24+00:00

If any errors are encountered during the import process, the Import Invoices Error Report is displayed. Review the report. If no errors are encountered during the import process, the Import Invoices Preview report is displayed. Review the report.

general:accts_rec_payment_history_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-24T14:15:41+00:00

Notes: * If a cash receipt number was entered, all the payment records associated with the cash receipt number are displayed in the payment grid. * If the invoice selection was based on the customer name or customer number, all printed invoices for the customer are displayed in the grid at the bottom of the tab.

general:accts_rec_payment_history_reverse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:20:52+00:00

VCV Click Reverse to reverse the selected payment. The following occurs: * The payment record is updated with the date of the reversal and the user ID of the person performing the reversal. * The invoice payment record for each account that received money from this payment is updated with the date of the reversal and the user ID of the person performing the reversal.

general:accts_rec_print_invoices_proceed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:58:19+00:00

VCV Click Proceed to print the displayed invoice. A message is displayed prompting you to create a backup. A message is displayed asking if the invoices printed correctly. * Click Yes if the invoices printed correctly. * Click No if the invoices did not print correctly.

general:accts_rec_print_invoices

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:57:09+00:00

VCV Click Generate/Print to print the selected invoices. A preview page is displayed with the first invoice to be printed. The number of invoices generated is based on the Number of Invoices to Print field on the District Administration > Options > Accounts Receivable Options page. If the field is set to zero, a blank page is displayed.

general:accts_rec_save_payment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T14:57:10+00:00

VCV Click Save Payment to save the payment transactions after all payment amounts are applied. * If Use Automatic Cash Receipt Number Assignment is selected on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options tab, the Cash Receipt Nbr

general:accts_rec_select_outstanding_payment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:38:39+00:00

* The cash receipt number, check number, check amount, overpayment amount, and available amount are also displayed. * Select a customer by clicking the Select check box next to the customer's name. If the customer has unpaid invoices, the invoice records are displayed in the bottom grid.

general:accttype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-29T14:42:28+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select from the list of account types that best identify the type of salary. This field is required and must be populated to save entries in the table. The account type cannot be changed if the extra duty code has already been used in the distribution history table.

general:ach

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-05T20:45:24+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following codes: 200 - Mixed debits and credits - The EFT file includes 5200 and 8200 records indicating that the file could contain debit and credit amounts. 220 - Credits only - The EFT file includes 5220 and 8220 records indicating that the file only contains credit amounts.

Actual Extract Automatic Crosswalks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-02-19T21:47:58+00:00

Actual Extract Automatic Crosswalks If your district maintains actual data in greater detail than the state-mandated level, the detail is summarized to the state-mandated level. The automatic crosswalks in the extract program perform the summarization.

general:actualhrs_absded

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-19T19:22:13+00:00

Type the number of actual hours worked for the variable hour employee. The actual hours worked value can be a negative or positive number. Notes: The requirements for determining the actual hours worked by an employee should be defined by an LEA policy.

general:actualhrs_extraduties

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-19T19:21:39+00:00

general:actualhrs_ovtmhrs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-19T19:22:26+00:00

general:actualhrs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-19T19:21:55+00:00

Actual Hours Worked and Actual Date Notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-14T18:38:06+00:00

Actual Hours Worked and Actual Date Notes During the payroll process: * Select the Update Actual Hours From Payroll Processing field on the Payroll > Tables > District HR Options page to use the actual hour data from the pay transmittals (during payroll processing) to update/insert records to the Actual Hours table that is used for TRS processing.

general:add_1099_work_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-31T15:56:38+00:00

VCV Click Add to create a 1099 work table. You are prompted for any adjustments needed to other tables within Finance. * The table populates the 1099 Record Maintenance page and allows you to modify entries. If you created the 1099 Object Codes table prior to running this process, only transactions that have the same object code as the 1099 Object Code table are selected. If the Create 1099 Work Table - Add is performed after a manual add or manual change of an existing record, the manual ent…

general:add_a_bank_account_group_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-12T13:38:50+00:00

VCV Click +Add to add a row. Field Description CodeType the four-character code for the bank account group. Special characters are allowed.DescriptionType the bank account group description. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters. Special characters are allowed.

Define categories

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T15:16:35+00:00

Define categories Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Reconciliation Layout > Categories [Bank Reconciliation Categories] This tab is used to define the categories (fields) displayed on the Bank Reconciliation page. These categories are used in the reconciliation layout template, which is managed on the Layout tab. There are two layout type options: *

general:add_a_category

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-10T19:21:03+00:00

Click +Add to add a row. Field Description DescriptionType the 30-character category description to be displayed in the bank reconciliation layout. In the Operator field: Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the operation to be used for the category description. If the

general:add_a_row_bank_account_group

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-29T16:02:55+00:00

Click to add a row to the grid or press ALT+1. Note: When using ALT+1 to add a new row to the grid, you must use the 1 key on the keyboard, not the 1 key on the numeric keypad.

general:add_a_row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-26T20:53:49+00:00

Click to add a row to the grid.

(If necessary) Add alternate approvers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T16:45:56+00:00

(If necessary) Add alternate approvers District Administration > Workflow > Alternate Approver If an approver is unavailable to perform approval duties, you can set up an alternate approver for a specified length of time. Alternate approvers must have an employee number in Security Administration. [District Administration Workflow Alternate Approvers] Workflow Type

general:add_amendment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T19:53:04+00:00

Click to add an amendment. Budget amendments can only be created in file ID C. This button is disabled for all prior year file IDs.

Establish approval rules

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T16:42:06+00:00

Establish approval rules District Administration > Workflow > Approval Rules Establish account code rules for each approver in the approval path except the first approver. An approver may have multiple sets of approval rules. Approvers must have an employee number in Security Administration. [District Administration Workflow Approval Rules] Workflow Type

Establish the approval path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T16:40:48+00:00

Establish the approval path District Administration > Workflow > Approval Path Create and maintain the sequence or hierarchy of approvers for the approval process. The order in which approvers are listed indicates the approval sequence. You can add to or edit the approval path as needed as long as the approver does not have requisitions pending their approval. If a change is made to the approval path, the change applies to all requisitions that have yet to reach that specific approver.

general:add_bank_recon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-03T17:00:22+00:00

Recon TitleType a bank reconciliation title. This field is required.Bank Account Grp Type a bank account group for which you want to reconcile transactions. This field is required. If the bank account group code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Bank Account Grp lookup is displayed. To narrow the search for a bank account group code, type data in the

general:add_extra_duty_code_to_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-05T20:43:16+00:00

This feature allows the user to mass add type S - Supplemental pay codes to employees. If the employee already has the extra duty code as type S - Supplemental pay, the employee is not included. If the employee is processed, the employee extra duty record, XTRA - Extra Duty job code, and distribution records are inserted. The account code on the

Add first approver(s)

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-16T19:27:54+00:00

Add first approver(s) District Administration > Workflow > First Approver Create and maintain a list of first approvers for requisitions at each campus/department. These individuals are the first people at their assigned campus/department to view the submitted requisitions. [District Administration First Approver] Workflow TypeClick [Drop-down Arrow] and select the Purchasing Requisition workflow.

Add insurance data to employee records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-28T15:25:24+00:00

Add insurance data to employee records Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Insurance Ensure that each employee has updated insurance data on the Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Insurance tab. You can manually enter the data or use the Personnel > Utilities > Import Staff Demo Insurance Data page to import the insurance data from a file provided by a third-party administrator or an enrollment vendor.

general:add_leave_code_to_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T00:27:22+00:00

Only active leave types from the Leave Type Description table can be added to the selected employees' records. Under Add Leave Code: In the New Code field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the leave code to be added. In the Begin Balance field, type the beginning balance of the hours of the leave type. You may type three digits to the right of the decimal point.

general:add_pa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-11T15:59:08+00:00

If Use Automatic PA Number Assignment is selected on the Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options tab, the PA Nbr field displays AUTO. Once the record is saved, AUTO is replaced with the next available PA number. If Use Automatic PA Number Assignment

Add receiving addresses

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:24:38+00:00

Add receiving addresses District Administration > Tables > Receiving Addresses Create a contact list of receiving addresses for the LEA. There can be multiple receiving sites at one campus and multiple addresses for an individual. [District Administration Receiving Addresses]

general:add_remaining_deduction_payments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-06T20:25:56+00:00

Under Add Deduction Info: In the New Code field, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the new deduction code. In the Net Amount field, type the dollar value of the deduction. In the Remaining Payments field, type the number of payments remaining. In the Emplr Contrib

general:add_rp_record

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:39:41+00:00

VCV Click [Add Button] to add a record. The corresponding maintenance pop-up window is displayed allowing you to add and save data. Complete the necessary fields and click Add to add the record. When the record is successfully added, an Add Successful message is displayed and the

Add the bank account group funds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-18T17:27:50+00:00

Add the bank account group funds Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Bank Account Fund Groups > Bank Account Group Funds [Bank Account Group Funds] This tab is used to create multiple group funds for each bank account: * For each of the individual funds created, you can have multiple investment and cash object/subobject combinations. * You can change between bank groups and edit records. Funds cannot be duplicated.

general:add_vendor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-14T20:11:47+00:00

Click to clear all fields and add a vendor.

general:additionalincometaxnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-05T21:28:58+00:00

For tax years less than or equal to 2019, the original data fields are displayed (except for the table column headers, which changed per IRS documentation) and data is saved per marital status and per pay frequency. For tax years greater than or equal to 2020, the new data fields are displayed and data is saved per the following guidelines:

general:additionalincometaxnotes2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-12-04T21:41:44+00:00

The Fed Income Tax table accepts import files without a pay frequency and with Tax Rate Codes A-I. * A - Standard / Married filing jointly * B - Standard / Single or Married filing separately * C - Standard / Head of household * D - Higher / Married filing jointly

Add object code data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:30:20+00:00

Add object code data Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Member Grants > Object Maintenance Add budget details allocated by object class for a specified year and grant ID. Amounts can be added until the original budget is saved. If you need to make changes after the original budget is saved, a budget adjustment or revision is required.

general:adjdaysinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-14T21:14:59+00:00

This utility is used to extract the available days worked from the TRS calendar and from any leave docks that were processed through the payroll leave transmittals process for leave types that have Use For Dock TRS Days selected on the Payroll > Tables > Leave > Leave Type Description tab. If the adjustment days are a result of a leave dock, and the employee has multiple jobs with multiple position codes, then the adjustment days are recorded for each of the TRS position codes. The data is extra…

general:adjstatemincalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:40:08+00:00

Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. State Minimum Salary (as recorded on the Job Info tab) x Fund Percentage = State Minimum Salary by Fund B. State Minimum Salary by Fund/Number of Annual Payments = State Minimum Salary by Fund by Payroll C. State Minimum Salary by Fund by Payroll x District CEI Rate =

general:adjstatemincalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:22:07+00:00

Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. State Minimum Salary (as recorded on the Job Info tab) x Fund Percentage = State Minimum Salary by Fund B. State Minimum Salary by Fund x District CEI Rate = Adjusted State Minimum Salary (A) State Minimum Salary

general:adjstatemincalc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T15:58:59+00:00

Adjusted State Minimum Calculation State Minimum Salary (as recorded on the Job Info tab) x District CEI Rate = Adjusted State Minimum Salary State Minimum Salarymultiplied by District CEIAdjusted State Minimum Salary$29,589.00x 1.11= $32,843.79

general:adjstatmincalc_monthlypayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:25:21+00:00

Adjusted Statutory Minimum Calculation A. State Minimum Salary (as recorded on the Job Info tab)/Number of Annual Payments = State Minimum Salary by Payroll B. State Minimum Salary by Payroll x District CEI Rate = Adjusted State Minimum Salary (A)

general:adjtrssalaryaboveadjstatemincalc_monthlypayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:27:55+00:00

Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary/Number of Annual Payments = Eligible TRS Salary by Payroll B. Eligible TRS Salary by Payroll - Adjusted State Minimum = Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum

general:adjtrssalaryaboveadjstatemincalc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:00:40+00:00

Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Calculation Eligible TRS Salary - Adjusted State Minimum = Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Eligible TRS Salaryminus Adjusted State MinimumAdjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum

general:adjtrssalaryabovesadjstatemincalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:44:48+00:00

Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Eligible TRS Salary by Fund/Number of Annual Payments = Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll C. Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll - Adjusted State Minimum =

general:adjtrssalaryabovesadjstatemincalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:25:34+00:00

Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund - Adjusted State Minimum = Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum

general:adjusted_state_minimum_calculation_b

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:32:04+00:00

4. Adjusted State Minimum Calculation TRS 373 District Contribution/Number of Annual Payments = Monthly TRS 373 District Contribution x Number of Annual Payments less the New Member Waiting Period = New Member Adjusted TRS 373 District Contribution

general:adjusted_state_minimum_calculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:24:58+00:00

1. Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. State Minimum Salary (as recorded on the Job Info tab)/Number of Annual Payments x New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) = State Minimum Salary - New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) B. State Minimum Salary - New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) x District CEI Rate = Adjusted State Minimum Salary

general:adjusted_trs_salary_above_adjusted_state_minimum_calculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:26:56+00:00

2. Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary/Number of Annual Payments x New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) = Eligible TRS Salary - New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) B. Eligible TRS Salary - New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) - Adjusted State Minimum =

general:adjustment_reason_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T14:43:50+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the reason for the adjustment. A - End/Add Contract/Position Record - If selected, all New Position and Contract fields that are required on the ED40 are required. If the FTE Hours and Hourly Pay Rate fields are blank, the values are reset to 0 and 0.00 when the record is saved unless they are required based on the

general:alememberinfomonthlytab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-28T17:11:27+00:00

Column Description Minimum Essential Coverage Offer IndicatorIn the All 12 months field: Select Yes if the employer offered the minimum essential coverage to at least 95% of its full-time employees and their dependents for the entire calendar year, or if the employer did not offer the minimum essential coverage to at least 95% of its full-time employees and their dependents but is eligible for certain transition relief.

general:alememberinfotab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T21:18:53+00:00

Field Description Calendar YearPopulated with the current calendar year; however, you can enter a different year. The year must be greater than or equal to 2015. Click Retrieve to retrieve the employer's record. Is this the authoritative transmittal for this ALE Member?

general:allcomputerchecks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-26T20:15:52+00:00

Field Description All Computer Checks to Finance Clearing FundSelect to include computer checks in the bank account group that list the Finance Clearing Fund/Fiscal Year from the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Clearing Fund Maintenance tab. Leave this field blank to filter computer checks by the bank account group. Cash receipts and district checks posted to funds other than the clearing fund are not affected by this option and are alwa…

general:alternate_emp_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-04T20:02:24+00:00

Type an employee number or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select one from the Approver Directory.

general:am_deprec_method

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:31:47+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a code. BBB SL Straight Line - Select if using depreciation. BBB ND No depreciation - Select if no depreciation is used for the property class.

general:amendment_nbr_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-23T18:41:51+00:00

Type an amendment number. The field can be a maximum of six characters. Amendment numbers can be alphanumeric. If only numeric values are used, the field is zero-filled to equal six digits when a partial amendment number is entered and you tab out of the field (e.g., you entered 123, the field is zero-filled to 000123). If alphanumeric values are used, the field is not zero-filled to equal six characters (e.g., you entered ABC2, the amendment number remains ABC2).

general:amendment_nbr_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T19:46:17+00:00

Amendment Nbr Type an amendment number. The field can be a maximum of six characters. Amendment numbers can be alphanumeric. If only numeric values are used, the field is zero-filled to equal six digits when a partial amendment number is entered and you tab out of the field (e.g., you entered 123, the field is zero-filled to 000123). If alphanumeric values are used, the field is not zero-filled to equal six characters (e.g., you entered ABC2, the amendment number remains ABC2).

general:amendment_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T16:56:20+00:00

Type the amendment number, if known, using a maximum of six characters. If numeric values only are used, the system zero-fills the number to six digits when the user enters a partial amendment number and tabs out of the field (e.g., the user entered 123, the system zero-fills the field to 000123). If alphanumeric values are used, the system does not zero-fill the amendment number to six characters (e.g., the user entered ABC2, the amendment number remains ABC2).

general:amount_from

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-29T20:00:14+00:00

Type the bypass dollar amount at which a requisition or request must be approved by the indicated approver. The amount must be entered as a whole dollar.

general:amount_to

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-29T20:00:26+00:00

Type the amount up to which the approver can approve. The amount must be entered as a whole dollar.

general:amount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:42:50+00:00

Type the dollar value to be expended from the budget code. Type all or part of the contract total from the Job Info tab. If the Distributions Built By Amt or % field on the District HR Options page is set to Percentage, then only the Percentage field is enabled for use. For a salaried (pay type 1 or 2) employee, the data in this field is used to calculate the percent amount.

general:apply_overpayment_refresh

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T20:49:30+00:00

Click to restore the data on the page to its original view. A message is displayed prompting you to confirm that you want to continue. Click Yes to refresh the data without saving your changes. Click No to return to the Apply Overpayment page and continue making changes.

general:apply_vacant_position

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-12-13T16:38:43+00:00

Select to apply the employer amount to vacant positions included in the simulation. Note: If your TRS Active-Care is split between more than one payroll deduction code, only select this field for one of the deduction codes. For example, if you have four TRS Active-Care codes and each one has an annual amount of $2700 for the employer contribution and you select this field for all four codes, then each vacant position in your reports will reflect a budget amount of $10,800 for health insurance.

general:applycreditmemos

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T21:16:45+00:00

This field is set to Yes by default. If Yes is selected, the credit memo amount is deducted from the total Check Amount and is displayed in the Credit Amount field. If the invoices entered for a vendor exceed the amount of the credit memo, a zero check is issued to the vendor listing the invoices and credit memos associated with the check. The credit memo balance is reduced by the check amount, and the remaining credit memo amount is available when new invoices are entered for the vendor.

general:applyleaveusedorearnedfirst

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:09:36+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the sequence used to post employee leave transmittals and leave applied using the payroll control record. Posting leave used first to apply leave earned after applying leave used can result in docking an employee's pay during the current payroll period even if the employee has earned leave during the current payroll period. (The user needs to check the local leave policy.)

general:approve_bundle_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-26T15:13:45+00:00

Click to approve the requisition bundle. A message is displayed providing the purchase order number and prompting you to print the Purchasing Requisition Report. Click Yes to print the report. Review the report. Click No to continue and return to the Approve Bundle Requisitions page.

general:approver_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:03:11+00:00

The Approver Directory is displayed. To search for a specific approver, type data in one or more of the search fields. To search through all available approvers, leave all fields blank. Click Retrieve. A list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed.

general:approver_dragdropfeature

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-02T17:25:01+00:00

Drag-and-Drop Feature Press and hold down the left mouse button on the desired row to “Grab” it. “Drag” the row to the desired location. “Drop” the row by releasing the mouse button.

Approve a requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-27T19:00:26+00:00

Approve a requisition Purchasing > Maintenance > Approve Requisition Only users who have permission to approve requisitions can access the Approve Requisitions page. This page allows approvers to: * Approve or disapprove individual requisition items. * Approve or disapprove the entire requisition.

general:approversearch_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-02T17:22:44+00:00

The Approver Search directory is displayed. Use the following fields to perform an approver search. * To search for an approver, type data in one or more of the search fields. * To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. *

general:approvewjrequests

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-26T15:31:26+00:00

When you access the Approve WorkJournal page, a list of WorkJournal requests pending your action is displayed if any. VCV Select the requests that you want to approve or return. You can select individual requests (checkboxes) or select the top Select All

Select AR permissions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-26T15:44:26+00:00

Select AR permissions District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Permissions Under Accounts Receivable, select Global Access to allow the user to view all invoices regardless of the originator. [District Admin User Profile Permissions]

Select AR options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-26T15:44:49+00:00

Select AR options District Administration > Options > Accounts Receivable Set up Accounts Receivable options such as the number of invoices to print, labels for each invoice copy, payment terms, overdue comments, and whether to review invoices. [District Admin User Profile AR Options]

Set up AR workflow

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-21T20:00:47+00:00

Set up AR workflow District Administration > Workflow > Approval Path Use the following pages to set up the first approver, the approval path (hierarchy of approvers), approval rules, and alternate approvers (as needed) for the Accounts Receivable invoice approval process.

Verify accounting periods

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-21T20:03:31+00:00

Verify accounting periods Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Accounting Periods Verify that the Accounts Receivable Period is accurate. The Accounts Receivable Period field cannot be less than the Current (Open) Accounting Period field nor greater than the Next Accounting Posting Period field. [Finance Accounting Periods Tab]

Add or verify clearing accounts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-21T20:07:19+00:00

Add or verify clearing accounts District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Permissions Under Accounts Receivable, add or verify the following: * Offset Obj * Offset Sobj * Offset Org [Accounts Receivable Permissions] The above fields are used as the default account codes for the user when creating invoices on the Accounts Receivable > Maintenance > Create/Modify Invoice page. If these fields are blank, then the

(Optional) Create vendor records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-21T20:15:40+00:00

(Optional) Create vendor records Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address Set up customers with a vendor number. A vendor number is required to process an overpayments (refunds) to the customer. After creating a vendor number for the customer, add the vendor number to the customer record in the following step as you are creating new customer records or updating existing records.

Create customer records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-21T20:13:55+00:00

Create customer records Accounts Receivable > Tables > Customer Information Set up customers and add vendor information at this time if the previous step was completed. If not, vendor information can be added at a later time. [AR Customer Information Record] * If Auto Assign Customer is selected on the District Administration > Options > Accounts Receivable Options page, then the

Create product information records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-26T15:47:53+00:00

Create product information records Accounts Receivable > Tables > Product Information Add product information. This allows invoices that are manually entered to automatically retrieve the product information and unit cost amount. Invoices and invoice templates may be created without this table. However, if this table does exist when an invoice is created, then the product types are available in the

Create invoices

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-26T15:48:15+00:00

Create invoices Accounts Receivable > Maintenance > Create/Modify Invoice or Accounts Receivable > Utilities > Import Invoices You have two options for creating invoices. You can manually enter invoices on the Create/Modify Invoice page or import the invoices using the Import Invoices page.

Print invoices

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-26T15:48:40+00:00

Print invoices Accounts Receivable > Utilities > Print Invoices Print the customer invoices. The following occurs when printing invoices: * A realized revenue is created in Finance (credit to revenue). * A receivable is created in the 12XX account in Finance (debit to receivable). After an invoice is printed, it is no longer available for changes in Accounts Receivable; however, you can reprint it using the Reports menu.

Record customer payments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-28T19:53:46+00:00

Record customer payments Accounts Receivable > Maintenance > Invoice Payments > Payments Record the customer payments. You can continue posting to the same cash receipt number throughout the day. This process will: * Create a cash receipt coded against the 12XX account (credits receivable) * Debits cash *

general:asset_man_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:34:18+00:00

Type the account code to which the transaction is to be posted. BBB Press the SPACEBAR to view a list of account codes associated to your user profile. If the account code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Accounts Codes lookup is displayed. BBB Type data in the individual account code component fields, and click

general:asset_man_addnewandupdateexisting

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:51:30+00:00

If there is no item number or bar code for a record in the upload file, the record is not added to the Asset Management records, and the message ”r;No item nbr or bar code. Not processed.” is printed on the Inventory Upload Error Report. If the item number record does not already exist in the Asset Management application and it does exist in the merge text file, it is a new record to be added to the Asset Management Item Master table (GIcccddd) and the Transaction table (GTcccddd).

general:asset_man_addnewonly

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:50:54+00:00

general:asset_man_amount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:30:00+00:00

Type the amount of the current transaction. The field is required for depreciation calculations. This amount can be positive or negative. If an incorrect amount was originally entered, a reverse transaction should be created for the same amount but with the opposite sign.

general:asset_man_amttodetassettype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:53:10+00:00

If an item is equal to or greater than this value, it is a capitalized item and is an inventory type C record in the Item Master table. An inventory record, transaction record, depreciation distribution record, and book record are created for the item.

general:asset_man_cat_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-02T15:44:04+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a catalog number. The catalog number must exist on the Tables > Catalog tab before it can be selected on this page. If Use Catalog Description is selected on the Tables > Asset Management Options page, and you type an existing catalog number, the description from the Catalog table is used if the

general:asset_man_changecampus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:43:25+00:00

Select to change the campus code for the selected item(s). BBB In the From column of the Campus field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original campus code from the inventory records. BBB In the To column of the Campus field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new campus code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changecatalognbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:42:54+00:00

Select to change the catalog number for the selected item(s). BBB In the From column of the Catalog Nbr field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original catalog number from the inventory records. BBB In the To column of the Catalog Nbr field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new catalog number from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changeconditioncode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:40:55+00:00

Select to change the condition code for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Condition field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original condition code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Condition field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new condition code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changeconvention

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:45:11+00:00

Select to change the convention code for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Convention field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original convention code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Convention field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new convention code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changedept

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:40:43+00:00

Select to change the department code for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Department field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original department code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Department field, type the new department code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changegaincode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:41:08+00:00

Select to change the gain code for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Gain field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original gain code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Gain field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new gain code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changeinsurancecode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:41:21+00:00

Select to change the insurance code for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Insurance field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original insurance code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Insurance field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new insurance code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changemethod

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:44:57+00:00

Select to change the method for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Method field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original method number from the inventory records. In the To column of the Method field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new method number from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changepropertyclass

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:44:45+00:00

Select to change the property class for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Property Class field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original property class code from the inventory records. In the To column of the Property Class field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new property class from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changeroom

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:23:42+00:00

Select to change the room number for the selected item(s). In the From column of the Room field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original room number from the inventory records. In the To column of the Room field, type the new room number from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_changestatuscode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:42:29+00:00

Select to change the status code for the selected item(s). BBB In the From column of the Status field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original status code from the inventory records. BBB In the To column of the Status field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the new status code from the asset management code tables.

general:asset_man_checkout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-11T21:26:10+00:00

Select to delete checkout records. Check Out Return DateType the date for which completed records (return date not blank) should be deleted. All records with a return date less than or equal to the date entered are deleted.

general:asset_man_copy_current

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-10T16:08:11+00:00

A warning message is displayed informing you that you are about to copy data from the current to the selected file ID. * Click Yes to continue with the copy process. Otherwise, click No to return to the Copy Current to New File ID page. If you click

general:asset_man_datecheckout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-08T18:51:36+00:00

Type the date the item was checked out in the MMDDYYYY format. The field is required. By default, the field is populated with the current system date, but the date can be changed. Note: If you type an invalid check out date and click Save, the field is populated with 00-00-0000 and an error message is displayed.

general:asset_man_delete_capital_asset_and_inventory_records2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:09:03+00:00

Select to delete inventory master records and all associated records. If selected, the following options are enabled under Inventory Types: Capital Assets - If selected, the Status Codes field is required. Inventory Both - If selected, the program requires the

general:asset_man_delete_capital_asset_and_inventory_records3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:09:20+00:00

Select to select one or more types of audit table records to be deleted. Inventory Audit Table - Records selected are based on the date acquired. Transaction Audit Table - Records selected are based on the effective date. Book Audit Table - Records selected are based on the date in service.

general:asset_man_deletebyfileid_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T22:00:05+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to delete Asset Management tables and confirming that you want to continue. * Click Yes to continue the deletion. * Otherwise, click No to cancel the deletion.

general:asset_man_depreciation_rollover_process

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T22:01:44+00:00

VCV Click Process to complete the depreciation distribution fund rollover process. A message is displayed indicating that the Depreciation Distribution Fund Rollover process completed successfully. Click OK.

general:asset_man_depreciation_rollover

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T22:01:10+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A Depreciation Distribution Fund Rollover report is displayed if there are any depreciation distribution records that exist for the new year being created by the fund rollover processes. Review the report. If the records were created in error or if the fund rollover process should be performed again, click

general:asset_man_duplicate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:42:14+00:00

VCV Locate the transaction that you want to duplicate and click Duplicate. * In the transaction Amount field, type a minus (-) in front of the existing value to reverse the previous transaction amount, or enter a new amount. * Click Save to save the transaction record.

general:asset_man_enternewfiscalyear

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-11T16:38:53+00:00

Type the new fiscal year in the YYYY format. Note: This value replaces the current fiscal year in the Asset Management Options table, in addition to inserting the new depreciation distribution records.

general:asset_man_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:51:35+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to export asset management tables and confirming that you want to continue. * Click Yes to continue the export. * Otherwise, click No to cancel the export.

general:asset_man_exportbyfileid_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:59:15+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to export Asset Management tables and confirming that you want to continue. * Click Yes to continue the export. * Otherwise, click No to cancel the export.

general:asset_man_from_item_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T16:59:49+00:00

Type the inventory number, if known. If the inventory number is not known, click Directory. Notes: To select multiple rows when the inventory numbers are consecutive, select an item to start at, and then press and hold SHIFT while selecting an item to end the selection process. All items (between the first and last item) in the sequence are now selected.

general:asset_man_import

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-22T17:01:50+00:00

VCV Click Import to begin the import process. * Click Choose File to select the file that you created from Finance. * Click Submit to import the selected file. A list of assets that can be moved from Finance is displayed. * Select the asset to extract from Finance.

general:asset_man_inventory_lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T16:51:35+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to search for item numbers.

general:asset_man_item_nbrs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-11T20:11:24+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to search for item numbers.

general:asset_man_massdelete_fromdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:06:21+00:00

Type the beginning date to use when evaluating records for deletion. If no date is entered, 00000000 is assumed. This date is compared to the inventory audit acquired date to delete inventory audit records, the transaction audit effective date to delete transaction audit records, and the book audit date in service to delete book audit records.

general:asset_man_massdelete_todate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:06:40+00:00

Type the ending date to use when evaluating records for deletion. If no date is entered, 12319999 is assumed. This date is compared to the inventory audit acquired date to delete inventory audit records, the transaction audit effective date to delete transaction audit records, and the book audit date in service to delete book audit records.

general:asset_man_num_of_units

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:32:27+00:00

Type a quantity. The field is required for depreciation calculations and can be a maximum of 11 digits. When the Number of Units and Unit Cost fields are entered, the Total Cost field is calculated. Anytime the Number of Units field is changed, the

general:asset_man_refresh_totals

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:44:26+00:00

VCV Click Refresh Total to update the Total Units Checked Out field.

general:asset_man_status_codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T16:51:49+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to search for status codes.

general:asset_man_timecheckout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-08T18:53:47+00:00

Type the time in the format hh:mmA or hh:mmP (e.g., 09:05A). The field is required. By default, the field is populated with the current system time, but the time can be changed. When manually typing the time, you must type the colon and a capital A or capital P.

general:asset_man_to_item_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-18T19:42:58+00:00

You cannot enter an inventory item number if the Auto Assign field is selected on the Asset Management Options table. The inventory item number is automatically assigned when you click Execute. If the Auto Assign field is not selected on the Asset Management Options table, you must enter an inventory item number. The inventory item number cannot exist in the inventory master record.

general:asset_man_tomask

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-10T16:50:20+00:00

Type the changed account code elements. Note: Verify the mask for accuracy. The From Mask field is updated to the date that is in the To Mask field, even if it is not correct.

general:asset_man_total_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-10T19:55:54+00:00

Type a value for the cost of an item or group of items (the cost can include sales price, shipping, and handling). Note: If the field is imported from the Finance save file, it is retrieved from the Expense Amount field in the Finance transaction file

general:asset_man_transaction_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:35:53+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a valid transaction type code from the Transaction Code table. The field is required for depreciation calculations. Transaction types: BBB O = Original - New transactions Affects depreciation cost. The book record defaults to depreciation cost if this is a new amount. If a book record is already created, change it to reflect the changes made to the Transaction Amounts.

general:asset_man_updateexistingonly

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:52:07+00:00

If there is no item number or bar code for a record in the upload file, the record is not updated in the Asset Management records, and the message ”r;No item nbr or bar code. Not processed.” is printed on the Inventory Upload Error Report. If the item number record already exists in the Asset Management application, the program updates data in the Item Master table (GIcccddd) and in the depreciated cost and basis of adjustment columns of the Book table (GBcccddd). A before and after image of th…

general:assetmanagement_add_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T14:53:29+00:00

AddClick to add an item.Item NbrIf Automatic Item Numbering is not selected on the Asset Management Options page, type an item number. The field can be a maximum of ten digits. Note: If Automatic Item Numbering is selected on the Asset Management Options page, the

general:assetmanagement_adjusted_basis

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-04T20:47:09+00:00

This amount is calculated as follows: Adjusted Basis = Depreciable Cost - Salvage Value. When a transaction record is added, the Adjusted Basis field is updated with the new amount.

general:assetmanagement_convention

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:02:00+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a valid convention. The field is required for depreciation calculations. If left blank, it is populated from the property class record. BBB Full Month (FM) – Calculate depreciation after the first full month. BBB Half Year (HY)

general:assetmanagement_deprec_method

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:00:14+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a valid depreciation method code. There are only two depreciation methods available: BBB Straight Line (SL) - SL depreciation only. Uses the two conventions available, Full Month (FM) and Half Year (HY). BBB No Depreciation (ND) - Used for land or other assets that do not lose value.

general:assetmanagement_depreciation_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-04T20:44:35+00:00

Type the depreciable cost of the item. If adding a new record, the field is populated from the Total Cost field on the Inventory Records tab. A negative depreciation cost can be entered. If the salvage value is not zero, the depreciation cost is negative, and the salvage value is greater than the depreciation cost, a warning is issued, and the user can save the record.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T14:55:32+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Inventory Records VCV Add an item. AddClick to add an item.Item NbrIf Automatic Item Numbering is not selected on the Asset Management Options page, type an item number. The field can be a maximum of ten digits. Note: If Automatic Item Numbering is selected on the Asset Management Options page, the

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T14:57:33+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Transaction Records Enter a new transaction when: * An item is first acquired. * Existing transaction amounts change. If an amount is incorrect, enter a new transaction for the difference in the amount, position or negative amounts can be added. * Amounts need to be entered multiple times for different account codes.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-11T16:37:04+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Depreciation Distribution Records Define how depreciation is distributed by the LEA. * Used for capital assets only (inventory type = C). * Each account code is a separate record. * There should be a distribution record for each year that the depreciation is calculated. *

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-11T18:45:43+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Book Records The following fields are required for depreciation calculations, all other fields are optional. Review the Help page for additional information about the optional fields. Property ClassClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the property class description. The field is required for depreciation calculations.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:02:21+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Manufacturer Information Maintain information about the make, model, and warranty information for an asset. This information is not mandatory for depreciation; however, it is useful in retrieving information for the manufacturer.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step6

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-11T18:59:51+00:00

Finance > Utilities > Extract to Asset Management This utility is used to extract records from the Check Transactions file with an object/subobject code that matches an item in the Asset Management Cross-Reference table. Individual items from the file can then be retrieved into the Asset Management application. The extract file is only available in text format, even though the CSV icon is displayed.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step7

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:02:45+00:00

Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Transaction Records The transaction record information is added to the Inventory Records tab. VCV Click Import to begin the import process. * Click Choose File to select the file that you created from Finance. * Click Submit to import the selected file. A list of assets that can be moved from Finance is displayed.

general:assetmanagement_enterrecordsinassetmanagement_checklist_step8

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-11T20:17:10+00:00

Asset Management > Utilities > Merge Asset Management Text File This utility is used to upload Asset Management tables that were created using another type of software. All records being merged must have an item number or bar code. The item number or bar code becomes the item number for the Asset Management application inventory record. If no item number or bar code exists, the record is not added or updated in the Asset Management application.

Verify object/subobject codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T20:53:29+00:00

Verify object/subobject codes Finance > Tables > Asset Management Cross-Reference > Object/Subobject Codes Verify that object/subobject codes for any assets that need to be carried over exist in the Asset Management Cross-Reference table. If you need to add object/subobject codes to the table, the codes must exist in the Chart of Accounts.

Extract data to Asset Management

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T20:54:57+00:00

Extract data to Asset Management Finance > Utilities > Extract to Asset Management Run the Extract to Asset Management utility to extract data from Finance to Asset Management. [Extract to Asset Management] VCV Under Create Asset Management Extract File from, select Processed Check Transactions to enable the Year fields and complete the

(Optional) Verify automatic numbering

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T20:57:00+00:00

(Optional) Verify automatic numbering Asset Management > Tables > District Asset Management Options If you want ASCENDER to maintain and auto-assign the next available Inventory Item numbers when adding or importing new items, select Automatic Item Numbering. [Asset Management Options]

Import/add asset items from Finance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-11T14:44:25+00:00

Import/add asset items from Finance Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Transaction Records Use the file that you previously created in Finance on the Extract to Asset Management page to import asset items. Or, manually add asset items as needed. [Transaction Records Import] VCV Click Import to begin the import process.

(Optional) Generate the Campus Room Inventory Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-28T16:17:20+00:00

(Optional) Generate the Campus Room Inventory Report Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1400 - Campus Room Inventory Listing Generate and distribute the Campus Room Inventory Reports to staff so that they can verify the location and account for the various items. It is best practice to generate the report in May prior to the end of the school year. Employees can make changes in red ink, sign the report, and then return it to the appropriate department/person al…

Update asset items

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-22T15:09:13+00:00

Update asset items Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Inventory Records Review the Campus Room Inventory Report to identify and make the necessary changes to asset item records.

Mass update last inventory dates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-28T21:22:23+00:00

Mass update last inventory dates Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1400 - Campus Room Inventory Listing After the annual inventory has been completed and any changes to items recorded, perform a Mass Update to update the Last Inventory Date on the Inventory Records tab. [Mass Update Inventory Tab] [Mass Update Preview]

Generate the Status Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T14:38:59+00:00

Generate the Status Report Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1050 - Status Report Generate the report to review any asset items that were sold, deleted, or entered in error. All items entered in error, for sale, or to be deleted must have a status code change on the Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Inventory Records tab to reflect their status.

Enter sale information for capital assets

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-28T21:44:25+00:00

Enter sale information for capital assets Asset Management > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance > Inventory Records Verify that the required information is entered for the sale of any capital assets. The Sale Price, Date, and Sold To information is required for the sale of “C” items. You can enter this information on the Inventory Records tab OR on the

Generate the Capital Assets/Inventory Listing, Auditor Analysis, and Property Class Listing Reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T15:07:26+00:00

Generate the Capital Assets/Inventory Listing, Auditor Analysis, and Property Class Listing Reports Generate the following reports to verify data and balance totals for the year. The report totals should match. Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1100 - Auditor Analysis Report The ending balances should match the Auditor's totals. Always Print the Error Report with the Auditor’s Analysis to review issues. Verify these items are coded correctly, if so, the errors …

If report totals match, perform depreciation calculations

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-08-11T13:09:11+00:00

If report totals match, perform depreciation calculations Asset Management > Depreciation > Depreciation Calculations > Calculations If the Capital Asset Listing, Auditor’s Analysis, and Property Class reports are correct/balanced and you have reviewed the Requirements for Depreciation Calculations Checklist, perform your depreciation calculations for the year. [Depreciation Calculations]

If requested by auditor, generate the Depreciation Detail Schedule report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T16:44:04+00:00

If requested by auditor, generate the Depreciation Detail Schedule report Asset Management > Depreciation > Depreciation Calculations > Calculation Reports [Calculation Reports Page] VCV Select Gen Rpt to generate the Depreciation Detail Schedule report. Click Generate Reports. [Depreciation Detail Schedule Report]

Run the Historical Depreciation Schedule Inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T16:45:33+00:00

Run the Historical Depreciation Schedule Inquiry Asset Management > Depreciation > Historical Depreciation Schedule Inquiry Use this inquiry as an easy way to view when depreciation started and what years have been calculated. [Historical Depreciation Schedule Inquiry]

Verify current and next fiscal years exist in fiscal year table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T20:59:10+00:00

Verify current and next fiscal years exist in fiscal year table Asset Management > Tables > Fiscal Year Verify that the current fiscal year and the next fiscal year are listed. [Fiscal Year Table]

Copy current file ID (C) to new file ID for historical purposes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T21:00:21+00:00

Copy current file ID (C) to new file ID for historical purposes Asset Management > Utilities > Copy Current to New File ID Copy the current file ID (C) data into the new historical file ID. This process allows you to copy data that currently exists in file ID C to a new file ID, which will serve as your prior year historical file.

Roll over depreciation distribution funds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T17:29:11+00:00

Roll over depreciation distribution funds Asset Management > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Depreciation Distribution Fund Rollover This utility allows you to create new depreciation distribution records and update the fiscal year of the general ledger account codes in the depreciation distribution records. Capital asset records that are selected must meet the following criteria:

Mass delete asset items deleted, sold, or entered in error

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:23:14+00:00

Mass delete asset items deleted, sold, or entered in error Asset Management > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Mass Delete Mass delete all records that have status codes associated with the item being deleted, sold, or entered in error. This process will delete those records from the current year file ID; however, the items will still be available in your prior year file ID(s).

Initialize audit tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-28T16:18:35+00:00

Initialize audit tables Asset Management > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Initialize Audit Tables This utility should be run after the auditor has completed their review. This process allows you to delete all selected historical audit files based on the file ID. It is best practice to create a backup of your files prior to running this utility as this process does modify files.

Create export of file ID C

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-02T14:52:49+00:00

Create export of file ID C Asset Management > Utilities > Export by File ID Create an export of file ID C as a backup of the beginning new year database. Save the file and record the file name for future reference if needed (e.g., Export File ID C Beginning Year XX-XX) This is a backup of your LEA's new year inventory without any maintenance.

general:assetmanagement_recovery_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:21:32+00:00

Type the number of years required to fully depreciate the item. The field is required for depreciation calculations. If assets are to be depreciated using partial years, the months should be converted to a decimal value (e.g., 3 months = .25, 6 months = .50, and 9 months = .75).

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-18T18:19:05+00:00

1. Make sure that the required information is completed, as noted above.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T19:09:13+00:00

2. Print the following Asset Management Reports to make sure that no errors exist: Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1100 - Auditor Analysis Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1150 - Capital Assets/Inventory Listing Asset Management > Reports > Asset Management Reports > BAM1650 - Property Class Listing

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:16:33+00:00

3. The auditors should have provided you with the following: BBB Convention (FM/HY). BBB Recovery periods for property classes. BBB Capital items that are not disposable.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:21:57+00:00

4. Asset Management > Maintenance > Sale/Disposal of Capital Asset Dispose of items for the year you are calculating.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:22:18+00:00

5. Asset Management > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Mass Delete Delete any prior year disposal items.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step6

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-11T15:02:47+00:00

1. Inventory Records - BAM3000: The following fields are required for depreciation calculations: Inventory TypeThe inventory type (C for capitalized items - $5000.00 and over).Number of UnitsThe number of units in the inventory.Unit CostThe cost per unit.Total CostThe total cost of the item. This is a calculated field.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step7

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-11T15:04:20+00:00

2. Transaction Records - BAM3000: The following fields are required for depreciation calculations: Trans TypeAn O original transaction type must be entered for each item. If corrections are made to the amount entered with an O transaction type, you need to enter a C change transaction type to correct the amount.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step8

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T15:20:28+00:00

3. Depreciation Distribution Records - BAM3000 The following fields are required for depreciation calculations: YearType the year for the records to be added or viewed in the YYYY format. This year must be the same year in the Asset Management Options table, and it also must be included in the Fiscal Year table.

general:assetmanagement_requirementsfordepreciationcalculations_checklist_step9

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-11T15:06:55+00:00

4. Book Records - BAM3000: The following fields are required for depreciation calculations: Property ClassSelect the property class description from the drop-down list.Deprec MethodSelect a valid depreciation method code from the drop-down list.ConventionEnter a valid convention. There are two conventions available, Full Month (FM) and Half Year (HY). This field is required for depreciation calculations.

general:assetmanagement_search_for_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:33:01+00:00

In the Item Nbr field, type the item number to be retrieved, if known. If the number is less than ten digits, the field is auto-filled with leading zeros. Click Retrieve. BBB If the item number is not known, click Directory. BBB To search for a specific item number, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:assetmanagement_search_for_items

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:38:26+00:00

VCV In the Item Nbrs field, type the item number(s) to be updated. * If the item number is not known, click Directory. The Inventory Directory is displayed. * To search for a specific item number, type data in one or more of the search fields. *

general:assetmanagement_setup_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-14T19:13:53+00:00

Asset Management > Tables > District Asset Management Options Select preferences for running the Asset Management application.

general:assetmanagement_setup_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-18T15:26:08+00:00

Asset Management > Tables > Code Tables Use the following code tables to define various codes to assist your district in managing assets. VCV Catalog - (Optional but recommended) This tab is used to create catalog codes that are used to break up large groups of like items (e.g., furniture, classroom furniture, desks) into logical groups. Using this table can simplify record entry and inventory management by placing the description from the catalog table into the record.

general:assetmanagement_setup_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T14:38:56+00:00

Asset Management > Tables > Fiscal Year This page is used to define the month and year ranges for each fiscal year. The first fiscal year entry should be defined for the earliest in-service date for an asset as these entries are used by the program to calculate depreciation for all capital assets.

general:assetmanagement_setup_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-17T20:54:14+00:00

Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options VCV Verify that the School Year field is accurate. VCV Select Use Asset Management Cross Reference Table to use the interface option from Finance to Asset Management.

general:assetmanagement_setup_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T14:40:35+00:00

Finance > Tables > Asset Management Cross-Reference > Object/Subobject Codes This tab uses the object and subobject codes of the account numbers to identify assets that are considered either capital assets or inventory. When a purchase order is processed for payment, items that were purchased under matching account codes are identified by the system for inclusion in the Extract to Asset Management utility.

general:assetmanagementguides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-29T15:23:55+00:00

VCV ASCENDER - Set up Asset Management VCV ASCENDER - Enter Records in Asset Management VCV ASCENDER - Requirements for Depreciation Calculations Checklist VCV ASCENDER - Asset Management Annual Process * Asset Management Annual Process Quick Checklist

Asset Management Summary Quick Checklist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-22T16:54:51+00:00

Asset Management Summary Quick Checklist [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this checklist. Asset Record Maintenance (done throughout the year) Finance VCVVerify the necessary object/subobject codes exist in the Asset Management Cross-Reference table.VCV Run the Extract to Asset Management utility to extract data from Finance to Asset Management.

general:assetmanagementutility_backup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-26T21:16:24+00:00

Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. The File ID field is display only and reflects the file ID to which you are logged on. The Export File Name field is display only. Click

general:assetmanagementutility

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:23:43+00:00

VCV Click Process to update the selected records in the asset management tables. A message is displayed prompting you to create a system backup. A message is displayed indicating that the process was completed successfully. Click OK.

general:assetmanagementutility1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:55:00+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to copy data from the current file ID to the new file ID. * Click Yes to continue. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click

general:assetmanagementutility2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:54:17+00:00

VCV Click Process to update the selected records in the asset management tables. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click OK.

general:assign_leave_types_and_balances_for_each_applicable_pay_frequency

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T19:31:55+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Leave Balance You can assign multiple leave types to employees in the pay frequency to which you are logged on. Note: If the employee has leave balance data in multiple frequencies, the employee can select the pay frequency from the Pay Frequency drop down on the Leave Requests page in EmployeePortal.

general:assign_vendor_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:14:32+00:00

Click to select the vendors to be solicited. The Assign Vendor Directory is displayed. Only vendors with the Bid Eligible field selected on the Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address tab are displayed. To search for a specific item, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:assigned

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-07T15:10:08+00:00

Type the number which indicates the total percentage of the employee’s responsibilities represented by the job entered. For example, if the job represents half of his total assignment, type 50. Note: If the employee has multiple jobs, it is your responsibility to ensure that the job percent assigned is accurate based on the total contract amounts for all jobs, excluding XTRA-coded jobs. The percent assigned is used when distributing absence deductions and refunds across jobs and in next year b…

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_accrualcalendar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T14:00:25+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Accrual Calendars > Accrual Calendar Required: Accrual Calendars must be set up for those employees who will accrue. Pay dates on the Accrual Calendar MUST match the pay dates on the Tables > Pay Dates tab, except for the first entry which corresponds to the August Accrual process. This date is not entered on the Pay Dates tab.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_accrualexpensetable

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T13:57:06+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Accrual Expense It is important to maintain the fiscal years in this table so they reflect the proper fiscal year for account distribution history accrual withdrawal and posting. Failure to do so results in posting to Finance for an account with an incorrect fiscal year.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_clearingfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T14:27:21+00:00

Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Clearing Fund Maintenance Verify that the Payroll Automatic Posting Defaults are entered.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_districthroptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T13:56:05+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District HR Options VCV Select Calculate Accrual Salaries. VCV Verify the First Pay Date of School Year. (Do not change it.) VCV (Optional) Under Automatically Compute, select Accrual Rate.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_schoolytd

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T14:24:51+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > School YTD Data This page is used to access and maintain the payroll year-to-date totals for individual employees including accrual data and accrued days worked by job code. The page is divided into three data groups: Payroll Data, Accrued Data, and Workers' Comp Data. Although the fields are populated as payroll is processed, you can change school YTD records.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_setupjobcodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-30T15:36:35+00:00

Personnel > Tables > Job/Contract > Job Codes Recommended: Complete the accrual code information on the appropriate job codes. This information is used when entering a job code on the Job Info tab. The system refers to this table to determine if an accrual code should be added. If this table is not set up correctly, manual adjustments may be required.

general:augustaccrualprocesssetup_updateemployeemasterrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-30T15:31:44+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info Update the following fields: * Job Code * Pay Type * Payoff Date * TRS Year * Accrual Code * Accrual Rate Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Distributions Update the following fields: * Account Code * Percent * TRS Grant Codes Notes: If you change an employee’s job code on the Job Info tab and the

Generate accrual reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-05T20:43:26+00:00

Generate accrual reports Log on to the NYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Payroll Processing > EOY Payroll Accruals > Accrual Reports After running the accrual calculations, run the following reports to verify that the list of employees for August accruals is accurate and that the employees should be included/excluded in the accrual process.

(If necessary) Calculate TRS On-Behalf

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-14T18:43:46+00:00

(If necessary) Calculate TRS On-Behalf Log on to the CYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Reports > TRS Reports > HRS4150 - TRS On-Behalf Payment Journal If you do not post your TRS On-Behalf on a monthly basis: * Calculate your TRS On-Behalf for the year. * Verify On-Behalf revenue and expenditures are posted for 12 months.

Clear EOY accrual data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-13T19:01:10+00:00

Clear EOY accrual data Log on to the CYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Next Year > Copy CYR Tables to NYR > Clear Next Year Tables VCV Select only the Clear EOY Accrual Data Only field. IMPORTANT: Do not move any tables from the left side to the right side of the page. [Clear Next year Tables EOY Data] VCV Click Execute to clear the prior year accrual calculations.

Decrement

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-21T16:49:30+00:00

Decrement Log on to the NYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Payroll Processing > EOY Payroll Accruals > Decrement Note: The system default is to decrement (subtract by one) the fiscal year in the account distribution code in the next year payroll files. If you do not want to decrement a Fund activity, then the fund must be added to this tab to prevent it from being decremented. For example, if your LEA needs the August accruals for federal funds to be posted to the new fund/yr, then that fund/yr…

Verify/update next year TRS rates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-09-03T16:28:17+00:00

Verify/update next year TRS rates Log on to the NYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Tables > Tax/Deductions > TRS Rates Update the TRS rates. CAUTION: Be sure to retrieve the 2026 school year data prior to updating this tab. IMPORTANT: Be sure to visit the TRS website: to obtain the updated rates for the next school year, and then return to this table to update the new rates.

Verify next year payroll information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-11T13:25:39+00:00

Verify next year payroll information Log on to the NYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Reports > User Created Reports [User Created Report Page] These fields are maintained on the Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info tab. [Job Info Tab] VCV For employees who do accrue monthly: * Verify the accrual code, accrual rate, daily rate, and contract begin date for each employee.

Run calculations

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-02T13:05:36+00:00

Run calculations Log on to the NYR payroll frequency. Payroll > Payroll Processing > EOY Payroll Accruals > Run Calculations [Run Calculations Tab] All applicable pay frequencies should be included in the calculation run. It is recommended to change the calculation date to the date used to post the payroll accrual records (typically August 31st) and to create/interface the Finance general journal.

Set up accrual table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-11T15:38:24+00:00

Set up accrual table Log on to the next year payroll frequency (i.e., D, E, or F). Payroll > Payroll Processing > EOY Payroll Accruals > Accrual Table [Accrual Table Tab] VCV Under Next Year Frequency, select one of the following payroll frequencies: * D - Biweekly * E - Semimonthly * F - Monthly Notes: * If the user is not authorized to access a payroll frequency, it is disabled.

general:augustaccruals_step2a

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-05T23:31:06+00:00

Notes: * If an 11-month employee is listed with 2019 accruals, zero the accruals. If an 11-month employee is listed with 2020 accruals, do not clear the accruals. * If new employees are set to receive 13 checks in the 2019-2020 school year with their first check paid in August, review whether the pay is posted to accruals or the expense account. If the pay is posted to accruals, perform the Zero School YTD utility to record it to the expense account.

general:augustaccruals_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-27T19:59:45+00:00

Terminology the user should be aware of.

Verify accrual accounts are zero in Finance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-04T13:29:39+00:00

Verify accrual accounts are zero in Finance Log on to the current file ID. Finance > Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry > General Ledger Account Summary Run a summary inquiry for account codes 216X and 221X to verify that all accrual amounts are cleared (if there are no upcoming year accruals). The accrual amounts from the

general:augustaccruals_verify_accrual_amounts_are_cleared_extract_interface_to_finance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T19:58:50+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Zero School YTD Accruals > Post to Master/Interface to Finance VCV Select Post to Master and Interface to Finance. VCV Type a Transaction Date. VCV Select the posting accounting period. VCV Click Post. You are prompted to create a backup. A message is displayed indicating that the general journal transactions were interfaced to Finance successfully.

general:augustaccruals_verify_accrual_amounts_are_cleared_extract_reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-14T16:46:21+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Zero School YTD Accruals > Reports Review the following reports: Sample Pre-Post YTD Accrual Payroll Account Distribution Journal report [PrePost YTD Accrual Payroll Account Distribution Journal Report] Sample Pre-Post YTD Expenditure Payroll Account Distribution Journal report [PrePost YTD Expenditure Payroll Account Distribution Journal Report] Sample Pre-Post General Journal Transactions report [PrePost General Journal Transactions Report]

general:augustaccruals_verify_accrual_amounts_are_cleared_extract

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-14T16:47:59+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Zero School YTD Accruals > Extract VCV Retrieve employees. VCV Use the arrow buttons to move the applicable employees from the left side to the right side of the page. VCV Click Run. If there any errors are encountered during the extract, the Zero School YTD Accruals Errors report is displayed. Review the report and correct any errors. If there are no errors, the Zero School YTD Accruals Extract report is displayed.

(For LEAs that accrue monthly) Balance accruals in Finance and Payroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-05T15:53:51+00:00

(For LEAs that accrue monthly) Balance accruals in Finance and Payroll If your LEA accrues monthly, complete the following steps to verify the accurate posting of monthly accruals in both Finance and Payroll. It is critical that both areas agree to ensure accurate reporting of federal funds.

Verify payroll is complete

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-05-12T16:24:47+00:00

Verify payroll is complete Log on to the current year payroll frequency for each frequency used. * Ensure that the current school year payroll (final August payroll and August supplemental) is processed and interfaced to Finance prior to performing the August accrual process.

Verify fund to grant information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-11T13:17:10+00:00

Verify fund to grant information Personnel > Tables > Salaries > Fund to Grant IMPORTANT: All applicable federal grants must have a fund to grant code listed in the TRS Grant Cd field on this tab. If not, TRS federal grant care and TRS federal grant deposit amounts will not be calculated for that specific fund during payroll.

Verify payroll is complete

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-26T16:32:16+00:00

Verify Payroll is Completed Verify payroll is complete Log on to the current year payroll frequency for each frequency used. * Ensure that the current school year payroll (final August payroll and August supplemental) is processed and interfaced to Finance prior to performing the August accrual process.

general:augustaccrualsthingstoremember

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-27T19:59:08+00:00

TIP: Throughout the process, press ENTER or click Save to save information.

general:auto_bank_recon_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:38:17+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. If errors are encountered, an error report is displayed. You can toggle between the summary and the error report. * Click the Summary Report button to view the Summary Report. * Click the Error Report

general:auto_bank_recon_process

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-10T16:37:18+00:00

VCV Click Process to import the transactions listed on the Summary Report to the Maintenance > Bank Reconciliation page. The Process button is only displayed if there are valid transactions to be imported. * The bank account numbers in the file are verified with the account numbers for the selected bank account groups.

general:autobankreconnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-10T16:37:37+00:00

* The bank account numbers in the file are verified with the account numbers for the selected bank account groups. * The check numbers are first verified with MICR numbers, and then with the check numbers for the selected bank account group and account number. In addition, the check amounts in the file are verified with the check amounts in the system.

general:automaticallycompute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-15T19:58:45+00:00

VCV Under Automatically Compute, select whether to automatically compute the Pay Rate, Daily Rate, Dock Rate, Accrual Rate, or Overtime Rate. This function relates to the pay fields at the bottom of the Job Info page and affects the current year and next year calculations. These fields are not referenced by the system when performing automatic salary calculations through Mass Update in Utilities.

general:backup_interface_to_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T22:35:51+00:00

Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the interface. The File ID field is display only and reflects the file ID to which the user is logged on. The Export File Name field is display only.

general:backup_voidchecks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-07T16:20:47+00:00

A message is displayed suggesting a backup be created before continuing. Click Yes. The export Human Resources payroll tables dialog box is displayed. If the Export Payroll Tables process was previously run, click No, and then the system voids the selected checks.

general:backup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-07T17:25:27+00:00

If you click Yes, a pop-up window is displayed with the Frequency and Export File Name. Click Execute to continue. Or, click Cancel to not create the backup and continue. If you click Execute to create the system backup, a pop-up window is displayed prompting you to enter a password for the archive. Type the password and click

general:backwardleave

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:22:42+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the leave code balance you want used before using the leave type code originally entered. If a leave type is entered in this field, that leave type is processed first, and then the system processes the original leave before going through sequencing, if applicable.

general:balanceseq

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:22:16+00:00

Select one of the following: First - uses the original leave type code from which to dock employee's pay, if leave used exceeds leave balance. Last - uses the last leave type code in the sequence from which to dock employee's pay, if leave used exceeds leave balance.

Balancing On-Behalf Amounts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-09-08T15:58:08+00:00

Balancing On-Behalf Amounts IMPORTANT: The following is only an example of the calculation. Be sure to reference the TRS website: to obtain the most current TRS rates and use your LEA's calculations. The following calculations are based on the Payroll Earnings Register (for all frequencies).

general:bank_acct_group_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-16T14:55:04+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a bank account to reconcile. Cash receipts associated with the selected fund that have not been cleared are displayed under Pending Deposits. Checks associated with the selected fund that have not been cleared are displayed under Outstanding Checks

general:bank_recon_bank_acct_grp_add_recon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-10T19:03:56+00:00

Type a bank account group for which you want to reconcile transactions. This field is required. If the bank account group code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Bank Account Grp lookup is displayed. To narrow the search for a bank account group code, type data in the Search field. A list of codes matching the search criteria is displayed.

general:bank_recon_bank_acct_grp_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T16:25:19+00:00

VCV Click Execute to retrieve the applicable transactions based on the entered search criteria. All reports are displayed by the transaction category (Checks, Cash Receipts, and Journal Vouchers). If there are errors, an error report is displayed. If no errors are encountered, the

general:bank_recon_bank_acct_grp_process

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-10T16:25:48+00:00

VCV Click Process to import the transactions listed on the Summary Report to the Maintenance > Transaction Maintenance page. The Process button is disabled until valid transactions are retrieved.

general:bank_recon_bank_acct_grp

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-07T18:00:12+00:00

Type the bank account group code to be used. This field is required. If the bank account group code is not known, click . The Bank Account Grp lookup is displayed. To narrow the search for a bank account group code, type data in the Search field. A list of codes matching the search criteria is displayed.

Create transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-23T20:03:32+00:00

Bank Reconciliation > Maintenance > Bank Transactions > Create Transactions Create transactions Bank Reconciliation > Maintenance > Bank Transactions > Create Transactions [Create Transactions] This tab is used to extract transactions from the Finance and Payroll tables for bank reconciliation. Transactions are grouped and summarized as follows: * Cash Receipts - Cash receipt number, date, and description *

Create transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T16:23:37+00:00

Create transactions Bank Reconciliation > Maintenance > Bank Transactions > Create Transactions [Create Transactions] This tab is used to extract transactions from the Finance and Payroll tables for bank reconciliation. Transactions are grouped and summarized as follows: * Cash Receipts - Cash receipt number, date, and description * Checks

Bank Reconciliation Questions & Answers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-28T16:19:17+00:00

Bank Reconciliation Questions & Answers Question: Should I select Include Auto JVs on the Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Bank Account Group tab? Answer: Depending on the situation, including auto JVs can be either helpful or confusing. It is recommended that you only include auto JVs for clearing accounts. Consider the following scenarios:

Organize the layout template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T15:40:58+00:00

Organize the layout template Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Reconciliation Layout > Layout This tab is used to design the bank reconciliation layout template that displays the reconciliation summary information. A list of the category descriptions with the operator type from the Categories tab is displayed. If

general:bank_recon_layout_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-19T14:24:45+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the number of columns to be included in the layout.

Reconcile bank transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T19:18:12+00:00

Reconcile bank transactions Bank Reconciliation > Maintenance > Bank Reconciliation [Bank Reconciliation Page] This page is used to reconcile unreconciled bank transactions from the bank reconciliation transaction table. Review the Categories tab for more information on the Totals section layout. Retrieve a reconciliation record: Recon Title

general:bank

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-31T19:30:07+00:00

Begin typing a bank code or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. The bank information must exist on the Finance > Tables > Bank Codes tab. Select a bank code. If the bank code or name is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a bank from the Banks lookup or press the SPACEBAR to view a list of banks.

general:bankinformation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T14:21:59+00:00

Bank Begin typing a bank code or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. The bank information must exist on the Finance > Tables > Bank Codes tab. Select a bank code. If the bank code or name is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a bank from the

general:bankreconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-19T15:28:17+00:00

ASCENDER Bank Reconciliation lets you achieve accurate balances. The application keeps multiple accounts and fiscal years in one location, and simplifies reconciliation with flexible drill-down features, merging tools, and easy recalculation.

general:banks_lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-16T15:09:09+00:00

In the Search field, begin typing a bank code or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a bank code. The Banks lookup closes and the selected bank is populated in the Bank field. Click [Close Button] or Cancel to return to the originating tab/page without selecting a bank.

general:beforebegin_eoyjune

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-23T18:13:35+00:00

Review the following information and/or complete the following steps before you begin the End-of-Year (EOY) Accruals for June Year-End LEAs process. VCV Review the [EOY Flowchart for July Start LEAs]. VCV Review the Accrual Overview.

general:beginning_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-08T19:08:30+00:00

Type the starting date in the MMDDYYYY format to use as a range to select check transactions to be added or deleted from the 1099 work table. If no beginning date is specified, 01-01-YYYY, where YYYY is from the from School Year field on the Tables > District Finance Options page is used as the default date. If there is no data in the

general:beginning_eft_ref_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-21T18:16:33+00:00

Populates based on the last EFT reference number used, but can be modified. The field displays an “E” at the beginning of the EFT reference number, which identifies the transaction as an electronic funds transfer throughout the application. Note

general:bid_information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-29T16:37:43+00:00

Selected by default to automatically assign a bid number when using the bid processing feature in Purchasing. In the Next Available Bid Number field, type the next bid number to be assigned or click Next Available Bid Number to populate the next available bid number to be assigned.

general:bid_processing_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-23T14:49:01+00:00

* Requisitions with partial line items that were awarded through bid processing cannot be returned. * Line items that were awarded through bid processing cannot be retrieved. * Requisitions with partial line items that were awarded through bid processing can be approved with all disapproved line items.

general:br_reset_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-18T18:54:32+00:00

Click to retrieve data from the last save. If you click Reset, any unsaved changes are lost.

general:bud_acc_code_detail_approved

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:28:00+00:00

Click [Spyglass Icon] to view any previously entered notes and other details for the associated account code. The Budget Data Details pop-up window is displayed. The account code number and description are displayed at the top of the window. Field

general:bud_acc_code_detail_quickentry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T15:07:00+00:00

Click [Spyglass Icon] to view any previously entered notes and other details for the associated account code. The Budget Data Details pop-up window opens. The account code number and description are displayed at the top of the window. The Last Yr Closing Amt field displays the amount of the account balance at the end of the previous fiscal year. When the budget is initialized, you can update this amount with either

general:bud_acc_code_detail_recommended

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T19:37:32+00:00

general:bud_acc_code_detail_requested

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:27:49+00:00

general:bud_acc_code_detail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-26T12:47:04+00:00

Click [Spyglass Icon] to view any previously entered notes and other details for the associated account code. The Budget Data Details pop-window is displayed. * The account code number and description are displayed at the top of the window. * The Last Yr Closing Amt

general:bud_acc_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:20:57+00:00

Type only the account code elements (e.g., fund, function, or object). Each account code component is independent of the other components. To view a list of account code components, place the cursor in one of the account code component fields, and click

general:bud2400notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-09T21:10:30+00:00

NCES Definition Report Numerator for Ratio: Funds: All except SSA (290-379 and 430-459), Debt Service (5XX) and (702-8XX) Functions: 11, 36, 93, 95 Objects: 61XX-64XX Subobjects: All for those funds/functions/objects reported. Organization:

general:budget_amend_desc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-04T15:33:44+00:00

If a description exists in the Amendment Number Description field, the description automatically displays in the Reason field. You may change the reason. The reason can be a maximum of 30 characters.

general:budget_amend_increase_decrease

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-04T15:36:34+00:00

Type a number which increases or decreases the general ledger for the selected account code. The current account code information is displayed in the summary page. The translation of how increases/decreases become debits/credits is as follows: Class Object

Budget Amendments Directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-12-08T20:19:23+00:00

Budget Amendments Directory Use the following fields to perform a budget amendment search. Amendment NbrType an amendment number. Amendment Nbr DescrType an amendment number description. From DateType the beginning search date in the MMDDYYYY format. Or, select a date from the calendar.

general:budget_approved_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:27:26+00:00

Type comments, additional justification, or instructions about this account code. Notes: If an account code is locked, the account code note is display only. No changes can be made to the account code note until the account code is unlocked.

general:budget_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T21:04:47+00:00

1. Budget > Utilities > Update Budget Data * Update the Amended and Actual columns in Budget in the prior fiscal year Finance file ID so that the audit entries, etc. can be updated. Be sure to select the correct file ID from which to copy the information. Review the

general:budget_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:47:03+00:00

2. Budget > Utilities > Export by File ID * Copy the prior year budget data to a folder titled “Final Copy of YYYY-YYYY Budget Before Move to New File ID.”

general:budget_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:50:46+00:00

3. Budget > Utilities > Copy Current to New File ID * Save this data for historical purposes, and copy this budget to another file ID.

general:budget_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T17:27:10+00:00

4. Log on to the new file ID and verify the budget data.

general:budget_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T21:04:14+00:00

5. Budget > Utilities > Export by File ID * Copy the new year budget data to a folder titled “YYYY-YYYY Budget After Move to File ID X.” Using Inquiry, review the column headings to determine if the correct school year span is displayed above each column. For example, if reviewing the amount in file ID 5 (2014-2015), the column headings should reflect the following: last year closing amount = 2013-2014; this year original budget = 2014-2015; this year amended amount and this year actual amoun…

general:budget_checklist_step6

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T17:28:05+00:00

6. Log on to file ID N.

general:budget_checklist_step7

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T17:29:12+00:00

7. Budget > Tables > District Budget Options > Budget Options * Enter the new school year and the cutoff dates for each column to reflect the requirements associated with the new year budget preparation. * Budget > Inquiry > Budget Account Codes Inquiry

general:budget_checklist_step8

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:51:47+00:00

8. Budget > Utilities > Reinitialize Budget Data * Reinitialize the budget, and use the Inquiry to verify the results of the reinitialization.

general:budget_checklist_step9

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:52:37+00:00

9. Budget > Utilities > Mass Change Account Codes > Fund/Year * Change the prior fund/fiscal year to the new fund/fiscal year. The Fund/Year tab automatically reflects the new fund and fiscal year.

general:budget_checklist_step10

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T17:36:15+00:00

10. Budget > Utilities > Mass Change Account Codes > Mask Crosswalk * Change the accounts from the prior fiscal year to the new fiscal year.

general:budget_checklist_step11

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T21:00:23+00:00

11. Budget > Utilities > Copy Finance Tables to Budget * Update the budget account code tables in file ID N to match the data in Finance file ID C. Note: Be sure to verify in Finance that no requisitions and/or purchase orders have been created in next year Purchasing for the new school year. If this feature is already being used for the new school year, do not clear next year requisitions.

general:budget_checklist_step12

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:33:08+00:00

12. Budget > Utilities >Clear/Move NYR Requisitions to CYR * Select Clear NY Requisitions Only if you used the next year requisition feature in Purchasing for the prior fiscal year and did not clear those requisitions or do not recall if you cleared them.

general:budget_checklist_step13

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:48:01+00:00

13. Budget > Utilities > Export by File ID * Copy the new budget data to a folder titled “Budget After Change of FY to FY.”

general:budget_checklist_step14

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:54:51+00:00

14. Budget > Utilities > Delete Funds * Delete any funds that you no longer want to be displayed in file ID N.

general:budget_checklist_step15

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:36:39+00:00

15. Budget > Utilities > Clear/Copy Budget Tables > Clear Budget Tables * Clear budget tables. The utility only clears the Simulation and/or Crosswalk tables.

general:budget_checklist_step16

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:32:03+00:00

16. Budget > Utilities > Update Budget Data * Update the amended or actual columns. * Budget > Inquiry > Budget Account Codes Inquiry Use Inquiry to verify the results of the update. Note: If there are account components that exist in the Finance file ID that do not exist in the Budget file ID account code table, a Budget Error Report of the account components that must be updated in the budget account code table is produced, and you cannot proceed until these account components are updat…

general:budget_checklist_step17

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:39:09+00:00

17. District Administration > Utilities > Mass Update User Accounts by Fund * View all funds that have specific fiscal years in the user profile. If a fund does not have a specific fiscal year selected (has an X in the Fscl Yr field) in the user profile for any user, the fund is not displayed, and no action is necessary.

general:budget_checklist_step18

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:39:47+00:00

18. District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles * Update the user profiles as needed.

general:budget_checklist_step19

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:40:39+00:00

19. Budget > Utilities > Mass Delete Zero Balance Accounts * Use this utility if there are any accounts that have a zero amount in the Last Year Closing Amount field and in the requested, recommended, or approved columns, and you no longer want these accounts to display.

general:budget_checklist_step20

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:41:39+00:00

20. Budget > Utilities > Mass Lock/Unlock Funds * Lock or unlock single or multiple funds/accounts.

general:budget_checklist_step21

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:46:50+00:00

21. Budget > Utilities > Export by File ID * Copy the new budget data to a folder titled “New Budget for FY Before Entries.”

general:budget_checklist_step22

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:50:03+00:00

22. Budget > Utilities > Mass Increase/Decrease Account Codes * Create budget simulations.

general:budget_checklist_step23

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T19:51:22+00:00

23. Budget > Utilities > Budget Level Processing * Process one of the above created simulations.

general:budget_checklist_step24

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:16:22+00:00

24. Print reports, as needed. Note: Budget reports 1000, 1050, 1100, and 1200 validate against the user profile. Only those accounts on the user profile for logged-on users is displayed. The user also will have the option to exclude 61XX accounts from the reports. Budget report 1350 has the ability to select specific groups of funds to be included in the report.

general:budget_checklist_step25

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:17:18+00:00

25. Budget > Utilities > Budget Level Processing > Copy Level * Once the budget is approved, the Next Year Approved column must be populated.

general:budget_checklist_step26

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:36:28+00:00

26. Budget > Utilities > Export by File ID * Copy the new year budget data to a folder titled “YYYY-YYYY Budget Before Move to Finance.” Notes: ● The Move Budget to Finance utility has a required JV number field. The journal voucher number is an alphanumeric entry field and is set to 999999. An error message is displayed if there is a duplicate journal voucher number in Finance. Duplicate 999999 journal voucher numbers are not verified.

general:budget_checklist_step27

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:35:06+00:00

27. Finance > Utilities > Export by File ID * Log on to Finance file ID C. * Copy the prior fiscal year finance data to a folder entitled “Finance Before Update from YYYY-YYYY Budget.” Note: All requisition and purchase order transactions that exist in current year Purchasing are included in this export.

general:budget_checklist_step28

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:38:33+00:00

28. Finance > Utilities > Move Budget to Finance or Budget > Utilities > Move Budget to Finance * Be sure to select the Copy Account Code Tables option, so the process will update the Finance Account Codes table. Finance will be updated by the amounts in the approved column in Budget.

general:budget_checklist_step29

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:39:41+00:00

29. Finance > Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry * Confirm the move. * Finance > Utilities > Export by File ID Copy the new year finance data to a folder titled “Finance After Move from 20XX-20XX Budget.”

general:budget_checklist_step30

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-08T20:42:34+00:00

30. Budget > Utilities > Clear/Move NYR Requisitions to CYR (If the next year requisition feature is used in Purchasing) * The utility allows you to either clear all next year requisitions or move them from next year Purchasing to Finance. The next year requisition account codes are validated against Budget. If a requisition exceeds the appropriation amount, it will cause the account to be over-expensed when moved to Finance.

general:budget_copy_simulation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:38:10+00:00

VCV Click Copy to copy the simulation. The copy from simulation window is displayed with a list of all saved simulations. * Select an existing simulation name from the list. * Click OK. The window is closed, and the copied simulation populates all the fields on the tab.

general:budget_delete_simulation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-10T13:42:38+00:00

Click to delete the selected simulation.

general:budget_duplicate_record

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T15:53:58+00:00

Select a row to duplicate and click to create a new row using the data from the existing row. You must change the account code of the newly duplicated row prior to saving the record.

Budget Extract Automatic Crosswalks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-09-30T20:28:20+00:00

Budget Extract Automatic Crosswalks If your district maintains budget data in greater detail than the state-mandated level, the detail is summarized to the state-mandated level. The automatic crosswalks in the extract program perform the summarization.

general:budget_refresh_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T18:13:25+00:00

Click after an existing object code number is entered to update the Description field. The object code description is populated from the Object tab.

general:budget_refresh_totals

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T18:12:17+00:00

Click to update the totals.

general:budgetbasecolumn

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-09T20:33:31+00:00

Select a column on which to base the simulation calculations. This is a required field.

general:budgetcutoffdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-02-20T15:45:37+00:00

The date that account updates are no longer allowed is displayed. If the district uses cutoff dates, simulation data cannot be created after the displayed cutoff date. If the district does not use cutoff dates, simulation data can be created at any time up to final budget approval.

general:budgetexecute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T19:54:44+00:00

* Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to continue the process. * The File ID field is display only and reflects the file ID to which the user is logged on. * The Export File Name field is display only. * Click Execute

general:budgetfundsfiscalyears

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:16:00+00:00

In the Fund Search field, type a three-digit fund and click Search to narrow the list of funds. Select the applicable fund(s) and click OK to close the lookup and populate the fund(s) on the Fund/Fiscal Year Exclusions tab. Click Select All or Unselect All

general:budgetimportexecute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:32:12+00:00

* A message is displayed indicating that you are about to import budget tables and confirming that you want to continue. Click Yes to continue the import. Otherwise, click No to cancel the import. * Type a password for the imported file, and then click

general:budgetlevelprocessing

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-01T21:01:37+00:00

A message is displayed prompting you to perform a backup.

general:budgetmovebudgettofinanceerrorreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T15:00:43+00:00

An error report with the journal voucher number and the transaction date in the report header may be displayed: * If any account code components that do not exist in Finance are used in budget accounts, they must be corrected prior to continuing the process. Click

general:budgetpercentamountfield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:38:46+00:00

Multiply - entered as a percentage value (e.g., 0.00000). When Multiply is selected, the percentage entered in this field is multiplied by the value of the selected column in the Base Column field. The result is used to update the Next Yr Approved

general:budgetpreviewdata

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-02-12T19:37:43+00:00

Select to view the data records being copied to the budget tables. If selected, a preview report of each current year table being copied to the next year is displayed. If not selected, a message is displayed indicating that the tables were successfully copied.

general:budgetpreviewdataselected

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T20:35:34+00:00

A message is displayed prompting you to create a backup. * Click Yes to continue the process and create a backup. A message is displayed with the export file name. * Click Execute to continue processing the backup. A message is displayed prompting you for an archive password.

general:budgetprocessexport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-09T16:28:41+00:00

* Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. * The File ID field is display only and reflects the file ID to which the user is logged on. * The Export File Name field is display only.

general:budgetprocessutility

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T16:26:45+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click OK.

general:budgetrecpercentamountfield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:46:56+00:00

general:budgetsimulationdescription

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-09T20:32:19+00:00

Type a description for the simulation. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters.

general:budgetsimulationname

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:40:21+00:00

Type a name for a new simulation. The field can be a maximum of seven characters and is a required field. Or, type the name of an existing simulation, and click Retrieve. To search for a specific simulation, click Directory. In the Search field, type a name for the simulation. A list of simulations that match the data you entered is displayed.

general:bundle_information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-29T16:37:04+00:00

Selected by default to automatically assign a bundle number when using the bundle requisitions feature. In the Next Available Bundle Number field, type the next bundle number to be assigned or click Next Available Bundle Number to populate the next available bundle number to be assigned.

general:business_guides_checklists_application_tabs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-01T15:23:21+00:00

* Accounts Receivable * Asset Management * Bank Reconciliation * Budget * Finance * Grants and Projects * Payroll * Personnel * Position Management * Purchasing * Warehouse * EmployeePortal * TSDS/PEIMS

Add a Row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-22T21:58:16+00:00

Add a Row In a table or grid, click +Add to add a new data entry row. A new row is added to the bottom of the grid or list. [Add A Row Feature] Delete a Row Click [Trashcan Icon] to delete a row. This icon is displayed next to any row that can be deleted. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved.

general:business_overview_application_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T20:28:39+00:00

The ASCENDER homepage serves as a personalized dashboard and displays links to all ASCENDER applications that are tied to your user profile. The main menu is located on the left side of the page. In the upper-left corner, click [Change View Icon] to collapse the main menu or expand the main menu. This functionality is available on all pages in all applications. And, on some pages must be used for a more favorable view of the actual page.

Autotab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-22T21:42:14+00:00

Autotab The autotab feature eliminates the need to manually click in or tab to the next field. Instead, the next defined text field automatically receives the cursor focus when the maximum number of characters in the current text field is reached.

Change Password

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-26T14:33:03+00:00

Change Password To change your password, from the ASCENDER Homepage, click [Drop-down Arrow] next to your user name and then click Change Password. [ASCENDER Homepage With Change Password Button] The Change Password page is displayed. [Change Password Update Page] User IDDisplays your LEA-issued user ID.Old PasswordType your old (current) password.

Column Sort

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T19:10:44+00:00

Column Sort When a column heading is underlined, the column can be sorted. Click the column to sort the data in ascending order, and then click the column again to sort the data in descending order. [Column Sort Feature] [Ascending Column Sort Arrow] - indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order

County District

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T20:43:27+00:00

County District The following information is displayed in the lower-left corner of the page under the software version details. [County District Number] County/DistrictDisplays the county district number to which you are logged on. To change this number, log out and log back in with a different number.

Ellipsis Icon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T19:33:38+00:00

Ellipsis Icon The ellipsis icon is displayed next to a field and remains on the page at all times. You do not have to tab into the field for it to be displayed. Click [Ellipsis Icon] to display a pop-up window with data that corresponds to the field. Click the link of the option to be populated in the field.

Generate a Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T20:02:13+00:00

Generate a Report Generate a Report Select a report: All available report names are displayed on the left side of the page. The list of available reports remains displayed on the page even after you select a report name. This allows you to select another report within the selected reports menu without exiting the report page.

Homepage Timer

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-11-02T19:54:35+00:00

Homepage Timer The ASCENDER Homepage has a 300-minute session timer. This timer redirects the user to the ASCENDER Login page and requires them to log on again if they attempt to launch an application after 300 minutes of inactivity on the homepage. This timer cannot be modified.

Login

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-26T14:30:31+00:00

Login [ASCENDER Login Page] Field DescriptionUser NameType your user ID or name provided by your local education agency (LEA). Password Type your password. Requirements: Between 16 and 46 characters. Must include at least one of each of the following character types:

general:business_overview_loginpageapprovalsummary_tasks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T15:51:07+00:00

TaskPage/PathInvoice ApprovalAccounts Receivable > Maintenance > Invoice ApprovalApprove Budget AmendmentFinance > Budget Amendment > Approve Budget AmendmentApprove CIP TransactionPayroll > Maintenance > Approve CIP TransactionPayroll ApprovalPayroll > Self-Service > Payroll Approval

general:business_overview_loginpageapprovalsummary

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-12-13T20:23:16+00:00

All users are granted permission to the Approval Summary dashboard element, which provides a list of pending approval items based on the user's profile. If there are no approvals, a message is displayed indicating there are no pending approvals.

ASCENDER Homepage & Quick View Dashboard

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-04-04T16:07:19+00:00

ASCENDER Homepage & Quick View Dashboard Depending on your user profile, ASCENDER offers a Quick View dashboard that is used to display important information from multiple sources in one, easy-to-access place. Currently, the following dashboard elements are available for Business users:

Exit Application

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T19:57:59+00:00

It is important to exit and log out correctly to ensure that the software functions properly. Exit Application To exit any open application, in the top-right corner of each application next to your user name, click [Exit Application Button]. [Exit Application Example] An exit application page is displayed with a message indicating that you have logged out successfully and you may close the browser tab.

Menu and Tabs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T14:31:19+00:00

Menu and Tabs After you select an application from the ASCENDER homepage, the application homepage is displayed. In the below example, the Payroll application is selected. [ASCENDER Application homepage] Select a main menu item (e.g., Tables, Maintenance, Inquiry, etc.). The available submenu options are displayed. Use the gray scroll bar to scroll up and down and view any additional submenu options.

Pagination

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T19:14:21+00:00

Pagination Depending on the page, approximately 30 rows of data is displayed or can be viewed with the use of the scroll bar. If the data exceeds the number of rows that can be displayed on the page, the page numbers are displayed on the bottom-left side of the page.

Save Changes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-05T15:51:51+00:00

Save Changes To save changes on a page, click the Save button. You can also press ENTER on your keyboard to retrieve or save, depending where you are on the page. If you are in a search area of the page, the retrieve feature is the default setting when you press ENTER.

Session Timers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-18T14:43:44+00:00

Session Timers Across the bottom of each application page, a session timer is displayed. As each page is displayed, the timer resets. [Session Timer] Review the Session Timers Help page in District Administration for more information about session timers.

Session Timers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-09T22:09:49+00:00

Software Version

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T20:36:33+00:00

Software Version The following information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the page under the main menu. [Software Version Details] VersionDisplays the ASCENDER software version.BuildDisplays the ASCENDER software build number.HostDisplays the software server host information.

Spyglass Icon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:18:23+00:00

Spyglass Icon The spyglass icon is used on several pages to view additional details for a record. Click [Spyglass Icon] to view additional details. The details are displayed in various ways depending on the application page. On some pages, a pop-up window opens with the corresponding details, and on other pages, additional details might be displayed in a different grid as seen in the below example.

general:business_payroll_process_w2s_beforeyoubegin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-12-18T17:05:29+00:00

Review the following information and/or complete the tasks listed before you begin the W-2 forms processing steps: Terms: Term DescriptionAccuwageA part of the Business Servies Online (BSO) suite that allows files to be uploaded to check for format correctness before submitting to the Social Security Administration (SSA).

general:business_payroll_processtrssummerschoolpayments_backgroundinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T17:53:52+00:00

Summer school payments apply to ANY work that is performed in the summer outside of the employee's normal contract/work agreement and is not subject to the Statutory Minimum. VCV The RE Portal only accepts summer school payments for reporting periods May - October with contract dates from May 15 - August 31.

general:business_payroll_processtrssummerschoolpayments_securityrights

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-09-27T13:45:01+00:00

Before you begin this process, be sure that you have the appropriate security permission to view the Payroll > Maintenance > Summer School Contracts page. The page must be enabled for your role/user profile in Security Administration. If you do not have permission to view the Summer School Contracts page, it is disabled in the Maintenance menu as shown below:

general:business_payroll_trsreportingprocess_trsreportingrequirements

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T17:32:12+00:00

Ensure that the necessary District HR options and employee indicators are present for TRS reporting. All employees including substitutes, part-time, and students must be reported each month regardless of their TRS status. TRS reporting requires the following fields to be updated for all employees. You can use the Mass Update utility to update all of the fields except the

general:business_yearataglance_julystart_timelinetabs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-18T15:46:54+00:00

* Jul * Aug * Sep * Oct * Nov * Dec * Jan * Feb * Mar * Apr * May * Jun * Monthly * Quarterly

general:business_yearataglance_timelinetabs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T17:53:02+00:00

* Sep * Oct * Nov * Dec * Jan * Feb * Mar * Apr * May * Jun * Jul * Aug * Monthly * Quarterly

General Business Terms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T14:26:22+00:00

General Business Terms The following terms are used across Business processes. Do Not Hire RegistryThe TEA Registry of Persons Ineligible for Employment is a confidential application in TEAL that public and charter schools may search by uploading names and personal identities. The Registry application will list individuals who are under investigation or not eligible for hire. An LEA should verify any applicant for employment against the Registry before they are hired. The LEA must fire or refu…

general:cafe_125_add_deduct

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T21:29:31+00:00

Select if the deduction indicated is part of a cafeteria plan. Note: The following deduction codes cannot have the Cafe 125 field selected: A3, AN, CU, D1, D2, R1, R2, RI, SB, TR, TS, UD, UF, and WH.

general:cafe_125_edit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T21:28:57+00:00

general:cafe_125

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T21:28:39+00:00

Select if the deduction indicated is part of a cafeteria plan. Notes: The following deduction codes cannot have the Cafe 125 field selected: A3, AN, CU, D1, D2, R1, R2, RI, SB, TR, TS, UD, UF, and WH. The Cafe 125 field must be selected in order for the Health Savings Account (HSA) and Flexible Spending Arrangement (FSA) deductions to be tax sheltered.

general:cafe125

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T21:30:36+00:00

Select if this deduction is part of a cafeteria or flexible benefits plan that shelters benefits or deductions from taxes. When these transmittals are processed through the supplemental payroll: If the deduction transmittal has the cafeteria check box selected and the user chooses to use the regular or flat withholding tax supplemental option, the transmittal amount is included in the withholding gross, any associated withholding tax is calculated, and the tax reduces the net amount of the ch…

general:calculatetravelocationdistances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T18:51:51+00:00

Finance > Tables > Travel > Distances Add a list of distances (in miles) between possible predefined to/from travel locations. These locations are set up on the can be used on the Finance > Tables > Travel > Locations tab. If the Location Locking feature is enabled on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options 2 page, the Mileage (Start, Stop, and Map) fields,

Calculating Workers' Compensation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-24T20:41:44+00:00

Calculating Workers' Compensation For all pay frequencies, pay type 1 or 2 job: Note: Examples below are for regular payroll calculations only. If the check originated from the Payroll Adjustments, Check Issue tab, the WC Gross is equal to the amount paid for each distribution gross pay amount.

general:calculation_date_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-02T15:48:09+00:00

This field is populated with the current system date, but it can be changed. This date is used as the pay date for the YTD payroll records. This date is also used to create the Finance general journal number and the month reported in the general journal description.

general:calendar_info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T15:59:55+00:00

Calendar CdType the calendar code, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the two-digit code identifying the calendar for the employee. The calendar indicates the dates of the employee’s work days and holidays. This field relates to the School Calendar table built with the holidays, in-service days, and work days for various LEA employees.

general:campus_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:04:59+00:00

Type a campus ID or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a one from the Department Directory. A list of all available campus IDs is displayed. The Campus/Department Name field is populated based on the selected Campus/Department ID. The Department Directory is populated from the campus/departments that are established on the

general:campus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T20:10:38+00:00

Type the campus number, if known. Click Retrieve. If the campus number is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Campuses pop-up window is displayed with a list of all campus numbers. To search for specific campus number, type data in the desired search fields.

general:cash_receipt_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:49:15+00:00

Type an account code. As you type the account code, a drop-down list of corresponding account numbers is displayed. Select an account number. If the account code is not known, place the cursor in the account code field and press F2. Or, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Account Codes lookup is displayed.

general:cash_receipt_contra_acct

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:33:10+00:00

If it is necessary to override the contra number, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a different contra account code or begin typing a contra account code. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a contra account code. The fund and fiscal year must be the same as the account number. If you manually type a contra account code, the function must be 00 and the object code must be 11XX, 181X, or 191X.

general:cash_receipt_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T21:04:15+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. If any errors are encountered, the Import Cash Receipt Transactions Error Report is displayed. Review the report. VCV Click Cancel to close the report and make corrections to the import file. If no errors are encountered, the Import Cash Receipt Transactions Report is displayed with a list of cash receipt transactions to be imported.

general:cash_receipt_post_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-10T14:02:11+00:00

Select the accounting period (Current or Next) in which to post the cash receipt transactions.

general:cash_receipts_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:37:18+00:00

VCV The Cash Receipts Inquiry section is expanded by default if cash receipts are retrieved. Click Cash Receipts Inquiry to collapse the section. The following cash receipt information is displayed: Receipt Nbr Amount Date Description Vendor name

general:cash_receipts_reconciliation_displayed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:30:54+00:00

The Cash Receipts section is expanded by default. Click Cash Receipts to collapse the section. VCV Select the Recon check box for the transactions that you want to reconcile. VCV Click Select All to select all of the transactions in the section or click

general:cash_receipts_reconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-04T20:48:02+00:00

This section is expanded by default. Click Cash Receipts to collapse the section. Select the Recon check box for each cash receipt transaction to be reconciled. The following cash receipt information is displayed and can be modified: * Receipt Nbr

general:cash_receipts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T16:29:13+00:00

The Cash Receipts section is expanded by default if cash receipts exist for the selected group code. VCV Click Cash Receipts to collapse the section. The following cash receipt information is displayed and can be modified: Receipt Nbr - cash receipt number

Cash Receipts Lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-14T17:58:39+00:00

Cash Receipts Lookup In the Search field, begin typing a cash receipt number or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a cash receipt number. Note: Only cash receipt transactions from the current Accounts Receivable accounting period and current Finance GL file ID are included in the Cash Receipts lookup.

general:categories_operator

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T15:17:13+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the operation to be used for the category description. If the Statement Type field is set to Total, the Operator field must be set to = Equals. You can select to use a single or double column layout on the Layout tab. If Double Column

general:category_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:47:11+00:00

Type the category code, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a category code. The category code must exist on the Tables > Vendor Categories page. If the category code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Category Codes lookup is displayed.

general:category_information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:35:07+00:00

The fields in this section are display only with the exception of the Category Code, but can be edited on the Tables > Vendor Categories page. Category Code Type the category code, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a category code. The category code must exist on the Tables > Vendor Categories page.

(Optional) Assign credit card codes to users

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-01T16:59:43+00:00

(Optional) Assign credit card codes to users District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Credit Assign specific credit card codes to individual requisition users. If users will not be selecting a credit card code when creating and submitting a requisition, then credit card codes do not need to be assigned to users. The business office can select a credit card code on the PO at the time the payable transaction is entered in Finance.

Generate the FIN1950 - Credit Card Payment Listing

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-01T16:25:01+00:00

Generate the FIN1950 - Credit Card Payment Listing Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > FIN1950 - Credit Card Payment Listing Generate the report with the following parameters: [FIN1950 - Credit Card Payment Listing Report Parameters] [FIN1950 - Credit Card Payment Listing]

Create credit card transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-01T17:04:14+00:00

Create credit card transactions After the above steps are completed, you can use one of the following three methods to create credit card transactions. 1. Create a requisition in Purchasing Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition [Purchasing Requisition Page] VCV Create a requisition. * In the Credit Card Code

Process payment to the credit card company

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T14:15:06+00:00

Process payment to the credit card company Finance > Maintenance > Check Processing > Print Checks Process the payment to the credit card company. [Check Processing Print Checks Tab] The transaction for the check to be issued to the credit card company is displayed. To post check: 199-00-2110-00-000-200000Debit 199-00-1110-00-000-200000

Post interest and miscellaneous charges

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-01T17:06:55+00:00

Post interest and miscellaneous charges Finance > Maintenance > Credit Card > Posting - PA As needed, create transactions for interest and other miscellaneous charges as a credit card PA transaction. [Finance Credit Card Posting - PA Tab] In the above example, a transaction of $15 for credit card interest was posted. Expenditure:

Post returns

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-01T17:05:16+00:00

Post returns Finance > Maintenance > Credit Card > Posting - PA or Posting PO To ensure that the check to the credit card company is correct, all returns must be posted before reconciling the credit card statement. [Finance Credit Card Posting PA Tab] Verify that the following fields are completed for a return: * The Type field must be set to

Reconcile the credit card statement

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T14:18:48+00:00

Reconcile the credit card statement Finance > Maintenance > Credit Card > Reconciliation After all credit card transactions are entered, reconcile the credit card statement to the credit card transactions. [Finace Credit Card Reconciliation Tab] VCV Use the following fields to begin the reconciliation process: * In the Vendor field, select the credit card vendor (company).

Set up credit card codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T13:54:06+00:00

Set up credit card codes Finance > Tables > Credit Card Codes Establish a list of credit card codes to be used by the local education agency (LEA). The credit card code table is necessary to complete credit card functions in Finance, Purchasing, and District Administration. Multiple credit cards can be set up for a credit card company. The account code must be a liability account (2XXX). A different account code can be used for each credit card to make it easier to verify transactions if the …

Review the vendor payment inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T15:55:42+00:00

Review the vendor payment inquiry Finance > Inquiry > Vendor Inquiry > Vendor Payment Inquiry Run a vendor payment inquiry to review a list of vendor check transactions. [Vendor Payment Inquiry] * If the transaction is an individual credit card transaction, CC is displayed in the Check Nbr field and the transaction amount is displayed in the

general:ceifield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-08-06T20:15:07+00:00

Type the value assigned to the district by TEA. This value is used for adjusting the state minimum salary for costs beyond the district control. This value can be found on the Summary of Finances (SOF) report issued by TEA. For more information, visit TEA's

general:central_warehouse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T20:18:30+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the LEA's default receiving address. You can add or edit address information on the District Administration > Tables > Receiving Addresses page. Note: The central warehouse address is printed in the Ship To field on the purchase order if the shipping addresses are different for each requisition in a bundled requisitions purchase order. In this case, you must indicate the requesting campus, department, and requestor in the line item comments on the purchase ord…

general:change_dollar_amount_on_existing_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-06T16:12:14+00:00

In the If Deduction Code field, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the deduction code from which the dollar amount is to be changed. Under Change Dollar Amount: In the Net Amount From field, type the dollar value of the net amount from which the deduction is being changed.

general:change_existing_code_and_amounts_to_another

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T01:46:02+00:00

In the If Deduction Code field, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the deduction code to be changed. Under Change Deduction Info: In the New Code field, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select the new deduction code. In the Net Amount field, type the dollar value of the deduction. In the

general:change_existing_extra_duty_code_information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-06T22:30:59+00:00

Note: If the existing extra duty code is associated with an account type G - Standard Gross pay, the process updates the Amount field on the Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Pay Info tab. If the existing extra duty code is associated with an account type S - Supplemental pay, the process updates the

general:change_extra_duty_code_to_another_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-06T21:55:27+00:00

In the If Extra Duty Code field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the extra duty code to be changed. The system displays the account type associated with the selected extra duty code (e.g., S - Supplemental pay or G - Standard gross pay). In the Change To field, click

Change Feature

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-11T16:37:31+00:00

Change Feature In the top-right corner of the page, the Change feature allows you to change the file ID, year, accounting period, payroll frequency, and warehouse ID. This feature is only available if you are logged on to the following applications:

general:change_remaining_deduction_payments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-19T17:50:42+00:00

In the Set Number of Remaining Payments for All Deduction Codes field, type the number of remaining deduction payments. This field changes the number of remaining payments for all deduction codes. If you want to adjust the remaining payments for specific deduction codes, use the following two fields. If you enter data into this field and the following two fields, the system is set to the data in this field.

Change Payroll Frequency

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T16:25:01+00:00

Change Payroll Frequency ASCENDER Payroll allows local education agencies (LEAs) to use multiple payroll frequencies in current year or next year payroll periods. This feature allows the district to use a different authorized payroll frequency for salaried personnel than hourly personnel or substitutes.

general:chartofaccts_refresh_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-25T16:49:35+00:00

Click to update the Description field after enter an existing account code or after entering a new account code with a blank description. The object code description is populated from the Object tab.

general:check_number_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T20:23:00+00:00

This field is only enabled only after District is selected as the check type to be issued. This is a user-defined, six-digit field. The field does not have to be filled, you can enter one or more digits. Notes: The check numbers are validated for district checks and a message is displayed if a duplicate check number is entered.

general:check_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-02T16:05:37+00:00

Use the following search parameters to retrieve a list of check transactions. Check Number Vendor Number From Date and To Date - Type the date range for which you want to retrieve check data. If a check number was entered, only that check number's transaction, summary, and detailed information are displayed. This query item can be combined with a vendor number and date or date range during the sort to narrow the search.

general:check_processing_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:42:35+00:00

general:check_processing_ck_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-04-04T13:59:51+00:00

This field is only enabled after District is selected as the check type to be issued. This is a user-defined field and can be a maximum of six digits. The field does not have to be filled, so the user can enter one or more digits. Notes: * The system validates the check numbers for district checks and displays a message if the user enters a duplicate check number.

general:check_processing_po_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:25:17+00:00

This field is automatically populated when a specific purchase order is selected from the transaction section. The check transactions that are automatically created are based on the amount available for the accounting period, which is displayed in the

general:checks_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:35:53+00:00

VCV Click Checks Inquiry to expand the section and view the check transaction details. Click Checks Inquiry to collapse the section. The following check information is displayed: Freq MICR - only displays when the check has been reconciled. Check Nbr

general:checks_reconciliation_displayed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:31:57+00:00

VCV Click Checks to expand the section and view the checks associated with the selected group code. Click Checks to collapse the section. VCV Select the Recon check box for the transactions that you want to reconcile. VCV Click Select All to select all of the transactions in the section or click

general:checks_reconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-04T20:48:34+00:00

Click to expand the section and view the checks associated with the selected group code. Click Checks to collapse the section. Select the Recon check box for each check transaction to be reconciled. The following check information is displayed and can be modified:

general:checks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:27:49+00:00

VCV Click Checks to expand the section and view the checks associated with the selected group code. Click Checks again to collapse the section.The following check information is displayed and can be modified: Freq - payroll frequency (if applicable)

general:cip_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-25T15:06:08+00:00

The Employment Date field on the Change in Position report is populated as follows: * If the Original Emp. Date and Latest Re-Employ Date fields are both populated on the Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info page, then the Latest Re-Employ Date

general:ciq

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T15:26:41+00:00

Form ReceivedSelect if the Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (CIQ) form has been received.Received DateType the date in the MMDDYYYY format on which the CIQ form was received.

general:classid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-09T19:01:25+00:00

PEIMS Reporting Element Type the 14-character, alphanumeric, district-defined ID identifying a unique course section that is unique for a particular school year, campus, and service ID. This unique ID is assigned to the instructor’s duties for a particular class. The class ID number can be repeated at a campus if multiple teachers are assigned to the same course section. When extracting from the master schedule, the class ID number is set to the course number (four to eight digits) + two-digi…

general:clear_existing_61xx_accounts_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:36:20+00:00

(Optional) Budget > Utilities > Mass Increase/Decrease Account Codes > Recommended Prior to performing this step, generate a report that contains the payroll account amounts that currently exist in Budget. Review the report to confirm that only 61XX accounts exist and the simulation is set up to produce the wanted results. Print or save the report. You can clear the existing amounts with a budget simulation.

general:clear_move_additional_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-03T20:18:14+00:00

* If Clear Next Year Requisitions Only is selected, all next year requisitions are removed from the database, and a report is created. You must click Execute to update the database. * If Move Next Year Requisitions to Current and Update Finance is selected:

general:clear_row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-04T20:02:46+00:00

Click to delete an alternate approver and click Save.

general:clearbudgettables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-09T16:46:18+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that the selected tables have been cleared. Click OK.

general:clearnextyeartables_body_existingusers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T20:27:02+00:00

This tab is used to clear: * All next year tables for all pay frequencies regardless of the pay frequency to which you are logged on. * Only EOY accrual data. * Only next year payroll budget data. Individual frequencies cannot be selected for deletion.

general:comments_bank_recon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:21:40+00:00

Click to add comments to the reconciliation record. A comments pop-up window opens. Type your comments and click Save. Otherwise, click Cancel to return to the Bank Reconciliation page. A paperclip icon is displayed on the Comments button if comments exist.

general:comments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:17:23+00:00

Click to open the Comments pop-up window. * Type your notes or other information that relates to the particular vendor on the page. * Click OK to save the comments and close the page, or click Cancel to close the page without saving the comments. A paperclip icon is displayed on the

general:continuingandincrement

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-05-28T20:24:08+00:00

Consider the following information when closing the fiscal year: ❏ Will you select to increment or continue funds on the Fiscal Year Close utility? ❏ Review each action and the corresponding results to make an informed decision. Note: For continuing funds, verify that there is not a balance in the Budget offset account (e.g., 3700) prior to running the Fiscal Year Close process. If there is a balance prior to running the process, the fund will be out-of-balance by the amount from the Budget o…

general:contra_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-01T21:00:17+00:00

When a purchase authorization is created, the field defaults to the payable object/subobject account on the District Finance Options > Clearing Fund Maintenance page with the same fund number and fiscal year as the account number that monies are being expended against. You can modify the contra account for a district check; however, the fund and fiscal year must be the same as the account number.

general:contract_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-29T18:55:26+00:00

Type a code for the contract format. The field can be a maximum of six characters.

general:contract_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-29T18:38:44+00:00

Type the one-character code for the contract type.

general:contractinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-08-11T16:47:47+00:00

Pay Type PEIMS Reporting Element Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-digit code that best describes how the employee’s pay is calculated by the system. If this field is set to pay type 3, the Pay Rate field is required. This is a required field. Pay type 1 employees are generally those employees that are under contract such as superintendents, principals, instructors, etc. (exempt employees under FLSA) whose pay rate remains constant over the course of their contract.

general:contractreq_purchaseorder_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T18:57:30+00:00

1. Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address Select Contract Eligible to identify vendors that can be used when creating a contract requisition.

general:contractreq_purchaseorder_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T18:59:38+00:00

2. Purchasing > Maintenance > Contract Type/Format > Contract Type Create a contract type and associated description. Example: A contract for maintenance could be set up with a contract type M, and the description could be Maint Contract. The M is displayed at the beginning of the assigned purchase order number.

general:contractreq_purchaseorder_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T19:00:41+00:00

3. Purchasing > Maintenance > Contract Type/Format > Contract Format Populate the page with the contract (whether typing or copying from another document). Click Variables to add variables where needed in the document. Click to print the contract.

general:contractreq_purchaseorder_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T19:02:26+00:00

4. Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Contract Requisition Select Contract Type. Select Contract Format Nbr. Populate the Contract Begin Date and Contract End Date fields. Click Scope of Work, and type the scope of the work that is to be added to the contract. The variable should exist in the Contract Format contract template so it can be populated in the appropriate place on the contract.

general:contractreq_purchaseorder_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-08T19:03:21+00:00

4. Purchasing > Reports > Purchase Order Reports > REQ1450 - Print Purchase Orders Once the requisition has become a purchase order, print the purchase order and the contract.

general:contracttype_deletearow

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-26T15:22:37+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click Save. A message is displayed confirming that you want to delete the row. Click Yes to delete the row. Click No to not delete the row.

Set up New LEAs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-23T13:35:25+00:00

Set up New LEAs Click here to generate a PDF of this checklist. This checklist provides a general overview of how to set up a new LEA in ASCENDER. VCV DBA Assistant * Create the new database to which the data will be uploaded. * From the Utilities menu, click Create Database. * After the database is created, select the following options to complete the process:

general:copy_cyr_postions_to_nyr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:59:12+00:00

Position Management > Utilities > Create Forecast Positions [Create Forecast Positions] If an LEA has the Percent of Year field set to less than 100% of the stipend amount on the Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Supplement Modify > Position Record tab, they should consider whether or not to select the Reset Supplement Amounts based on Extra Duty Code Table Default Amount field. If the Reset Supplement Amounts based on Extra Duty Code Table Default Amount

general:copyaccountcodetables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-05-18T19:32:21+00:00

Select to add this account code table to the existing Finance account code table for all funds, functions, objects, etc. that do not exist in the current Finance account code table. If accounts do exist in the current Finance account code table and changes were made to the descriptions, the existing description in the Finance account codes are replaced.

general:copycyrstafftonyr_nextyearsfundingcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-02-19T19:55:54+00:00

Type the fiscal year to be used when updating the distribution account code fiscal year in the next year employee master distribution records. Leave blank if the distribution account code fiscal year in the next year employee master distribution record is to remain the same as the current fiscal year.

general:copyfinancetablestobudget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:05:16+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that the selected tables have been copied successfully. Click OK.

general:copyfinancetablestobudget1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T20:34:54+00:00

If Preview Data is selected, the Data Preview - Fund (Function, Object, Subobject, Org, Program, Ed Span, and Project Detail) Code Table report is displayed with the account code information that was copied for each account code element. Each element code table must be reviewed, and processed or canceled to display the next element code table.

general:copyfinancetablestobudgetexecute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:05:39+00:00

Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that the selected tables have been copied successfully. Click OK. * Click Process to copy the Finance table data to Budget. Review the report. * Click Process to continue or click

general:copypaymentdatesbody

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:58:55+00:00

VCV Under Copy Pay Dates from Grant Type, retrieve a grant type from which you want to copy payment dates: Field Description Grant TypeBegin typing a grant type or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant type. If the grant type or description is not known, click

(Optional) Copy payment dates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:55:49+00:00

(Optional) Copy payment dates Grants and Projects > Utilities > Copy Payment Dates Copy payments dates from one grant type to another. Payment information can be copied from one grant type to multiple grant types. [Copy Payment Dates Utility] VCV Under Copy Pay Dates from Grant Type, retrieve a grant type from which you want to copy payment dates:

general:coverage_offer

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-31T19:38:22+00:00

1A - Qualifying Offer 1B - Offer to employee only 1C - Offer to employee and dependents 1D - Offer to employee and spouse 1E - Offer to employee, spouse, and dependents 1F - Offer of coverage not providing the minimum value 1G - Employee not full-time and enrolled in self-insured coverage

general:coverage_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T15:02:33+00:00

A - Small business health options program (SHOP) B - Employer-sponsored coverage C - Government-sponsored program D - Individual market insurance E - Multiemployer plan F - Miscellaneous minimum essential coverage

general:create_a_security_user_profile_with_the_employee_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T18:31:24+00:00

Security Administration > Manage Users VCV Update the user's profile with the employee number that was generated on the employee's Personnel demographic record. [EP Security Profile] VCV If the employee has an existing user profile, ensure that the profile is active (i.e., not marked as deleted in Security Administration).

Create Account Code Mask

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-15T20:16:50+00:00

Create Account Code Mask The Account Code lookup is used to create an account code mask. Create an account code mask: * In the FND-FNC-OBJ.SOBJ-ORG-PROGRAM field, type the significant digits for the account code components you want to select. Leave Xs for the account code components that are to be ignored.

Create an Account Code Mask

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T17:03:58+00:00

Create an Account Code Mask 1. At the FND-FNC-OBJ.SOBJ-ORG-PROGRAM field, type the significant digits for the account code components you wish to select. Leave Xs for the account code components that are to be ignored. 2. Click OK to display the selected account codes in the

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-21T14:07:21+00:00

Run a report from a saved template: Report Template Begin typing all or part of the name of an existing report template, or press the space bar to view all the templates. As you begin to type, a drop-down list displays report templates with titles that match the letters you have typed. From the drop-down list you can select the template. Only templates you created are listed in the drop-down list.

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-01T22:45:50+00:00

general:create_eft

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-04T15:21:55+00:00

Click to create the EFT file. Based on the selected EFT file option, either the Finance EFT Report or the Finance EFT Prenote Report is displayed. Review the report. Click Process to continue the EFT file process. A dialog box is displayed with a preset (Finance_EFT_mmddyyyy.txt for a Finance file and Finance_Prenote_mmddyyyy.txt for a prenote file) File name. You can type a different name for the file. Save the file on your computer or network.

general:create_files_errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-18T19:35:37+00:00

The Errors button is displayed at the top of the page if any errors are encountered. In addition, the tab name is displayed in red to indicate the tab on which the error occurred, and a TRS Processing pop-up window is displayed with a list of the encountered error(s).

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-01T14:16:45+00:00

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-06T15:17:20+00:00

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-26T15:40:37+00:00

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-26T15:37:14+00:00

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-31T20:56:23+00:00

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-01T22:49:24+00:00

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-21T15:29:34+00:00

general:create_report_existing_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:11:33+00:00

Begin typing all or part of the name of an existing report template, or press the space bar to view all the templates. As you begin to type, a drop-down list displays report templates with titles that match the letters you have typed. From the drop-down list you can select the template. Only templates you created are listed in the drop-down list.

general:create_report_new_public

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:05:17+00:00

Select to make the report accessible to other users. All users in the district who have access to this page will be able to use the template.

general:create_report_new_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-05T20:24:18+00:00

Type the name of a new report template. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed. If you type a name that is already used, it will overwrite the previous template.

general:create_report_new_title

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:05:43+00:00

Type a title for the report, up to 35 characters.

general:create_requisition_1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:53:01+00:00

Field Description Originator The name of the logged-on user is displayed. Requestor Type the name of the person or organization who is requesting the item(s). As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the requestor.

general:create_requisition_2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-25T14:02:09+00:00

VCV Click the Accounts link to select a line item. The line item is highlighted for editing and you can view or add accounts for the selected line item in the Accounts section at the bottom of the page. Note Click to add or read a note for the item. If a paper clip is displayed next to the

Add account code data for each line item:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T20:12:56+00:00

Add account code data for each line item: If you add multiple account codes per line item, be sure that you accurately indicate the percent and amount for each account code. Review the example in the Pct field description. Account Code Type the account code to be charged. The account code must exist in the general ledger and in the user profile (the account code must be assigned to the Requestor's user profile in District Administration.).

general:create_requisition_additional

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-26T19:59:54+00:00

The following buttons are displayed at the top of the page. Details Click [Spyglass Icon] to select or view the account code(s) for the selected item. The account code data is displayed in the lower grid. Vendor Notes Click to add or view vendor notes. A Vendor Notes window is displayed. If there is a paper clip next to the

Create a requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-16T20:07:02+00:00

Create a requisition Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition Use this page to create new requisitions. * The logged-on user can only view their own requisitions. * If an originator does not have an approval path and creates a requisition, the requisition is automatically approved when saved, and a purchase order is created if they are submitted.

general:create_transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T14:38:32+00:00

If there are no transactions to process from payroll, proceed to step 3 to manually enter the transactions. Payroll > Utilities > Transfer Transaction Processing > Create Transactions This utility is used to create a file with the employees' wire deductions from the deduction code table that are created for payroll liability items. You can process the transfer checks at any time. The best time to do this is after all monthly payrolls including voids and issues have been processed. Once the de…

general:create_transfer_checks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T14:39:34+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Transfer Transaction Processing > Transaction Maintenance This utility is used to modify individual transfer transactions. The grid on the Transaction Maintenance tab is populated when you click Create on the Create Transactions tab. You can change the transfer transaction for an individual or a group of codes. The Transaction Maintenance tab allows you to modify and/or add transactions before creating transfer checks and posting to the general ledger. Transfer transaction…

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-01T23:05:39+00:00

Run a report from a saved template:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-01T16:33:09+00:00

general:createbudgetdataacctcodesection

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-08T21:13:05+00:00

Select one of the following options: * Select Include Inactive to include inactive account codes and amounts in the list of available account codes to be transferred. * Select Use Crosswalk to crosswalk any account code elements for the selected fund/years that exist in the Mask Crosswalk utility. See also Mask Crosswalk (Mass Change Account Codes)

general:createchartaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:43:40+00:00

Type the new account number, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select an account code component from the corresponding lookup. Click [Ellipsis Icon] in each field of the lookup to select the appropriate account code components. Click Cancel to return to the Chart of Accounts page.

general:createedfiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T15:36:37+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to display the Employee Demographic (ED) pop-up window. In the Search field, type the record type to narrow the selection. Select the ED record type(s) to be included. BBB ED20 Demographic BBB ED25 Demographic Adj BBB ED40 Contract & Position

general:createerfiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T15:41:41+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to open the Employment After Retirement pop-up window. Select the ER record type(s) to be included In the Search field, type the record type to narrow the selection. Select the ER record type(s) to be included. BBB ER20 Employment of Retirees

Create grant maintenance records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:01:09+00:00

Create grant maintenance records Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Member Grants > Grant Maintenance Add and maintain various details related to a specified grant year, ID, type, or member (county-district) record. You can manage the grant type that is tied to a Grant ID and Member. Fiscal agents can create, save, and submit budget adjustment requests, budget revision requests, and reimbursement requests. Expense accounts must exist in Finance file ID C.

Enter a budget adjustment request

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T16:31:52+00:00

Enter a budget adjustment request Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Member Grants > Grant Maintenance A budget adjustment is used to add or subtract an amount from an object's total award. To create a budget adjustment request, click Budget Adjustment from the top of the page. [Budget Adjustment Button] The Budget Adjustment pop-window opens allowing you to add the request.

Enter a reimbursement request

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T16:45:45+00:00

Enter a reimbursement request Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Member Grants > Grant Maintenance A reimbursement is used to create a transaction to reimburse a member LEA's vendor using an amount that is equal to or less than the amount available in a grant's eligible remaining amount. To create a reimbursement request, click

Enter a budget revision request

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T16:41:48+00:00

Enter a budget revision request Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Member Grants > Grant Maintenance A budget revision is used to move an amount between object classes within the grant's total award. To create a budget revision request, click Budget Revision from the top of the page. [Budget Revision Button] The Budget Revision pop-window opens allowing you to add the request.

general:createreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-18T19:13:28+00:00

Create a Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T14:54:45+00:00

Create a Report Run a report from a saved template: Report Template Begin typing all or part of the name of an existing report template, or press the space bar to view all the templates. As you begin to type, a drop-down list displays report templates with titles that match the letters you have typed. From the drop-down list you can select the template. Only templates you created are listed in the drop-down list.

general:createrpfiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T15:40:07+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to display the Regular Payroll (RP) pop-up window. In the Search field, type the record type to narrow the selection. Select the RP record type(s) to be included. BBB RP20 Regular Payroll BBB RP25 Regular Payroll Adj Click Select to close the pop-up window and populate the field with the selection(s).

general:credit_card_comment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:09:38+00:00

Click to open the comments pop-up window. The comments are printed on the last page of the Reconciliation reports. The comments are not saved and have to be reentered if you click Save as Pending or close the pop-up window without reconciling. Type your notes or other information that relates to the selected credit card code reconciliation.

general:credit_card_include_prev_file_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T23:04:26+00:00

Select to include all credit card transactions from the previous file ID. Notes: If Include Prev File ID is selected, the previous file ID is not exported. It is recommended that the users use the Export by File ID utility before the bank statement is reconciled.

general:credit_card_recon_acct_per

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T23:03:41+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an accounting period to reconcile. Options include the following: YTD Processed Current YTD + Current All YTD + Current + Next

general:credit_card_reconcile

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T23:06:15+00:00

VCV Click Reconcile to finalize the bank reconciliation. * A message is displayed asking if you are ready to finalize the bank reconciliation. * Click Yes to continue, or click No to return to the Reconciliation tab. * If you click Yes, a pop-up is displayed with a list of the credit card reconciliation reports.

general:credit_card_unrecon_diff

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-28T15:14:44+00:00

A calculated value based on the following formula is displayed: Unreconciled Difference = System Balance + Outstanding Returns + Outstanding Charges + Outstanding Check Payments + Statement Balance - Miscellaneous Adjustment

general:credit_memo_eft

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-14T18:44:35+00:00

Select to disburse the payment via an electronic funds transfer. By default, the field is automatically selected if the retrieved vendor has bank information and an EFT email address listed on the Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address and Vendor Miscellaneous tabs.

general:current_month_general_ledger

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-09T19:03:42+00:00

Select this option to display the balances for all accounts in the current month only (not next month balances) (e.g., use this option if the last month of the fiscal year has not been closed in the file ID you are extracting from). CAUTION: If the extract is run a second time and saved to the same drive or CD on the same day, the file is not overwritten as indicated, but all records are added to the first file. It is important to note that if you are doing multiple extracts on the same day, it…

general:current_ytd_general_ledger

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-08T16:30:52+00:00

Select this field to enable the Year 1 and Year 2 fields. Complete the Acct Period, Thru, and Fiscal Year fields as appropriate. Caution: If the extract is run a second time and saved to the same drive or CD on the same day, the file is not overwritten as indicated, but all records are added to the first file. It is important to note that if you are doing multiple extracts on the same day, it is highly recommended that you rename your path or folder so you have both copies.

Debit/Credit Guide

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T14:41:56+00:00

Debit/Credit Guide Account CodeDebitCreditAssets (1XXX)IncreaseDecreaseLiabilities (2XXX)DecreaseIncreaseFund Balance (3XXX)DecreaseIncreaseReserves (4XXX)DecreaseIncreaseEstimated RevenueIncreaseDecreaseRealized RevenueDecreaseIncreaseAppropriations

general:deduction_code_deduct_refund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-02T16:43:59+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a deduction code. Notes: If a 457 deduction refund is necessary, the deduction code associated with the D2 type deduction should be used so that a flat amount can be refunded. If a D1 type deduction is used, the system will not use the amount entered but calculates the amount based on the salary being paid. If you do not have a D2 type deduction, go to Tables, Tax/Deductions, Deduction Cd tab to establish a D2 type deduction, and then select that type of ded…

general:deduction_code_edit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-08T03:48:44+00:00

Type a three-digit code identifying the deduction being recorded for an employee, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select one from the list. This code must exist in the Deduction Code table. When a deduction with a D1 abbreviation code (see Deduction Code table) is added to the employee’s master deduction record, the system calculates the amount to withhold based on the employee’s pay and the percentage in the 457 Deferred Compensation table. The amount is populated automatically in the

general:deduction_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-27T14:03:32+00:00

Type a three-digit code identifying the deduction being recorded for an employee, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select one from the list. This code must exist in the Deduction Code table. Notes: Deduction code 001 should only be used for extra withholding. If a 457 deduction refund is necessary, the deduction code associated with the D2 type deduction should be used so that a flat amount can be refunded. If a D1 type deduction is used, the system does not use the amount entered but calcula…

general:deductionrecordlayout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-13T17:09:48+00:00

SequenceField Name Description Length Example 1Employee Social Security Number91234567892Employee Last Name25Anderson3Employee First Name17William4Extract Deduction Code6123456; can be up to six characters; must match deduction code table5Deduction Description

general:deductions_lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:16:27+00:00

In the Deduction Code Search or Deduction Description Search fields, type a deduction code or description and click Search to narrow the list of deductions. Select the applicable code(s) and click OK to close the lookup and populate the deduction code(s) on the Fund/Fiscal Year Exclusions tab.

general:default

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:52:36+00:00

Select to set as the default address. Only addresses where the access permission is Ship to or Both ship to & receive can be set as the default. Note: All other fields are display only. These fields are automatically populated with data from Purchasing.

general:defaultaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-13T20:18:05+00:00

Type the default account code. By default, the code is set to XXX-XX-XXXX.XX-XXX-XXXXXX when a new record is added. Note: The code is used when the Absence Reason option is selected on the Employee Substitute tab.

general:defaultcategories

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-08T20:19:51+00:00

DescriptionStatement TypeBank Dividends/InterestUser Input Single EntryBanking Fees/ChargesUser Input Single EntryCleared ChecksCleared ChecksCleared DepositsCleared DepositsCleared JVsCleared JVsMiscellaneous AdjustmentUser Input Single Entry (It is recommended

general:define_the_units_of_hours_or_days_to_be_used_when_calculating_leave_requests

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T19:18:43+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Leave > Units VCV If the Days/Hrs field is set to Days on the Tables > Leave > Leave Type tab for the selected leave type, add units for hours. [Leave Units for Hours] VCV If the Days/Hrs field is set to Hours for the selected leave type, add units for minutes. [Leave Units for Minutes]

general:delete_1099_work_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T21:22:12+00:00

VCV Click Delete to clear any existing work tables. * It is recommended that you export both the current and previous file IDs before deleting the 1099 work table, since an export prompt is not offered and since the 1099 work table includes transactions from two file IDs.

general:delete_a_row_accrual

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-14T16:01:12+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click Save. An accrual code can be deleted if it has not been used in the employee payroll records. A message is displayed asking if you want to delete the row.

general:delete_a_row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-14T16:02:05+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved.

general:delete_budget_amendment_fund_year

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T23:20:47+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. The Delete Amended Budget report is displayed. Review the report. VCV Click Process proceed. Otherwise, click Cancel to return to the Delete Amendments page.

general:delete_by_file_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:41:29+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to delete the selected file IDs. * Click Yes to continue deleting all selected file IDs. * Click No to return to the Delete by File ID page without deleting any file IDs.

general:delete_create_report_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:07:23+00:00

Select the template in the Report Template field and click Delete.

general:delete_deduction_code_from_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T02:04:15+00:00

The list of deduction codes associated with the employer are displayed showing the deduction type, deduction abbreviation, and description. Use the scroll bar to locate the deduction code that needs to be deleted. Select Delete for each code that needs to be removed.

general:delete_extra_duty_code_from_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-06T22:30:19+00:00

The list of extra duty codes associated with the employee are displayed showing the extra duty code, description, and account type (e.g., S - Supplemental pay or G - Standard Gross pay). Locate the extra duty code that needs to be deleted. Select the

general:delete_ny_pmis

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-07T21:31:01+00:00

Position Management > Utilities > Mass Delete Forecast Positions [Mass Delete Forecast Positions Page] VCV Leave all fields blank and click Execute. A list of processing reports is displayed. [Mass Delete Forecast Positions Processing Reports] VCV Select the reports to generate, and print or save the reports. VCV Click Process to delete the forecast records. You are prompted to create a backup.

general:delete_report_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-14T15:55:17+00:00

Click to delete the selected report template.

Delete a requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T20:51:54+00:00

Delete a requisition Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition Use this page to delete a requisition. Only requisitions that are in a Not Submitted or Returned status can be deleted. VCV Retrieve the requisition to be deleted. VCV Click Delete to delete the requisition. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion.

general:delete

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-09T21:51:06+00:00

Select the Delete check box on each employee leave transmittal row for the mass delete process. Use one of the following methods to select a group of employees: To select multiple rows when the employees are consecutive, select an employee to start at, and then press and hold SHIFT while selecting an employee to end the selection process.

general:deletea1094crecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-28T17:15:38+00:00

Click to delete the entire 1094-C record. The data on all three tabs is deleted.

general:deleteabankreconrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:06:21+00:00

Click to delete the selected reconciliation. A message is displayed prompting you to delete the reconciliation record. Click OK to delete the record. A message is displayed indicating that the record was deleted successfully. Click Cancel to return to the Bank Reconciliation page without deleting the record.

general:deletearecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-28T15:57:37+00:00

Click to delete the entire record.

general:deletearow_bank_recon_group_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-25T15:48:45+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click Save. Note: You cannot delete a group code if it has associated transactions.

general:deletearow_bankcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-12T13:45:24+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. You cannot delete codes that exist in the payment history or are currently assigned to vendors receiving EFT payments. Click Save. A message is displayed asking if you want to delete the row.

general:deletearow_creditcardcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:58:52+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. You cannot delete or modify a credit card code that is in use by a credit card transaction. Click Save.

general:deletearow_ealeavecampuses

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T19:27:30+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click Save. A message is displayed asking if you want to delete the row. Click Yes to delete the row. Or, click No not to delete the row.

general:deletearow_vendorcategories

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:04:27+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. You cannot delete a category code that is assigned to a vendor on the Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous tab. Click Save

general:deletearow

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:26:11+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click Save.

general:deleteateamrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-06T20:16:27+00:00

Click to delete the corresponding record. A warning message is displayed indicating that the record will deleted. Click OK to continue. Otherwise, click Cancel.

general:deletebutton_insurancecompany

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-06T14:08:34+00:00

Click to delete the insurance company record. A message is displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Click Yes to delete the record. Click No to not delete the record and return to the Insurance Company Codes tab.

general:deletebutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-26T18:39:40+00:00

Click to delete all of the rows in the table.

general:deletebyfileid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T16:29:51+00:00

* Click Yes to continue the process. * Click No to cancel the process. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click OK.

general:deletetaxtables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-14T16:13:38+00:00

Click to delete all tax tables for the calendar year except TRS rates. A warning message is displayed and prompts you to confirm that you want to delete all tax tables. Click Yes to delete the tax tables for the calendar year. Click No to not delete the tax tables and return to the current tab.

general:demographicrecordlayout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-13T17:04:27+00:00

SequenceField Name Description Length Example 1District Name34Lakeview ISD2Employee Last Name25Anderson3Employee First Name17William4Employee Social Security Number91234567895Date of Birth8195807186Gender1M7Address291234 Venice8Address7123A9City25San Antonio

general:demolongname

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-30T16:25:42+00:00

* Payroll > Maintenance > Approve CIP Transaction * Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Admin * Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify * Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position History * Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Supplement Admin

general:department_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-29T19:56:44+00:00

The Department Directory is displayed with a list of all available campus IDs. To narrow the results, type data in the Search field. A list of campus IDs that match the search criteria is displayed. Select a campus ID from the list. Click Cancel

general:designate_wjempsup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-26T14:49:58+00:00

This setting serves two purposes, it determines the WorkJournal (and Leave Request) approval path for the employee and allows the supervisor to access the Supervisor menu in EmployeePortal. Payroll > Tables > EmployeePortal Supervisors > Employee/Supervisor [Employee Supervisor Relationship]

general:distribution_grid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:07:51+00:00

Job CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the job code to which the employee is assigned.Account Code Type an account code, or with the cursor in the field, press F2 to display the Account Codes lookup. To view a list of account code components, place the cursor in one of the account code component fields, and then click

general:districtbudgetoptions_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-20T16:09:04+00:00

Set up budget options: School YearType the starting year and ending year. The field is only for informational purposes and is displayed on some reports.Requested Cutoff DateType the date that the budget requests must be submitted in the MM-DD-YYYY format. When this date is less than the current date, those using the

general:districtfinanceoptions2body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-20T19:03:37+00:00

FieldDescriptionNext Available Travel Request Number Type the next available travel request number. Or, click the Next Available Travel Request Number link to automatically populate the field with the last travel request number plus one. The field can be a maximum of six characters and can be alphanumeric. If only numeric values are used, the field is zero-filled to equal six digits when a partial travel request number is entered and you tab out of the field (e.g., you entered 123, the field i…

general:docattachments_glinquirydoctype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-10T15:21:57+00:00

Accounts Receivable - Invoices Finance - Journal Entry Finance - Encumbrances Finance - Cash Receipt Finance - Invoices Purchasing - Receiving

general:docattachments_glinquiryfolder

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-10T15:21:15+00:00

Accounts Receivable - Invoices Finance - Journal Entry Finance - Encumbrances Finance - Cash Receipt Finance - Invoices Purchasing - Requisition

general:dockamount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-04-11T21:21:12+00:00

The Dock Amount field is a display-only field if a code other than D - Table defined (e.g., F - Full daily rate, H - Half daily rate) is entered in the Dock Type field. If the Dock Type field is set to D - Table defined, type the amount that the dock type code deducts for this leave code (e.g., $30.00, $50.00).

general:docktype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:21:48+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a dock type code. When an employee has multiple jobs, any dock amounts calculated or applied are distributed among the jobs based on the job percent assigned. This calculation is done first by accumulating the total percent assigned for all jobs being paid. Then, the amount of dock to be applied to the job is calculated using the following formula: Current Job Dock Amount = Total Dock Amount x (Pct assigned current job/pct assigned all paid jobs). The Current Jo…

general:dockwithbalance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-04-11T21:20:00+00:00

By default, this field is not selected. If not selected: Leave sequencing occurs first. Leave used in excess of all available leave balances including leave sequencing is docked from employee pay. If selected: Docking occurs first. The system automatically docks employee pay for leave units used and reduces the ending balance by the number of leave units used.

general:document_attachments_application

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-06T14:49:58+00:00

The application you are currently logged on to is displayed (e.g., Finance).

general:document_attachments_choose_file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:19:05+00:00

Click again to add another document, and repeat the steps for uploading a document.

general:document_attachments_delete_document

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-06T14:48:17+00:00

Click to delete the document from the record. You are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the document.

general:document_attachments_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:17:36+00:00

Type an optional description of the document.

general:document_attachments_enabled_pages

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-10T15:20:45+00:00

Application Menu Folder Document TypeAccounts ReceivableTables > Customer InformationCustomersOtherAccounts ReceivableMaintenance > Create/Modify InvoiceInvoicesInvoicesAccounts ReceivableMaintenance > Invoice ApprovalInvoicesInvoicesAccounts Receivable

general:document_attachments_folder

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:16:09+00:00

Select the folder for which you want to view or attach a document. Different types of documents must be uploaded to specific folders. Changing the folder will change the document type options in the Select Type field.

general:document_attachments_list_of_permissible_file_types

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:34:28+00:00

File Extension Document Type .docapplication/msword.docxapplication/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.document.gifimage/gif.jpegimage/jpeg.jpgimage/jpeg.pdfapplication/pdf.pngimage/png.ppsapplication/vnd.ms-powerpoint.pptapplication/vnd.ms-powerpoint

general:document_attachments_permissible_file_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:32:58+00:00

general:document_attachments_permissible_file_types

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:33:16+00:00

general:document_attachments_school_year

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:15:39+00:00

Select the school year for which you want to view documents. Student documents are stored by year.

general:document_attachments_select_file_to_upload

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:16:54+00:00

Click Choose File. Locate and select the document on your computer or network. The file name is displayed next to Choose File.

general:document_attachments_select_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:17:14+00:00

Select the type of document you are uploading. The list varies according to your selection in the Folder field.

general:document_attachments_type_link

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-24T20:08:20+00:00

Click the link in the Type column to download the file to your computer to view it.

general:document_attachments_types_by_folder_application

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T19:31:16+00:00

general:document_attachments_upload_file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-06T14:48:40+00:00

Click to upload the file. * The document is listed in the Document List section. * The date-time stamp and user ID display the date and time the document was uploaded and the user ID of the user who uploaded the document.

Document Attachments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-24T16:25:21+00:00

Document Attachments [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this guide. The Document Attachments feature allows you to upload and view documents by application, school year, folder, and document type. This feature is not available in all districts. If you are logged on as a user assigned to a Document Attachments-enabled role, the

general:document_storage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T18:05:14+00:00

If provided, click to view or attach supporting documentation. If any documents are currently attached, the button has a note icon.

general:document_types_by_application_folder

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-31T19:10:01+00:00

Application Folder Document Type Accounts ReceivableCustomersOtherAccounts ReceivableInvoicesInvoicesAsset ManagementAssetOther, WarrantyBank ReconciliationReconciliationReconciliationFinanceBAROtherFinanceCash ReceiptCash ReceiptFinanceInvoicesInvoices

general:due_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T20:25:51+00:00

The due date represents the date that the check is to be processed. The field is automatically populated with the current system date if D - Use Due Date for Payables is selected on the District Finance Options page. Otherwise, enter a due date in the MMDDYYYY format.

general:dup_row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-30T14:04:58+00:00

Select the row to be duplicated and click Dup From Existing. The contract format information for the selected row is copied to a new row. Type a new name for the contract format.

general:duplicate_jv

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-12T15:45:54+00:00

VCV Select an existing transaction to be duplicated. Click Duplicate JV. A pop-up window with associated journal actual fund/fiscal year transactions is displayed. File IDThe file ID is displayed.JV NumberThe selected JV number is displayed, but it can be modified. If the journal voucher number is already assigned to file ID C, a message is displayed prompting you to enter a different journal voucher number. Also, a duplicate journal voucher is not allowed if there are detailed transactions with…

general:duration

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:19:20+00:00

Type the number of units (days or hours) that the dock type for this leave will be in effect. When populated, this number causes the payroll calculation program to accumulate up to that number of units per school year, while docking using the selected dock type.

Employee Demographic (ED20) Extract

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-09T18:43:13+00:00

Employee Demographic (ED20) Extract The TRS Processing Extract tab is used to extract employee demographic information (employee number, name, address, date of birth, gender, and contact information) for all employees from the Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information tab to the TRS Processing Maintenance tab.

general:ed20info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-14T20:51:35+00:00

Extracts employee demographic information (employee number, name, address, date of birth, gender, and contact information) for all employees from the Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information tab to the TRS Processing Maintenance tab. An ED20 record must be submitted for all new employees including employees who were previously terminated and rehired. This does not apply to retirees. The ED20 record is submitted to TRS at the beginning of a new school year and each month fo…

general:ed40info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-14T21:15:37+00:00

Extracts contract and position information for all employees prior to the start of employment and prior to the submittal of regular payroll contributions for the first time. The data is extracted from the Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info tab to the Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Maintenance tab. Multiple ED40 records should be submitted for an employee with multiple TRS position codes. If the various jobs fall within the same position code, then only one re…

general:eeoc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-25T15:46:56+00:00

* 01 - Official, admin, mgr * 02 - Principals * 03 - Asst prin (Teach) * 04 - Asst prin (Non Teach) * 05 - Elem classrm teach * 06 - Scnd classrm teach * 07 - Other classrm teach * 08 - Guidance * 09 - Psychological * 10 - Librarian, AV staff

general:eiccode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-07T14:44:08+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the code indicating the employee's eligibility in regard to earned income credit. This field is currently not applicable. Due to a change in the law, you can no longer get advance payments of the credit in your pay during the year as you could in 2010 and earlier years. However, if you are eligible, you will still be able to claim the credit on your return. For more information, go to:

general:ein_ssn

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:31:58+00:00

TypeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the EIN (employee identification number) or SSN (social security number). This selection determines the format that is displayed or printed on reports.NumberThe selected format (XXX-XX-XXXX for SSN or XX-XXXXXXX for EIN) in the Type

general:employee_detail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-03T15:43:16+00:00

* Position Number * Billet * Position Description * School Year * Frequency * Campus * Dept * Hrly/Dly Rate * Nbr Days Empld * Salary * Pay * Concept * Grade * Dates * Authorization * Filled * Authorization End

general:employee_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:02:29+00:00

The Employees directory is displayed. To search for a specific employee, type data in one or more of the search fields. To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. Click Search. A list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed.

general:employee_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:55:11+00:00

general:employee_nbr_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T20:13:04+00:00

Type the employee number, if known, and click Retrieve. Or, click Directory to perform a search in the Employees directory. Type data in one or more of the search fields. Click Search. A list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed.

general:employee_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:04:27+00:00

Begin typing an employee number or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select an employee from the Approver Directory. The Employee Name field is populated based on the selected Employee Nbr

general:employee_setup_by_pay_type_paytype1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-14T13:34:51+00:00

Pay Type 1 (Contracted Employee) Below are samples of the employee setup tabs for a pay type 1 employee. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info: [Employment Info Tab Pay Type 1 Example] Pay Info: [Pay Info Tab Pay Type 1 Example] Job Info: [Job Info Tab Pay Type 1 Example] Distributions: [Distributions Tab Pay Type 1 Example]

general:employee_setup_by_pay_type_paytype2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-14T13:35:11+00:00

Pay Type 2 (Non-contracted Employee) Below are samples of the employee setup tabs for a pay type 2 employee. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info: [Employment Info Tab Pay Type 2 Example] Pay Info: [Pay Info Tab Pay Type 2 Example] Job Info: [Job Info Tab Pay Type 2 Example] Distributions: [Distributions Tab Pay Type 2 Example]

general:employee_setup_by_pay_type_paytype3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-14T13:35:31+00:00

Pay Type 3 (Hourly Employee) Below are samples of the employee setup tabs for a pay type 3 employee. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info: [Employment Info Tab Pay Type 3 Example] Pay Info: [Pay Info Tab Pay Type 3 Example] Job Info: [Job Info Tab Pay Type 3 Example] Distributions: [Distributions Tab Pay Type 3 Example]

general:employee_setup_by_pay_type_paytype4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-14T13:35:58+00:00

Pay Type 4 (Substitute) Below are samples of the employee setup tabs for a pay type 4 employee. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info: [Employment Info Tab Pay Type 4 Example] Pay Info: [Pay Info Tab Pay Type 4 Example] Job Info: [Job Info Tab Pay Type 4 Example] Distributions: [Distributions Tab Pay Type 4 Example]

general:employee_setup_by_pay_type_retirees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-14T13:36:20+00:00

Retiree Below are samples of the employee setup tabs for a full-time retiree. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info: [Employment Info Tab Retiree Example] Pay Info: [Pay Info Tab Retiree Example] Job Info: [Job Info Tab Retiree Example] Distributions: [Distributions Tab Retiree Example]

Quick Reference by Pay Type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-26T18:59:43+00:00

Quick Reference by Pay Type The following chart is used to assist users in setting up new employees by pay type. Click a Pay Type column heading to display sample images for each pay type. Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info Sample Staff Job/Pay Data Images by Pay Type (prints separately) Key: X - Required to save the record.

general:employeedemoaddress

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-25T20:12:16+00:00

VCV Under Addresses, complete the Mailing address fields for the employee. It is recommended to avoid special characters including periods in the address fields to eliminate the possibility of errors when uploading PEIMS or UID data. NumberType the street number of the mailing address. The field can be a maximum of eight characters.

general:employeedemoname

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:45:51+00:00

Note: If the Set Demo Alpha Fields to Uppercase field is selected on the Personnel > Tables > District HR Options page, the employee’s Legal and Former Name (First, Middle, Last, and Maiden) and Address fields are set to uppercase when a new employee demographic record is created or an existing record is updated.

general:employeedemootherlanguage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T14:56:45+00:00

Select to indicate that the employee speaks another language. Otherwise, leave the field blank. If selected, the Language section is displayed allowing you to select the language(s) spoken by the employee. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a language. Click

general:employeedemophone

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-31T15:54:46+00:00

Complete the following for the Hm phone fields: Area CdType the three-digit area code of the employee's home phone number.Phone NbrType the seven-digit home phone number. Complete the following Bus phone fields: Area CdType the three-digit area code of the employee's business phone number.

general:employeeportal_guides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-17T15:26:47+00:00

VCV ASCENDER - Admin Guide: EmployeePortal Setup VCV ASCENDER - Admin Guide: Leave Request Setup VCV ASCENDER - Admin Guide: Self-Service VCV ASCENDER - Admin Guide: Travel Reimbursement Setup VCV ASCENDER - Admin Guide: WorkJournal Setup EmployeePortal Guides VCV Employee Guide: Create Account & Login VCV Employee Guide: View Earnings & Tax Information VCV Employee Guide: Update Demographic & Payroll Information (Self-Service) VCV Employee Guide: Manage Leave VCV Employee Guide: Manag…

general:employeeportaloptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-03T19:33:28+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options Use this page to manage your LEA-wide settings for ASCENDER EmployeePortal. These settings allow you to determine the information and features to which your employees have access in EmployeePortal. [EmployeePortal District Options] VCV Under Enable, select the information or features to enable for your users in EmployeePortal.

general:employeeportalselfserviceoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T20:22:15+00:00

VCV Use the EP Self-Service Assignments pages to manage the demographic and payroll fields that the user can view and update in EmployeePortal. * Personnel > Tables > EP Self-Service Assignments Demographic * Payroll > Tables > EP Self-Service Assignments Payroll VCV Use the following pages to view and approve pending maintenance requests that were submitted by users in EmployeePortal.

general:employeeshare

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-28T15:29:19+00:00

Type the employee share amount of the lowest-cost monthly premium for self-only minimum essential coverage providing minimum value that is offered to the employee. 1095-C Forms report notes: If the value in all of the individual month (Jan-Dec) fields match the value in the

general:employeestatus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-08-12T20:48:53+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following one-character codes indicating the employee's status. This field is required. When extracting for TSDS reporting, staff records with a pay type of 1-3 are extracted if the Employee Status is 1 - Active professional

general:employeesupervisor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:37:11+00:00

Click to upload a file containing employee/supervisor records. Under Upload File Process, click Choose File and select the .txt file to be uploaded. Each record must include an employee and a supervisor number separated by a comma (e.g., 002002,003894).

general:employertype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-14T16:11:57+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an employer type. R - Reimbursable A reimbursable employer: Pays into the state unemployment fund, in lieu of taxes, an amount equal to the amount of benefits paid to former employees for service while employed by the employer.

general:employmentinfo_requiredpeimsfields

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:02:16+00:00

Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info PERCENT-DAY-EMPLOYED Percent Day Employed (E0760) is the percentage of a standard district work day for which the employee is hired to work. For an employee on contract, the percentage can be determined directly from the contract: full-time = 100, half- time=“050, and so on. For a non-contract employee, the percentage can be determined as follows. Example: The standard work day for the district is 7 hours. An employee is hired to work for 4 hours per day…

general:employmentretirementsystem_ers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-19T20:55:38+00:00

If an employee is an ERS retiree and is eligible to receive health coverage through ERS (i.e., the ERS Retiree Health Elig field is selected on the Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info tab), the following rules are effective for pay dates greater than August 31, 2016:

general:employmenttype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T19:28:53+00:00

Required TRS reporting field. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the employee's employment type code. BBB F - Half-Time or more BBB M - Temporary BBB P - Less than Half-Time BBB S - Substitute

general:emplr_contrib_factor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-08T03:42:17+00:00

Type the number of times (if not one) the district's contribution(s) toward the deduction are to be applied during the current pay period. Example: An employee is not receiving a paycheck during the summer months, and the employer wants to expense June, July, and August employer contributions in the May paycheck. So you would enter a 4 here, and that number of additional employer contribution payments are expensed.

general:empnbr_approve_cip

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:08:56+00:00

Type an employee number, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve. Or, click [Ellipsis Icon] to perform a search in the Employees directory. Type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:empnbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:56:19+00:00

Type an employee number, if known. The employee's name is displayed at the top of the page, and unprocessed leave transmittals are displayed in the grid below. If the employee number is not known, click Directory. The Employees dialog box is displayed.

general:end_90_day_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T18:41:37+00:00

Type the end date of the 90-day waiting period in the MM-DD-YYYY format. This field is populated by the system if: Pay Status = 1 - Active TRS Status = 1 - Eligible Begin Date >= 09-01-2005 Note: The End 90-day Period Date no longer has to be blank in order for the

general:ending_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-08T19:24:53+00:00

Type the ending date in the MMDDYYYY format to use as a range to select check transactions to be added or deleted from the 1099 work table. If no ending date is specified, 12-31-YYYY, where YYYY is from the from School Year field on the District Finance Options page is used as the default date. If there is no data in the

Enter an Account Code Sort

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T16:53:54+00:00

Enter an Account Code Sort The account code is divided into 12 sort codes; each is assigned with an alpha character A through L: FND - FNC - OBJ.SO - ORG - Y - PC - E - PD XXX - XX - XXXX.XX - XXX - X - XX - X - XX A - BC - DEFG - H - I -- J - K - L

general:enter_the_starting_accounting_period_for_the_finance_fiscal_year_formula

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T22:02:46+00:00

Formula for new employees: For pay frequency = 6 90-day periods = 1 + (month of end 90-day period - starting accounting period) For pay frequency = 4 or 5 90-day periods = (90-day periods x 2) Employer TRS contribution for 90-day employees = ((annual TRS gross/number of annual payments) x 90-day periods) x TRS district rate

general:eoydates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-06-06T15:12:39+00:00

Created: 05/31/2018 Reviewed: 06/06/2019 Revised: 06/06/2019

Verify/update next year TRS rates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-05-23T16:38:55+00:00

general:epwj_verifycontractdates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-16T13:55:11+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info Verify that the employee's job info record is set up with accurate data for WorkJournal entries in EmployeePortal. VCV The employee must be assigned to an active job code in the current year for the date that they are trying to create a WorkJournal entry in EmployeePortal.

general:er20info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-14T21:15:21+00:00

Extracts employment data of retirees regardless of the retirement date or type. The data is extracted from the payroll history to the Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Maintenance tab. ER20 Notes ER20 Notes: ER20 records are extracted per Primary Job and per Retiree Exception, and the Retiree Exception will be the Retiree Employment Type if selected.

general:er20infonotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-05T16:33:27+00:00

ER20 Notes: ER20 records are extracted per Primary Job and per Retiree Exception, and the Retiree Exception will be the Retiree Employment Type if selected. BBB Employees with multiple jobs will have multiple ER20 records reported. BBB Any extra duty pay (XTRA job) that is not attached to the job with the Retiree Exception should be reported with the Primary Job.

general:er20records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T16:04:19+00:00

ER20 records are extracted per Primary Job and per Retiree Exception, and the Retiree Exception will be the Retiree Employment Type if selected. BBB Employees with multiple jobs will have multiple ER20 records reported. BBB Any extra duty pay (XTRA job) that is not attached to the job with the Retiree Exception should be reported with the Primary Job.

general:errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T20:45:16+00:00

This button is only displayed if an error is encountered on the page. A red outline is displayed around the button, and an Errors pop-up window is displayed with a list of the encountered errors. Click [Close Icon] to close the pop-up window.

general:errorsbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-17T20:25:14+00:00

If any errors are encountered, the Errors button is outlined in red. Click Errors to view the encountered errors.

general:ersretireehealthelig

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-16T16:22:19+00:00

Select if the employee is an Employment Retirement System of Texas (ERS) retiree and is eligible to receive health coverage for the current year through ERS. If selected, the employee does not pay the Member Insurance Contribution (IN), and the employer does not pay the Reporting Entity TRS-Care payment (RI).

general:example1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-24T19:54:05+00:00

If the # of Workers' Comp Annual Pymnts field equals the # of Annual Pymts field, the Pay Rate - Absence Deduction + Absence Refund = WC Gross. # of Workers' Comp Annual Pymnts = 10 # of Annual Pymts = 10 Contract Amount = $37,900.00 Pay Rate = $3,790.00 ($37,900.00/10)

general:example2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-24T19:59:09+00:00

If the # of Workers' Comp Annual Pymts field does not equal the # of Annual Pymts field, the Total Contract/# of Workers' Comp Annual Pymts - Absence Deduction + Absence Refund = WC Gross. # of Workers' Comp Annual Pymts = 10 # of Annual Pymts = 12

general:example3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-24T20:18:02+00:00

An employee gets an hourly rate of $10.00. The overtime rate is $15.00 ($10.00 x 1.5). On the Hours/Pay Transmittals page, the employee works a total of 20.0 Ovtm Hrs x $15.00 (Ovtm Rate) = $300.00 (Ovtm Pay). If the Ovtm Code for WC is set to 0, use the staff overtime rate times the overtime hours to calculate the workers' comp gross used for the workers' compensation calculations.

general:exclude_non-standard_employees_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-24T19:09:25+00:00

Select to exclude all nonstandard employees who have received the first payment of their new contract. Nonstandard employees are those employees with 11-, 12- (July/August starts), and 13-month contracts with the TRS Year field selected on the Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay > Job Info tab.

general:exclude_substitutes_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-02T15:48:53+00:00

Select to exclude all substitutes (pay type 4). Clear this field to include all substitutes in the accrual calculation. This field is disabled when employees are selected and moved to the grid on the right.

general:exclude

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-01T15:51:27+00:00

Type the valid account code components to which the selected user does not have permission to approve. For each account code component, type a from and/or to account code component as needed, or with the cursor in the field, press F2. If you press F2, a list of available account code components is displayed. Select the account code component from the list.

general:execute_create_new_accts_by_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:43:23+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. * If any errors are encountered, an error report is displayed. * If no errors are encountered, the Create New Accounts by Fund report is displayed. Review the report.

general:execute_delete_funds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T22:01:58+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. The Delete Funds Change Report is displayed. Review the report. Below are some errors that may be displayed: ErrorDescriptionGeneral Ledger Amounts do not equal to zero.GL amounts do not equal zero.Has unpaid checks.Indicates that there are check transactions that have not been printed.

general:execute_fund_close

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-15T16:37:49+00:00

Click to execute the process. A message is displayed prompting you create a backup. * Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. * The Export File Name field is display only.

general:execute_mass_change_acct_code_fundyr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-05T16:22:33+00:00

Click to execute the process. The Fund/Fiscal Year Mass Change Report is displayed. Review the report.

general:execute_mass_change_bank_acct_by_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:48:39+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. * If any errors are encountered, an error report is displayed. * If there are no errors, the Change Bank Account Group by Fund Report is displayed. Review the report.

general:execute_mass_delete_credit_memos

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:43:44+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. * If any errors are encountered, an error report is displayed. * If no errors are encountered, the Mass Delete Credit Memo report is displayed. Review the report.

general:execute_mass_delete_vendors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T22:13:07+00:00

VCV Click Execute to display one of the following reports: * If Delete vendors that are not referenced by transactions across all File IDs is selected, the Mass Delete Vendor Report displays and includes all vendors that will be deleted. * If Inactivate active vendors that are not referenced by transactions in File IDs

general:execute_post_to_gl

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-12-08T21:33:44+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. The system validates for duplicate amendment numbers and displays an Amended Budget Post Listing report. Review the report. An error report is displayed if the amendment is not balanced. The report lists the amendments, funds, and amounts.

general:existingcodedescriptionfrombudget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-02-13T21:58:57+00:00

Select to retrieve the existing code element description from the current budget.

general:expense373

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-22T16:41:23+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select if the account should be used in the ASB distribution for TRS. If N (Account not used in ASB distribution) is selected, it is not used for distribution of the above state base amount on the TRS 373 Report. For extra duty accounts, the

general:export_finance_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:37:31+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to change data permanently confirming that you want to continue. * Click Yes to continue. * Click No to return to the EOM Closing page.

general:exportpaytablesbackup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-05T22:13:22+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that you are about to export HR tables and confirming that you want to continue. Click Yes to continue the export. Otherwise, click No to cancel the export. Click Save to save the file. A Save As dialog box is displayed.

general:extra_duty_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:02:48+00:00

Type a valid account code number against which the selected employee is authorized to charge. As you type the account code, a drop-down list of corresponding account codes is displayed. Select an account code. Only expenditures account codes with object 6XXX are allowed.

general:extract_errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-18T19:58:47+00:00

general:extract_finance_audit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:39:13+00:00

VCV Click Execute to extract the data. The file name is displayed and you are prompted to continue. * Click Yes to continue the extract. If you click Yes, a progress bar is displayed. * Click No to cancel the extract and return to the Finance Audit Extract page.

general:extract_insurance_data_to_1095_data_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-13T22:49:04+00:00

If it is the first time the extract is being performed for the current year, use the Insert new records only option for the Self-Insured and Non Self-Insured plan options. If it is not the first time the extract is being performed for the current year and all records need to be extracted again, extract the first type (

general:extract_to_asset_management_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-02T16:14:52+00:00

Notes: * The Use Asset Management Cross-Reference Table option on the District Finance Options page must be selected before assets/inventory transactions can be extracted. * The Asset Management Cross-Reference table must have object/subobject codes for all assets/inventory before assets/inventory transactions can be extracted.

general:extract_to_asset_management

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-04T20:55:40+00:00

general:extractpayrollacctcodes_example

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T22:05:38+00:00

general:extractpayrollacctcodes_foreachjob

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T21:42:22+00:00

general:extradutyaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:46:33+00:00

An edit mask allows you to type the full 20-digit account number, mask the organization code, or mask the whole account number. If the organization code is masked, then when extra duty is assigned to the employee, the organization code from the employee record would complete the code. If the entire code is masked, then when extra duty is assigned to the employee, a complete account code must be entered on the distribution record for the employee.

general:extradutyaccounttypedetail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-19T16:36:45+00:00

general:extradutyaccttypeg

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-12T21:06:34+00:00

This is a supplement or additional salary the employee receives that is part of the contract amount or gross pay and is not classified as a supplement on the employee’s check, Calendar YTD, and various other reports. This account type is subject to state reporting, and the distribution record is included in the staff extract process.

general:extradutyaccttypes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-12T21:07:25+00:00

This is a supplement that the employee is receiving in addition to the regular gross salary but it is not part of the contract amount on the Job Info tab. This account type may not be subject to state reporting; however, state reporting does allow for the inclusion of account type S when performing the staff extract process, if needed as part of State Reporting requirements.

general:extradutycode_extraduties

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:33:41+00:00

Type a valid extra duty code against which the selected employee is authorized to work. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the extra duty code you wish to select. If the extra duty code is not known, press F2 (while the cursor is in the

general:extradutycode_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:41:20+00:00

Type the extra duty code, if known. Click Retrieve. If the extra duty code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Extra Duty Codes pop-up window is displayed with a list of all extra duty codes. To search for specific extra duty codes, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:extradutycode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-13T17:05:26+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the two-digit code of the additional job assignment. The drop down can include type G and type S extra duty codes. If the employee does not have any extra duties entered on the Pay Info tab, no codes are displayed. Notes: The type G extra duty code can be split between account codes. The extra duty job code cannot be split between job codes. It can only exist with one job code.

general:extradutycreatedinhours

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:28:04+00:00

Extra duty can also be created using the Extra Duty tab in the Hours/Pay Transmittals page. When the option is chosen, the Extra Duty Code field selection can be used which would populate information based on what is on the Extra Duty tab. The Extra Duty Amt

general:extradutypayoff

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-03T18:54:11+00:00

If the employee’s payoff date matches the pay date and remaining payments exist for the XTRA - Extra Duty job, the following warning message is displayed when payroll calculations are performed: “Employee in contract payoff but has multiple jobs – status not changed”.

Federal EEOC Report Overview

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-13T16:04:04+00:00

Federal EEOC Report Overview What is EEOC? * EEOC is an acronym for Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. * The government requires LEAs to report employee demographic information and activity assignment classification in accordance with the U.S. Department of Education requirements.

FFCRA Payment Examples

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-22T18:28:20+00:00

FFCRA Payment Examples The below examples are based on the sample FFCRA Payment scenarios shown in the above screenshot. EPSLA Calculation Examples * EE with one job that is pay type 1 (under max) * ED leave posted for 5 days * Daily Rate = $ 235.76

general:ffcrapaymentaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T19:57:39+00:00

Type the 20-digit account code to be expensed. For pay types 1-3, enter the complete or masked account code. If you enter a masked account code, the master distribution job record is used to replace the masked components during processing. If the fund is not masked, the fiscal year is required. If fiscal year not masked, the fund is required.

Field Name Cross-Reference

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-16T20:43:11+00:00

Field Name Cross-Reference Payroll Field Name EmployeePortal Field Name Annuities Annuity DeductionAnnuity RothRoth 403B After TaxHealth InsHealth Insurance DeductionHSA Emplr ContrHealth Savings AccountMoving Exp ReimbrMoving Expense ReimbursementTaxed Fringe Benefits

general:fileiddisplay

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-03T19:42:37+00:00

Displays the file ID to which you are logged on.

File Layout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-10T16:35:21+00:00

File Layout Field Length Cash Receipt Number6Cash Receipt Number Description30Account Code20Cash Receipt Amount11Contra Offset Object4Contra Offset Sub Object2Cash Receipt Source/Description30

general:fill_back_orders_view_by_campus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T17:35:49+00:00

The Back Orders window is displayed. A row for each campus is displayed. The following fields are display only: * Item Number * Item Description * Campus * Date * On Hand * Original Order * Units Filled * Back Ordered Units to ShipType the number of items to ship to a particular campus. If you type a number in this field, the

general:filter_add_criterion

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T15:54:41+00:00

Select the logical connector (AND or OR) in the Logical field. Continue adding rows as needed. Using the AND operator limits search results, because the program looks only for records that contain both criterion. Using the OR operator expands search results, because the program looks for records that contain either one criterion or the other, or both.

general:filter_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T21:13:41+00:00

When you want to view only certain data, you may find it useful to filter the report data. You can use specific criteria to retrieve only the data that you want. Not all reports allow this option. From the report window, click Sort/Filter to open the

general:filter_delete_selected

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-02-14T22:03:53+00:00

Select the row, and then click the Delete Selected button. The row is deleted from the filter criteria.

general:filter_operator

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:10:47+00:00

Select an operator. = Equals ≠ Not equals ‹ Less than ≤ Less than or equal to › Greater than ≥ Greater than or equal to

general:filter_report_add_criterion

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:42:54+00:00

general:filter_report_column

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:41:52+00:00

Select a field by which to filter the data. The drop down lists the columns that appear on the report.

general:filter_report_delete_selected_row

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:43:12+00:00

Select the row, and then click the button. The row is deleted from the filter criteria.

general:filter_report_operator

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:45:55+00:00

Select an operator. = Equals ≠ Not equals › Greater than ≥ Greater than or equal to ‹ Less than ≤ Less than or equal to

general:filter_report_value

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:45:00+00:00

Type the value by which you want to filter. For example, if you selected a date in the Column field, type a date to view only data for a specific date. Note: When filtering report data by date, you must use the following formats: If the date is displayed in the MM/DD/YYYY format, the filter value must be in the YYYYMMDD format. If the date is displayed in the MM/YYYY format, the filter value must be in the YYYYMM format. If the date is displayed in the MM/YY format, the filter value must be in…

Other functions and features:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:40:34+00:00

general:finance_creditcard_vendors_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:54:57+00:00

To narrow the search, type data in the following fields: * In the Vendor Name field, type a vendor name. * In the Vendor Sort Key field, type a vendor sort key. Click Search. A list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed. Select a vendor number to populate the field and close the Vendors directory. Otherwise, click

general:finance_delete_jvbudget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:41:16+00:00

Click to delete the journal voucher. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete the journal voucher. Otherwise, click No to return to the tab without deleting the journal voucher.

general:finance_delete_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-12T15:13:12+00:00

Click to clear the page when the purchase order has not been saved yet but is no longer needed. The Delete PO button is not enabled when an existing purchase is retrieved.

general:finance_eft

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T15:11:43+00:00

Select to disburse the payment via an electronic funds transfer. By default, By default, the EFT field is automatically selected if the vendor retrieved has bank information on the Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous tab and an EFT email address on the Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address tab. If a check is needed, unselect the

general:finance_invoice_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T20:26:11+00:00

Type the invoice number being paid by the transaction. The system verifies that the vendor and invoice number combination does not exist in the current or previous file ID. If the system finds the invoice number in a previous file ID, a warning message is displayed to continue using that invoice number or to enter a new number.

general:finance_pa_print

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T20:26:33+00:00

Selected automatically when the transaction is created, and a check is printed, if the criteria for issuing the check (e.g., date or account balance) is met. You can clear the Print field, and the transaction is not processed when the checks are issued.

general:finance_pa_separate_check

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-13T21:36:28+00:00

Select if a vendor has multiple transactions and/or multiple purchase authorization transactions and you need a separate check for one (or more) transactions. When selected, the associated transactions are displayed as separate check items in the list of checks to be processed.

general:finance_pa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:20:34+00:00

Begin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor number or name. Only active vendor numbers are displayed. An inactive vendor number is displayed if the vendor has check transactions that have not been printed or a purchase order that still has a balance. Once all check transactions have been paid and all purchase order balances are zero, an inactive vendor number is no longer displayed in the drop-down list.

general:finance_po_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:34:09+00:00

Type an account code to be charged. As you type the account code, a drop-down list of corresponding account numbers is displayed. Select an account number. If the account code is not known, place the cursor in the account code field and press F2. Or, click

general:finance_po_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-12T15:50:34+00:00

The Date field is set to the current system date, but it can be modified. ● For all file IDs, the system verifies that the year is not less than 2000 and not greater than 2010. ● When the user is logged on to file ID C, the system verifies that the year is not less than the current year, not less than the Finance Options From School Year, and not greater than the Finance Options To School Year.

general:finance_po_separate_check

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-11-29T17:10:55+00:00

Select if a vendor has multiple transactions and/or multiple purchase order transactions and you need a separate check for one (or more) transactions. When selected, the associated transactions are displayed as separate check items in the list of checks to be processed.

Positive Pay Record Layout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-16T16:32:45+00:00

Positive Pay Record Layout The record maximum is 100 characters. Any position (1-100) not used is recognized with a space. Field Name Description Length Position Type Description Account Number121-12NumericRight-justified, zero-filledVoid Indicator1

general:finance_search_for_cash_receipt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:53:16+00:00

In the Cash Receipt field, type an alphanumeric cash receipt number, hyphens are allowed. Leading zeros are not required. However, if the cash receipt number is alphanumeric, the field is not zero-filled. The field can be six characters. Click Retrieve

general:finance_search_for_credit_memo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-02T16:02:21+00:00

Type data in any of the following search fields. Vendor From Date To Date Cr Memo Nbr Reason To retrieve all credit memos, leave the fields blank. Click Retrieve. The credit memos are displayed in the grid area.

general:finance_search_for_journal_voucher

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:47:09+00:00

In the JV Number field, type the journal voucher number. In the JV Number Description field, type the journal voucher description. Click Retrieve. If the journal voucher number is not known, click Directory. To search for a specific purchase authorization number, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:finance_search_for_pa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:41:49+00:00

In the PA Number field, type an alphanumeric purchase authorization number, hyphens are allowed. If the PA number is numeric, leading zeros are not required. In the Vendor Number, type the vendor number. If the vendor number is numeric, leading zeros are not required.

general:finance_search_for_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:49:25+00:00

In the PO Number field, type an alphanumeric purchase order number; hyphens are allowed. Leading zeros are not required. If the purchase order number is alphanumeric, the field is not zero-filled. The field can be six characters. In the Vendor Number

Finance TSDS Crosswalk Tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-12-13T21:11:22+00:00

Finance TSDS Crosswalk Tables * 040 Budget - From Org to Org - Convert an organization code to another organization code. * 045 Budget - Fund/SO to Prog - Convert a fund/subobject combination to a program code. * 046 Budget - Fund to Fund - Convert a fund code to another fund code.

Vendor EFT Process Quick Checklist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T19:17:36+00:00

Vendor EFT Process Quick Checklist [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this checklist. Step1.Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address Add/update vendor EFT email address.2.Finance > Tables > Bank Codes > Bank Codes Add/update bank codes.3.Finance > Tables > Bank Codes > EFT Add/update EFT information.4.Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous Add/update vendor bank information.5.Finance > Maintenance > Postings > Check Pro…

general:finance_vendorname

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:31:28+00:00

Type the name of the vendor. Notes: If the Name field from the Remittance Address section is blank, the Vendor Name field is populated to all unprocessed checks within all file IDs, and the checks will contain the newly updated vendor name. The

general:finance_vendors_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T19:44:16+00:00

To narrow the search, type data in the following fields: * In the Sort Key field, type a vendor sort key. * In the Vendor Name field, type a vendor name. * Select Only Vendors with Purchase Orders to retrieve only vendors with purchase orders.

general:financebackup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-06T15:55:46+00:00

Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. The Export File Name field is display only. Click Execute to continue the export. Otherwise, click Cancel to close the page without completing the task.

general:financenobackup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-01T16:34:36+00:00

Click Process to continue processing. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click OK Click Cancel to cancel processing.

general:financeoptions_allowforapprovalprocess

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:41:13+00:00

Select to allow the budget amendment to travel through an approval path of approvers prior to becoming finalized. The workflow approval path must be set up in the District Administration application. Note: An amendment cannot be submitted when Allow for Approval Process

general:financeoptions_amendmentcutoffdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:27:36+00:00

Type the final date that the budget amendment request amendments can be created in the MMDDYYYY format. When this date is less than the current date, then new, current year amendments can no longer be created. If no date is entered, then new, current year amendments can be entered at any time.

general:financeoptions_assetmanagementcrosstable

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:19:24+00:00

Select if using the interface option from Finance to Asset Management.

general:financeoptions_autoaddbenefitaccounts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T15:58:42+00:00

Select to automatically create the benefit accounts (e.g., 6143, 6145) for all new salary accounts (e.g., 6119, 6121).

general:financeoptions_autocashreceipt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:33:27+00:00

Select to automatically populate the Next Available Cash Receipt Number field with the last number plus one. Click Next Available Cash Receipt Number to populate the Next Available Cash Receipt Number field with last number plus one. Note: If the cash receipt number has reached the maximum number (e.g., 999999), the system goes back to 000001 and begins to search for the next available number that was not previously used (e.g., 000995). If all available numbers were previously used, the follo…

general:financeoptions_autojvnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:34:04+00:00

Select to automatically populate the Next Available JV Number field with the last number plus one. Click Next Available JV Number to populate the Next Available JV Number field with the last number plus one. Note: If the journal voucher number has reached the maximum number (e.g., 999999), the system goes back to 000001 and begins to search for the next available number that was not previously used (e.g., 000995). If all available numbers were previously used, the following message is display…

general:financeoptions_autopanumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:57:14+00:00

Select to automatically populate the Next Available PA Number field with the last number plus one. Click Next Available PA Number to populate the Next Available PA Number field with the last number plus one. Note: If the PA number has reached the maximum number (e.g., 999999), the system goes back to 000001 and begins to search for the next available number that was not previously used (e.g., 000995). If all available numbers were previously used, the following message is displayed:

general:financeoptions_autotransferjvforpayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T15:56:43+00:00

Select to automatically post journal entries to clear the interfund liabilities (due to/due from) between the funds represented on the general journal for the interface process being performed. These interface processes include the following: Deduction checks

general:financeoptions_autovendorassign

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-21T21:32:26+00:00

Select to automatically populate the Next Available Vendor Number field with the last vendor number plus one. Click Next Available Vendor Number to populate the Next Available Vendor Number field with the last number plus one. Note: If the vendor number has reached the maximum number (e.g., 999999), the system goes back to 000001 and begins to search for the next available number that was not previously used (e.g., 000995). If all available numbers were previously used, the following message …

general:financeoptions_changepocreatedbyarequisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:18:31+00:00

Select to allow the user to modify purchase orders created in Purchasing. When selected, modifications can be made in Finance on the Postings > Purchase Order tab.

general:financeoptions_defaultamendmentreason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:33:05+00:00

Type a default amendment reason. The data is used as a default in the Default Amendment Reason field on the Amended Budget Maintenance page.

general:financeoptions_displayglwarning

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T21:00:30+00:00

Select to display the following warning message on the Purchasing > Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry tab and the Finance > Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry tab if the number of retrieved records is more than 20,000: “Report will take longer to generate due to the number of rows being retrieved for the Account Code selected.

general:financeoptions_districtfederalidnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:13:17+00:00

Type the nine-digit Employer Identification Number (EIN) code in the CC-CCCCCCC format.

general:financeoptions_fundfiscalyear

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T15:55:23+00:00

Type a three-digit fund code (e.g., 865 - FAR Guide). The fiscal year code is a one-digit code that is the last digit in the fiscal (school) year. The field restricts account codes on the user’s profile. The logged-on user must have an additional masked account code with a fund (e.g., 865) that matches the Student Activity Fund. This allows the Student Activity Funds to be posted on the Maintenance > Postings page.

general:financeoptions_indirectcostobjectmask

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:36:24+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a 5XXX object code, which is used to designate which revenue accounts are indirect costs when transferring funds from one account to another on revenue and expenditure accounts. The revenue accounts carry a negative sign as the normal balance for estimated revenue.

general:financeoptions_indirectcostsubobjectmask

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:37:27+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a subobject code, which is used to designate which revenue accounts are indirect costs when transferring funds from one account to another on revenue and expenditure accounts. The revenue accounts carry a negative sign as the normal balance for estimated revenue.

general:financeoptions_payablesdateused

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T15:54:03+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select from the options below. This is a required field. D - Use due date for payables T - Use transaction date for payables

general:financeoptions_poobjectcoderestriction

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:34:15+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the allowed range of object codes to be used on requisitions. Only account codes with object codes in the selected range are allowed. BBB R - Class 62XX-64XX and 66XX BBB E - Class 6XXX and 8XXX BBB A - Class 1XXX, 2XXX, 6XXX and 8XXX

general:financeoptions_previousyearfileid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-26T16:54:37+00:00

Type the previous year file ID, which can either be a numeric or alpha ID depending on how the LEA has stored the prior year's data. The process of creating the 1099 work table uses file ID C and the file ID designation in this field for file ID C to determine which file IDs to use. Once the Create 1099 Work Table process is initiated, if check transactions are detected for a file ID other than C and this field is blank in file ID C, a warning message is displayed asking for confirmation to cont…

general:financeoptions_schoolyear

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-09-10T18:20:46+00:00

Type the starting year and ending year (e.g., 2019-2020 for the current school year). The school year data allows you to enter transactions during the span of the school year. For example, for the 2019-2020 school year, you can enter transactions from January 1, 2019 through December 31, 2020.

general:financeoptions_startingaccountingperiod

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-27T20:14:12+00:00

Type the starting accounting period month in the MM format (e.g., 07 for July).

general:financeoptions_useautocyrponumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:38:25+00:00

This field automatically assigns the next available current year (CYR) purchase order (PO) number. Select to automatically populate the Next Available CYR PO Number field with the last number used plus one. Click Next Available CYR PO Number to populate the

general:financeoptions_useautocyrreqnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:36:55+00:00

This field automatically assigns the next available current year (CYR) requisition number. Select to automatically populate the Next Available CYR Requisition Number field with the last number used plus one. Click Next Available CYR Requisition Number

general:financeoptions_useautomaticamendmentnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T16:35:15+00:00

Select to automatically populate the Next Available Amendment Number field with the last number plus one. Click Next Available Amendment Number to populate the Next Available Amendment Number field with the last number plus one. Note: If the amendment number has reached the maximum number (e.g., 999999), the system goes back to 000001 and begins to search for the next available number that was not previously used (e.g., 000995). If all available numbers were previously used, the system displa…

general:financeoptions_useautonyrponumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:38:56+00:00

This field automatically assigns the next available next year (NYR) purchase order (PO) number. Select to automatically populate the Next Available NYR PO Number field with the last number used plus one. Click Next Available NYR PO Number to populate the

general:financeoptions_useautonyrreqnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:38:04+00:00

This field automatically assigns the next available next year (NYR) requisition number. Select to automatically populate the Next Available NYR Requisition Number field with the last number used plus one. Click Next Available NYR Requisition Number

general:financeoptions_usefinanceclearingfund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T15:52:00+00:00

Select to use the Finance Clearing Fund for transactions created when printing checks on the Maintenance > Check Processing > Print Checks page. When Use Finance Clearing Fund is not selected, the Fund and Fiscal Year fields in the Student Activity Fund

general:financeoptions_usesobjforoffset

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-28T15:46:22+00:00

Select to replace the subobject and organization codes on the offset account codes with the subobject and organization codes from the account codes entered in Maintenance > Postings. When Use Sobj/Obj for All Offset Accounts is not selected, the subobject and organization codes on the offset account codes have default values.

general:financeoptions2_nextavailtravelnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-23T18:43:23+00:00

Type the next available travel request number. Or, click the Next Available Travel Request Number link to automatically populate the field with the last travel request number plus one. The field can be a maximum of six characters and can be alphanumeric. If only numeric values are used, the field is zero-filled to equal six digits when a partial travel request number is entered and you tab out of the field (e.g., you entered 123, the field is zero-filled to 000123). If alphanumeric values are …

general:firstpaydatecode_example

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-11T17:23:00+00:00

It is possible to have two first pay dates for a calendar code. For example, you have a teacher calendar of BB and the LEA pays those teachers from September through August with a starting pay date of 9/21 but allows new hire teachers to be paid from August to August with a starting pay date of 8/17. The new hire teachers should not be grouped into the same group as other August starts. But, the following year they need to be paid from September to August like all other teachers. This issue can …

general:firstpaydatecodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:15:33+00:00

In the First Pay Date Codes Search field, type a three-digit first pay date code and click Search to narrow the list of codes. Select the applicable first pay date codes and click OK to close the lookup and populate the code(s) on the First Pay Date Codes tab.

general:firstpaydateofschoolyear_julystarts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-27T21:32:10+00:00

Fiscal Year versus School Year * If your fiscal year is July through June and all employees (including 10-month employees) are paid from August through July, those employees should all have TRS Year selected on the Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info tab. * If the First Pay Date of School Year

general:firstpaydateofschoolyear

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-13T16:33:44+00:00

Fiscal Year versus School Year * If your fiscal year is July through June and the 10-month employees are paid from September through August, this date should be September. * If your fiscal year is July through June and all employees (including 10-month employees) are paid from August through July, those employees should all have

(If applicable) Complete the accrual calendar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-08-01T12:54:46+00:00

(If applicable) Complete the accrual calendar Log on to the current year pay frequency. Payroll > Tables > Accrual Calendars > Accrual Calendar VCV Enter the new pay dates and accrual days for all applicable accrual codes. The total number of days should equal the number of days employed for that group of employees.

Enter school year pay dates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-28T15:41:22+00:00

Enter school year pay dates Payroll > Tables > Pay Dates Enter pay dates for the new school year and click Save. If your LEA accrues, verify the pay dates from this table match the pay dates on your accrual calendar. [Pay Dates Page]

general:firsttimereported20

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-09T16:52:37+00:00

Employees must have an active status in the CYR payroll. Employees are required to have either the Original Emp. Date or Latest Re-Employ Date populated on the Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Employment tab. The most recent value of either of these dates is used to determine if the employee should be included in the extract.

general:firsttimereporting

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:58:37+00:00

Select if this is the first time the local education agency (LEA) is submitting an ED20 or ED40 report. ED20 Notes: Employees must have an active status in the CYR payroll. Employees are required to have either the Original Emp. Date or Latest Re-Employ Date

general:flags

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T14:24:32+00:00

1099 EligibleSelect to not require an EIN/SSN number until printing the 1099 form. This field does not have to be selected before creating transactions as transactions are collected based on 1099 eligibility and the object code table at the time Create 1099 Work File is run. If it is found that a vendor should have a 1099-MISC and the Create 1099 Work File has already been performed, you need to either recreate the 1099 work file or manually enter the transactions in the 1099 Record Maintenance …

general:fourarrowbuttons

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T15:01:11+00:00

[Single Forward Arrow] - Click to move selected entries from the left side to the right side of the page. [Double Forward Arrow] - Click to move all entries from the left side to the right side of the page. [Single Back Arrow] - Click to move selected entries from the right side to the left side of the page.

general:fourbuttonarrows

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-11T22:26:16+00:00

- Click to move selected entries from the left side to the right side of the page. - Click to move all entries from the left side to the right side of the page. - Click to move selected entries from the right side to the left side of the page.

general:framework_position

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T14:09:02+00:00

Positions are essentially groupings of various types of employees. Typically, employees are grouped into the following categories: teachers, admins, paraprofessionals, drivers, and cust/maintenance. There are subgroups within these larger groups. What is a position number?

general:fsp_staff_salary_data_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-29T16:19:57+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the employee eligibility code, or leave blank. This field is reported on the FSP Staff Salary Report and the Health Insurance Participation Report and is required. BBB F - Full-Time (e.g., classroom teacher, librarian, counselor, nurse, or other staff)

general:fsp_staff_salary_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-03T18:45:54+00:00

Health Ins Code Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a code that indicates the employee's eligibility. Note: If the LEA participates in the TEA health insurance plan, the employee must be TRS eligible (i.e., TRS Status Code must be set to 1) and have a Deduction Code with the abbreviated code of AC. Also, the AC deduction must have a remaining payment greater than zero. If an employee and spouse are eligible for and are participating in the health insurance program and one employee is insured…

general:fully_liquidate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:33:29+00:00

This field applies to only the selected purchase order. If selected, the liquidated amount is zero, the Liquidated Amt field is populated after the Net Expend Amt is entered for the selected account code. If not selected, you must manually type an amount in the

general:fund_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-29T15:49:32+00:00

Select a fund from the list. The noneditable fund description displays the name of the selected fund from the Account Codes table.

general:fund_fiscal_year_cashobject

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-29T16:28:44+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a fund/fiscal year from the list.

general:general_ledger_account_summary

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-17T20:13:37+00:00

VCV Select any of the following fields to include in the inquiry: * Processed - Reports account balances as of the end of the last reporting period. * Current Period - Reports account balances as of the current accounting period. * Next Period

general:general_ledger_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-22T13:55:03+00:00

VCV Under Description, select Reason or Vendor Name. Descriptions are only displayed for line items that are checks (CK) or purchase orders (EN). The Description option only works if Show Details is selected. If Vendor Name is selected, the requisition number is not displayed.

Verify 1095 data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-08T17:04:04+00:00

Verify 1095 data Generate the Personnel > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS6720 - ACA 1095 YTD Report to verify 1095 data for each employee. 1095-B: [HRS6720 ACA 1095B Year To Date Report Parameters] [Sample ACA 1095B YTD Report] 1095-C: [HRS6720 ACA 1095C Year To Date Report Parameters] [Sample ACA 1095C YTD Report]

general:generate_pmis_payroll_discrepancy_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-05T16:46:01+00:00

Position Management > Reports > PMIS Reports > HRS8054 - PMIS/Payroll Discrepancy Report Generate the PMIS/Payroll Discrepancy report to determine if there are any active employees not assigned to a forecast position. Below are some examples of the PMIS/Payroll Discrepancy report: [HRS8054 PMIS Payroll Discrepancy Report Example] [HRS8054 PMIS Payroll Discrepancy Report Example]

general:generate_the_position_listing_by_campus_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T16:30:32+00:00

Position Management > Reports > PMIS Reports > HRS8050 - Position Listing by Campus Generate the Position Listing by Campus Report from next year Position Management to determine the following: * If any employees need to be moved to a different position. * If you have vacant positions you need to update with employee information.

Title of the Page

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-24T20:42:16+00:00

Title of the Page Breadcrumbs > Breadcrumbs Include the short page introduction here. Modify a record: Select a student The following receiving options selected on the Options > Purchasing Options page in District Administration determine how information is displayed as well as if certain requisition items can be received on this page.

Approve grant requests

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-20T20:15:10+00:00

Approve grant requests Grants and Projects > Maintenance > Approval Dashboard Upon retrieving the page, a list of all budget adjustment, budget revision, and reimbursement requests awaiting your approval is displayed regardless of the year and grant type. You can elect to approve all requests, individual requests, or return all requests or individual requests. Additionally, you can update the details for an individual request prior to approving or returning the request. And, if you have Docu…

Create EFT file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-22T15:20:46+00:00

Create EFT file Grants and Projects > Utilities > Grant Payments > Create EFT File When applicable, create an EFT file for the bank to process EFT payments for grant reimbursement requests. [Create EFT File ] There are two types of EFT file options available on this tab. VCV Under File Type: Field

Process grant payments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T20:47:51+00:00

Process grant payments Grants and Projects > Utilities > Grant Payments > Print Checks Process reimbursement requests to the member's vendor via check or electronic funds transfer, and then post the transactions to Finance. The payment method is determined by the member's selected payment preference (i.e., if the member has bank information set on the

Revise EFT file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-22T20:19:01+00:00

Revise EFT file Grants and Projects > Utilities > Grant Payments > Revise EFT File When applicable, you can edit Grant Payment and Prenote EFT files. VCV Click Choose File. * Locate and select the file (e.g., GRANTS_EFT_CCCDDD_MMDDYYYY.txt or GRANTS_Prenote_CCCDDD_MMDDYYYY.txt) to be revised. * Click Open

Set up alternate approvers as needed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:37:28+00:00

Set up alternate approvers as needed Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Alternate Approvers Assign an alternate approver to an approver who is unable to perform their assigned approval duties during a specified timeframe for grant requests. [SSA Alternate Approver Page] Field Description

Set up approval path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:33:20+00:00

Set up approval path Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Approval Path Create and maintain the sequence or hierarchy of approvers for grant requests. [SSA Approval Path] Field Description Grant TypeBegin typing a grant type or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant type. If the grant type or description is not known, click

Upload signatures for payment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-28T16:30:04+00:00

Upload signatures for payment District Administration > Tables > Electronic Signatures Upload electronic signatures to be used for grant check payments. [District Admin Electronic Signatures Page] Field Description Signature Name Type the name of the signature to be displayed across the applications.

Approval emails

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:43:01+00:00

Approval emails When a grant request is submitted, it is sent through the appropriate approval path and an email is generated to the approver to notify them of the pending request. If it is a direct request (i.e., the originator is the final approver) and no one else is in the approval path, an email is not generated.

general:grantandprojectcode_lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-02T20:45:57+00:00

In the Search field, begin typing a grant/project code or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant/project code. The Grant and Project Codes lookup closes and the selected grant/project code is populated in the

Grant IDs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-20T18:45:34+00:00

Grant IDs In the Search field, begin typing a grant ID or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant ID. The Grant ID lookup closes and the selected grant ID is populated in the Grant ID

general:grantprojectcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-02T20:48:13+00:00

Type a grant/project code, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a code from the Grant and Project Codes lookup.

general:grantprojects_transactiondetail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-28T20:02:21+00:00

DetailClick [Spyglass Icon] to view the corresponding details for the transaction and any documents attached to the transaction (if applicable). You can edit, save, and submit budget adjustment requests, budget revision requests, and reimbursement requests. Depending on the transaction type and status, either the Budget Adjustment Request, Budget Revision Request, or the Reimbursement Request pop-up window opens.

general:grantprojects_transactionstatus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-24T13:07:49+00:00

The transaction status is displayed. BBB Canceled - The transaction was canceled (reversed or voided). BBB Paid - The reimbursement transaction completed the approval process and is approved and paid. BBB Pending - The reimbursement transaction completed the approval process and is approved but pending payment.

general:grantprojects_transactiontype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-29T20:50:38+00:00

The transaction type is displayed. BBB Budget Adjustment - Budget Adjustment Request BBB Budget Revision - Budget Revision Request BBB Original - Original Budget BBB Periodic - Reimbursement Request BBB Final - Final Request

general:grantprojectsmanagempuserprofiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-03-25T18:18:52+00:00

VCV Under User: First NameType the user's first name. This field can be a maximum of 50 characters. Last NameType the user's last name. This field can be a maximum of 50 characters. VCV In the Phone fields: Area CdType the three-digit area code of the phone number.

Audit entry notes for funds continued during EOY fiscal year close

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-26T16:11:55+00:00

Audit entry notes for funds continued during EOY fiscal year close If an audit entry needs to be entered for a continuing fund, the account(s) may need to be activated on the Finance > Maintenance > Create Chart of Accounts page in the prior year file ID. [Create Chart of Accounts] Finance > Maintenance > Postings > Journal Actual or Journal Budget

general:grantprojectsoverview_prerequisites

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-21T13:06:16+00:00

VCV Update Security Administration to access the Grants and Projects application. You can create a new role or add to an existing role. For the process covered in this document, you will need access to the GL Inquiry and Grant/Project Profile pages.

Run GL inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-18T20:42:25+00:00

Run GL inquiry Grants and Projects > Inquiry > GL Inquiry This page is used to perform inquiries for specific grant/project codes for the entire grant period regardless of the file ID. [GL Inquiry] VCV Under Retrieval Options, select any of the following fields to include/exclude in the inquiry: VCV

Set up grants

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-21T13:10:07+00:00

Set up grants Grants and Projects > Tables > Grant/Project Profile This page is used to define grant codes that can be tracked in the Grants and Projects application. Each grant code is assigned fund/fiscal years and file ID information allowing information to be combined across file IDs for a complete inquiry or report.

Set up user profiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-21T13:17:25+00:00

Set up user profiles District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Grants and Projects This tab is used to assign specific grant codes to individual users. After a grant code is assigned to a user, the user has access to view the details associated with the grant code in the Grants and Projects application. VCV

Grants Directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-07T16:51:28+00:00

Grants Directory Use the following fields to perform a grants search. * To search for a grant ID, type data in one or more of the search fields. * To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. * Click Search. A list of grant IDs matching the search criteria is displayed.

SSA Fiscal Management Quick Checklist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-12T20:27:50+00:00

SSA Fiscal Management Quick Checklist [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this checklist. Step1.Update roles/users in Security Administration to allow SSA Fiscal Agent Management permissions. You can add permissions to an existing role or create a new role.2.Upload signatures for grant payments in District Administration.

general:grantsandprojectsapprovaldashboardnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-03T19:51:25+00:00

general:grantsandprojectsoverexpend

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-26T13:15:51+00:00

Over Expend Notes: If changes are made to a reimbursement request (amounts are moved between object classes), the amount must be less than the over expenditure limit. Use the following calculation to find the over expenditure limit for an object class:

Grant School Year Range

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-01T16:03:20+00:00

Grant School Year Range This lookup provides a list of school years, file IDs, and accounting period ranges associated with the grant code selected in the Grant/Project Profile Code parameter. Select the check box for the corresponding row(s) of data to be included in the report. You can select multiple rows to include all transactions for the selected grant code regardless of the school year or file ID.

Add member bank information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:45:24+00:00

Add member bank information Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Members > Bank Code Add the member's bank information to be used for EFT payments that are processed in the Grants and Projects application. If the member uses the same bank account information for vendor EFT payments, this page does not need to be completed.

general:grantsprojects_bankinformation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:33:45+00:00

general:grantsprojects_budgetadjustmentrequest

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-19T14:07:27+00:00

Budget Adjustment Request If the transaction type is Budget Adjustment, the Budget Adjustment Request pop-up window opens with the corresponding details. BBB If the transaction status is Posted or Submitted, the details in the pop-up are read-only.

general:grantsprojects_budgetadjustmentrequestbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-19T13:55:15+00:00

The transaction date and status are displayed. Review the budget data, indicate the adjustment amount, and save or submit the request. ObjectDisplays a list of the six predefined object classes for each year and grant ID: 61XX, 62XX, 63XX, 64XX,

general:grantsprojects_budgetrevisionrequest

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-19T18:32:22+00:00

Budget Revision Request If the transaction type is Original or Budget Revision, the Budget Revision Request pop-up window opens with the corresponding details. BBB If the transaction status is Posted or Submitted, the details in the pop-up are read-only.

general:grantsprojects_budgetrevisionrequestbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-20T19:56:36+00:00

The transaction date and status are displayed. Review the budget data, indicate the revision amount, and save or submit the request. ObjectDisplays a list of the six predefined object classes for each year and grant ID: 61XX, 62XX, 63XX, 64XX, 65XX

Create member records

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:43:43+00:00

Create member records Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Members > Member Information Add member data to create a member record. Member information records cannot be deleted; however, they can be set to an inactive status. For privacy purposes, fiscal agents can use the Security Administration application to limit the users who can view this information.

Create and maintain user profiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-09T14:39:45+00:00

Create and maintain user profiles Grants and Projects > Tables > Manage Users This page is used to manage user accounts in Grants and Projects and MemberPortal. In order for users to have the appropriate access to a grant, user profiles must be completed by linking the user to a specific member and grant type, and assigning the level of access the user has to a grant type. Fiscal agents can use this page to add, change, and delete user accounts in both Grants and Projects and MemberPortal.

Grants and Projects

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-11T16:09:47+00:00

Grants and Projects VCV ASCENDER - Grants and Projects Tracking VCV ASCENDER - G&P SSA Fiscal Agent Management Setup * ASCENDER - G&P SSA Fiscal Agent Management - Enter Grant Requests * ASCENDER - G&P SSA Fiscal Agent Management - Approve Grant Requests * ASCENDER - G&P SSA Fiscal Agent Management - Process Grant Payments

general:grantsprojects_reimbursementrequest

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-10T20:46:50+00:00

Reimbursement Request If the transaction type is Periodic, the Reimbursement Request pop-up window opens with the corresponding budget details. BBB If the transaction status is Pending, Posted, or Submitted, the details in the pop-up are read-only.

general:grantsprojects_reimbursementrequestbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T17:11:31+00:00

The transaction date and status are displayed. Review the data, indicate the reimbursement and matching fund amounts (if any), and save or submit the request. Over Expend Notes: If changes are made to a reimbursement request (amounts are moved between object classes), the amount must be less than the over expenditure limit. Use the following calculation to find the over expenditure limit for an object class:

general:grantsprojects_retrieverecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-29T20:00:34+00:00

Field Description Grant/Project Code Type a grant/project code, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a code from the Grant and Project Codes lookup. DescriptionThe grant/project code description is displayed. VCV Click Retrieve. The grant record is displayed.

general:grantsprojectsmanageusers_retrieverecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-30T16:12:46+00:00

VCV Under Users, use the following fields to narrow your search results: First NameType the MemberPortal user's first name. Last NameType the MemberPortal user's last name. MemberType the member name or county district number. AdminSelect to only include admin users.

general:grantsprojectsvendors_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-22T18:24:17+00:00

To narrow the search, type data in the following fields: * In the Sort Key field, type a vendor sort key. * In the Vendor Name field, type a vendor name. * Select Include Inactive to retrieve a display-only list of inactive vendors. Click Search

general:granttype_grantamounts_delete

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-18T15:04:22+00:00

Click to delete a row. The row is shaded red to indicate that it will be deleted when the record is saved. Click OK to close the pop-up window and return to the Grant Types tab. Click Save to delete the rows marked for deletion.

general:granttype_grantamounts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:49:25+00:00

The selected Grant Type is displayed at the top of the pop-up window. You can add new years and budget amounts, or edit existing amounts as needed. Note: Future functionality will use this information to prevent the disbursement of reimbursements over the allotted annual budget amount. However, at this time, it is for informational purposes only.

Grant Types

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-06T19:13:14+00:00

Grant Types In the Search field, begin typing a grant type or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant type. The Grant Type lookup closes and the selected grant type is populated in the

Grant Types

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-30T17:43:37+00:00

Grant Types In the Search field, begin typing a grant type or description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a grant type. The Grant Types lookup closes and the selected grant type is populated in the

general:gross_amt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-17T16:02:32+00:00

Type the employee’s gross monthly salary for refund types F, G, I, M, P, S, and T. This field is required for all listed refund types. For all other refund types, the field value can be set to 0.00. If the refund type is TRS related (i.e., refund types I, P, S, or T), enter the TRS gross amount.

general:group_code_create_transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-30T20:31:23+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a bank account group code from the list. All fund codes and years that exist for the group code are displayed.

general:group_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-18T19:12:14+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a bank account group code from the list. All fund codes and years that exist for the group code are displayed.

general:health_ins_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-22T20:59:15+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a code that indicates the employee's eligibility. Note: If the LEA participates in the TEA health insurance plan, the employee must be TRS eligible (i.e., TRS Status Code must be set to 1) and have a Deduction Code with the abbreviated code of AC. Also, the AC deduction must have a remaining payment greater than zero. If an employee and spouse are eligible for and are participating in the health insurance program and one employee is insured through the spo…

general:health_insurance_status_employee_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:56:04+00:00

Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve. Or, click Directory to perform a search in the Employees directory. Note: The employee autosuggest field includes employees whose records were created in Personnel but do not have a Pay Info or Job Info record.

general:hourstransmittals_retrieveemployee

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-24T16:10:27+00:00

Type the employee number. Or, click Directory to perform a search in the Employees directory.

How W-2 Boxes Are Populated

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-12-12T13:40:22+00:00

How W-2 Boxes Are Populated W-2 Box W-2 Report Third Party Sick Calculation (from Calendar YTD page)1Withhold GrossWH GrossContract Pay + Non-Contract Pay + Supplemental Pay + TRS Supplemental + Tax Emplr Ins Contr + Non-TRS Bus Allow + Non-TRS Reimbr Excess +

general:hr_addemp

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-20T19:26:58+00:00

VCV Click Add Emp to add a new employee record. A blank record is displayed allowing you to begin entering data. * If the Auto Assign Employee Number field is selected on the Payroll or Personnel > Tables > District HR Options page, the employee is assigned the next available employee number upon saving the record.

general:hr_create_report_directory_public

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:31:20+00:00

Select to include both private and public reports. Any changes you make to a public template will be saved under your user ID as a private template. If you want to save the template as public, you must change the name. Public templates cannot have the same names.

general:hr_create_report_directory_report_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:29:07+00:00

Type all or any part of the report template name.

general:hr_create_report_directory_report_title

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:30:13+00:00

Type all or any part of the report title.

general:hr_create_report_directory_user_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:30:51+00:00

Type all or any part of the user ID that created the template.

Directory - Create Report Templates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:31:41+00:00

Directory - Create Report Templates The Report Selection directory is used to retrieve private and public report templates. Locate a private or public template: You can search for a template by the report template, report title, or user ID. Enter data in any or all of the following fields:

general:hr_employeefield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:01:58+00:00

Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve. The employee's data is retrieved based on the selected TRS month and year.

general:hr_insurancecompany

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-27T15:10:36+00:00

Click to add insurance company data. A blank insurance company code record is displayed.

general:hr_retrieveemployeedemo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:36:56+00:00

general:hr_retrieveinsurancecompany

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:35:48+00:00

Click [Ellipsis Icon] to search for and select an insurance company code. Or, begin typing the insurance company code or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an insurance company code or name and click Retrieve.

general:hrbackup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:24:51+00:00

* Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. * A pop-up window opens with the Frequency and Export File Name fields. * Click Execute to continue the export. Otherwise, click

general:hrotherhelpfuldocs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-16T20:45:23+00:00

VCV Calculating Retiree Surcharge VCV Calculating Net Pay VCV Calculating Accrual of Employer TRS-Care Contribution VCV Calculating Accrued Federal Grant and Federal Care VCV Calculating Contract Balance VCV Calculating Days Earned With Absence Deduction VCV Calculating Days Earned With Absence Refund VCV Calculating Employer Insurance or Annuity Contributions VCV Calculating FICA Accruals VCV Calculating TRS 373 and On-Behalf (Annual Amounts/General Fund/New Member) VCV Calculating Pa…

general:hrs5100_useconsent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-12T19:54:47+00:00

Y - Use the W-2 electronic consent for each terminated/inactive employee (from EmployeePortal) to determine whether or not to print a W-2. * If electronic consent is Y, do not print a W-2. * If electronic consent is N, print a W-2. * If electronic consent is blank, print a W-2 for all terminated/inactive employees.

general:hrs8050intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-11T16:19:57+00:00

The report provides a list of all positions within a campus. The report is sorted by campus number and includes each job position along with a position number, billet number, description, employee number, employee name, percentage of day worked, and pay frequency.

general:hrs8053intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-11T16:28:23+00:00

This report provides a list of positions that have salary rates that are not within the minimum and maximum salary ranges.

general:hrs8054intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-11T16:26:47+00:00

The report allows you to print a list of all positions that do not have payroll records or a list of payroll records that do not have position management records.

general:hrsperday

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-07-22T20:48:45+00:00

Type the standard number of hours per day to be worked by the employee. The field is disabled for all XTRA coded jobs and is calculated automatically for pay type 2 employees when you click Calculate. The field is used exclusively by a timekeeping system when the Merge Payroll Transactions Files is used and regular hours exist in the import file.

general:hrstaffdemo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-09-27T16:23:51+00:00

general:image_example_message

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-20T16:48:19+00:00

Some of the images and/or examples provided in this document are for informational purposes only and may not completely represent your LEA’s process.

general:immediatedestination

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-06T15:37:59+00:00

Type the nine-digit Federal Reserve routing number used to identify the receiving point. This number is provided by the individual bank. The field length is ten digits, since some banks require a leading space before the nine-digit routing number. If you type the nine-digit routing number and later need to add a space before the number, you must do the following:

general:import_finance_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:36:29+00:00

VCV Click Execute to import finance tables. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to import finance tables and confirming that you want to continue. * Click Yes to continue the import. Type a password for the exported file and then click

general:import_jv

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-06T15:33:35+00:00

VCV Click Browse. A pop-up window is displayed. * Locate and select the file on your computer or network. * Click Open to select the file, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without processing.

general:import_path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:10:13+00:00

Click Browse. The File name pop-up window opens. Select a file and click Open. The pop-up window closes and the file name is displayed in the Import Path field. Click Cancel to close the pop-up window without selecting a file.

general:import_travel

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-06T15:09:12+00:00

VCV Click Browse. A pop-up window is displayed. * Click Choose File. Locate and select the file on your computer or network. Click Open to select the file, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without processing. * Click Submit to accept the file name and return to the Import Travel Check Transactions page. Or, click

general:importaca1095notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-14T19:30:45+00:00

Employee Share of Lowest Cost Monthly Premium notes: If the Plan Start Month entered on the utility page is 01, the Employee Share of Lowest Cost Monthly Premium amount entered on the utility page is copied to the to year Employee Share All field on the ACA 1095 YTD 1095-C Data maintenance page. The individual month fields are populated with 0.00.

general:importantpayrollverification

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-03T18:44:20+00:00

Payroll Verification Items Review and address the the applicable Payroll verification items. This should be completed before each group of employees start their new pay for the new year. Run a user-created report to verify the following information:

general:importbrowse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:29:45+00:00

The following is displayed: (none selected). Click Browse to perform one of the following functions. Click Open to select the file name, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without processing. Click Submit to accept the import file name and return to the Import Budget Tables page. Type the drive and folder name from where you want to import the tables, and then click

general:importdistributiondata_ucr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-24T15:27:14+00:00

[PMIS Import Distribution Data Example]

general:importpositiondata_ucr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-24T15:10:55+00:00

[PMIS Import Position Data Example]

general:importstaffdemoinsurancedata_errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-13T22:16:50+00:00

* An invalid employee number or non-employee number. * An invalid insurance company code. * An invalid plan number. * An invalid plan type. * If an employee coverage record is being inserted, the social security number and date of birth must be validated.

Pay Type 2 OT and ST OT Calculations

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-21T14:23:59+00:00

Pay Type 2 OT and ST OT Calculations OT = Overtime - Calculated if the employee has physically worked over 40 hours? (excluding leave hours). ST OT = Straight Overtime - Calculated for those hours for leave and under 40. If the employee has 40 hours and leave is being used, a warning is displayed on the report.

general:imputedincomecalculationexamples

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-14T20:10:53+00:00

Formula values A = (Ceiling (Total Gross Salary /1000 )) * salary multiplier) + (Basic Coverage Amt / 1000) (entered on page) B = Excess Income Amount / 1000 C = Imputed Income Cost (rate based on employee age at 12-31 of the selected calendar year)

general:imputedincomenotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-14T19:40:27+00:00

If an active employee has a TI deduction code but no LI deduction code, and the TI deduction code has remaining payments, the employee is not extracted. However, the TI is processed through payroll using the existing current amounts in the TI deduction code.

general:include_test

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T14:35:50+00:00

This is a test include.

general:include

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-01T15:51:10+00:00

Type the valid account code components to which the selected user has permission to approve. For each account code component, type a from and/or to account code component as needed, or with the cursor in the field, press F2. If you press F2, a list of available account code components is displayed. Select the account code component from the list.

general:increment_leave_earned_to_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T02:27:59+00:00

A list of leave type codes and descriptions currently associated with the selected employees' records is displayed under Increment Leave Earned to Employees. Only active leave types can be selected. This type of leave adjustment enables the user to mass increment selected employees' records anytime during the school year without processing a payroll. For example, if several employees start employment after leave has been incremented through payroll processing, use the

general:insert

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T20:34:55+00:00

Account CodeType the new account number, or with the cursor in the field, press F2. ● Click Add to add the new account code selections to the chart of accounts grid. Otherwise, click Cancel. ● In the Description field, type the new account description.

general:interface_errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:55:59+00:00

The Errors button is displayed at the top of the page if any errors are encountered. In addition, the tab name is displayed in red to indicate the tab on which the error occurred and a TRS Processing pop-up window opens with a list of the encountered error(s).

general:interface_the_10-month_simulation_to_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T16:21:16+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options Interface the 10-month simulation to Budget. Retrieve the simulation that contains ALL employees and remove first pay date codes that contain 12-or 11-month employees. It is important not to interface employees to Budget more than one time.

general:interface_the_11-month_simulation_to_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:54:15+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options Interface the 11-month simulation to Budget. Retrieve the simulation that contains ALL employees and remove first pay date codes that contain 12-month employees. It is important not to interface employees to Budget more than one time.

general:interface_the_12-month_simulation_to_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:53:39+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options Interface the 12-month simulation to Budget. BBB If you already updated forecast for your 12-month employees, it is important to select No in the Update Forecast field as you do not want to add an additional increase. If this field is not updated, the simulation process updates the existing positions with an additional increase for the year and increments the step by a year.

general:interfund_due_from_obj.sobj

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-07-24T13:20:32+00:00

If the Fund is: The Interfund Due from Obj.Sobj field is set to:100-1991261.00 (General Fund)200-4991262.00 (Special Revenue Fund)500-5991263.00 (Debt Service Fund)600-6991264.00 (Capital Projects Fund)701-7491265.00 (Enterprise Fund)750-7991266.00 (Internal Service Fund)

general:inventory_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:14:52+00:00

Click to select inventory items to be added to the bid. The Inventory Directory is displayed. To search for a specific item, type data in one or more of the search fields. To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. Click Search

general:invoicesavailableforcustomer

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-25T15:18:42+00:00

* Each invoice record displays the invoice number, invoice date, invoice amount, amount paid, adjusted amount, overpayment credit, outstanding amount, and invoice account code. * If the customer has an outstanding invoice that has yet to be printed, the invoice record is not displayed and an overpayment cannot be applied.

general:irs_1099_helpful_links

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-01-20T17:48:19+00:00

About Form 1099-MISC, Miscellaneous InformationAbout Form 1099-NEC, Nonemployee Compensation Filing Information Returns Electronically (FIRE)Form 1099-MISCForm 1099-NEC E-file information returns with IRIS

general:irs_aca_helpful_links

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-20T20:25:03+00:00

Affordable Care Act Information Returns (AIR) Form 1095-B Form 1095-B Instructions Form 1095-C Form 1095-C InstructionsIRS ACA Homepage

general:irs_w2_helpful_links

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-13T21:36:02+00:00

Business Services OnlineChecklist for W-2/W-3 Online FilingEmployer W-2 Filing Instructions & Information Electronic W-2/W-2C FilingForm W-2General Instructions for Forms W-2 and W-3IRS Homepage Paper Forms W-2 & Instructions

general:irslockinletter

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-04-13T18:48:02+00:00

Select this field to indicate that the IRS has determined that this employee does not have sufficient withholding and has issued a Lock-in Letter to restrict changes to the employee's W-4 information. Note: This field is shared across all pay frequencies where the employee exists; therefore, changes to the logged-on pay frequency are effective in any other pay frequency and vice versa.

general:job_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:20:07+00:00

Type the four-digit job code, if known. Click Retrieve. If the job code is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Job Code pop-up window opens with a list of all job codes. To search for specific job codes, type data in one or more of the search fields. Click Search

general:jobcode_accountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-06-09T14:15:34+00:00

Type the account number, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select an account code from the Account Codes lookup. Click [Ellipsis Icon] in each field of the lookup to select the appropriate account code components. BBB Click Search to display a list of account codes matching the entered components.

general:jobcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-05-29T13:33:20+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the four-digit job code to which the employee is assigned. The job code list is generated by the jobs on the Job Info tab. Note: All distributions for a particular job code and account type are totaled together. Any new type G distributions are totaled with the regular type G distributions. The total contract amount is applied to these distributions.

general:journal_actual_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:31:23+00:00

general:journal_actual_perform

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-13T21:37:17+00:00

VCV Click Execute to start the export function. You are prompted to create a backup. A pop-up with the assigned JV number is displayed. Click OK. A message indicating that the duplicate JV transactions process completed successfully is displayed. Click OK.

general:journal_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:15:30+00:00

Type specific data in any of the following fields to retrieve journal vouchers for that criteria: JV Number JV Type From Date To Date Acct Per Reason To retrieve all journal vouchers, leave the fields blank. Click Retrieve. The journal vouchers are displayed.

general:journal_vouchers_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:37:02+00:00

VCV Click Journal Vouchers to expand the section and view the journal voucher details. Click Journal Vouchers to collapse the section. The following journal voucher information is displayed: Freq JV Nbr Amount Date Description Status Group Recon Title

general:journal_vouchers_reconciliation_displayed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:32:49+00:00

VCV Click Journal Vouchers to expand the section and view the journal voucher associated with the selected group code. Click Journal Vouchers to collapse the section. VCV Select the Recon check box for the transactions that you want to reconcile.

general:journal_vouchers_reconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T19:58:28+00:00

Click Journal Vouchers to expand the section and view the journal associated with the selected group code. Click Journal Vouchers to collapse the section. Select the Recon check box for each journal voucher transaction to be reconciled. The following journal voucher information is displayed and can be modified:

general:journal_vouchers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:28:43+00:00

VCV Click Journal Vouchers to expand the section and view the journal vouchers associated with the selected group code. Click Journal Vouchers again to collapse the section. The following journal voucher information is displayed and can be modified:

general:jv_acct_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:30:12+00:00

To view a list of account code components, place the cursor in one of the account code component fields, and then click [Ellipsis Icon] or press F2. Type the applicable account code components, or leave blank for all account codes, and then click Search. A list of available account code components is displayed.

general:jv_number_auto

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-28T16:35:49+00:00

Type a journal voucher number, hyphens are allowed. Leading zeros are not required. The field can be a maximum of six alphanumeric characters. If the journal voucher number is alphanumeric, the field is not zero-filled. If Use Automatic JV Number Assignment

general:jv_number_desc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-10T21:21:18+00:00

If a description exists in the JV Number Description field, that description automatically displays in the Reason field. You may change the reason. Note: When data from the Budget application is moved to the Finance application, the Reason field is automatically populated with OPENING ENTRY.

general:jv_number_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:13:58+00:00

Type a user-defined description of the journal voucher transaction. If a description exists in the Default JV Number Description field, that description automatically displays in the JV Number Description field. You may change the description. The description can be a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.

general:jv_number_import

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-04T15:55:23+00:00

Type a user-defined, six-character journal voucher number. If numeric values only are used, the system zero-fills the number to six digits when the user enters a partial JV number and tabs out of the field (e.g., the user entered 123, the system zero-fills the field to 000123). If alphanumeric values are used, the system does not zero-fill the JV number to six characters (e.g., the user entered ABC2, the amendment number remains ABC2).

general:jv_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:29:34+00:00

In the JV Number field, type a journal voucher number. Click Retrieve. The journal voucher information is displayed. If the journal voucher number is not known, click Directory. The JVs directory is displayed. Type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:jv_userid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-10T21:50:50+00:00

The name of the user who created the transaction is displayed. Users are created in the Security Administration application. If a pending transaction overdraws an account, an error is generated to alert the user of the overdrawn condition for the specific account.

general:jvnumber_descroiption

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:46:22+00:00

general:jvnumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-15T15:44:44+00:00

Type an alphanumeric journal voucher number, hyphens are allowed. Leading zeros are not required. If the journal voucher number is alphanumeric, the field is not zero-filled. The field can be six characters. If Use Automatic JV Number Assignment is selected on the Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options tab, the

general:leavetypeforefmlea

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T19:57:14+00:00

The Emergency Family and Medical Leave Expansion Act (EFMLEA) has a ten-day, no-pay wait period. The ten-day, no-pay wait period is determined by adding the total number of employee leave days for the selected pay date and the number of leave days previously posted and processed by payroll. After the number of paid days is determined, the calculation uses that number multiplied by two-thirds of the employee's daily rate up to the maximum amount of $200.

general:leavetypeforepslaregularrate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T19:56:02+00:00

The Emergency Paid Sick Leave Act (EPSLA) regular rate creates transmittals based on the total number of employee leave days posted for the selected pay date multiplied by their full daily rate up to the maximum amount of $511. XTRA jobs are not considered in the calculations or distributions.

general:leavetypeforepslatwothirds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T19:56:34+00:00

The Emergency Paid Sick Leave Act (EPSLA) two-thirds rate creates transmittals based on the total number of employee leave days posted for the selected pay date multiplied by two-thirds of their daily rate up to the maximum amount of $200. XTRA jobs are not considered in the calculations or distributions.

general:links

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-27T20:00:32+00:00

E-mailType the vendor's e-mail address in order to send information to the contact person as needed. The field can be a maximum of 45 characters.E-mailClick to send an e-mail using your default e-mail client. The To: e-mail address is populated if the

general:localuse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T14:50:39+00:00

1Type any vendor information or comments. The field can be a maximum of 25 characters.2 Type any vendor information or comments. The field can be a maximum of 25 characters.

general:lockstatus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:23:46+00:00

The lock status of the account code is displayed. Y - The account code is locked. N - The account code is unlocked. Use the Mass Lock/Unlock utility to lock or unlock the selected account.

Select a report:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-05T20:35:19+00:00

This page allows you to select the report you want to generate. Select a report: All available report names are displayed on the left side of the page. The list of available reports remains displayed on the page even after you select a report name. This allows you to select another report within the selected reports menu without exiting the report page.

Select a report:

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-03T14:35:32+00:00

Generate a Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T14:04:34+00:00

Generate a Report Select a report: All available report names are displayed on the left side of the page. The list of available reports remains displayed on the page even after you select a report name. This allows you to select another report within the selected reports menu without exiting the report page.

general:mainpassword

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-26T14:33:17+00:00

Type your password. Requirements: Between 16 and 46 characters. Must include at least one of each of the following character types: * Uppercase letters (A–Z) * Lowercase letters (a–z) * Numbers (0–9) * At least one allowed special character

general:maint_pmisposition_positimodify_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T19:54:15+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete budget data related to a position record. * If the position is vacant, the budget values are used to calculate the budget requirements for the position. * If the position is for a new employee, the budget values are populated to the new employee's payroll records (e.g., job information, pay information).

general:maint_pmispositionadmin_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T15:08:37+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete budget data related to a position record. It allows you to set a base salary for which to budget when a position is vacant and sets default information for new hires. * If the position is vacant, the budget values are used to calculate the budget requirements for the position.

general:maint_pmispositionadmin_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-23T14:50:15+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates related to a position record. [PMIS Position Admin Date] Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmispositionadmin_distribution

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T21:50:22+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the positions. This tab only allows you to enter percentages. Any Position Management change prompts a salary calculation which is then distributed using the percentages. The distribution functions like the next year salary calculations.

general:maint_pmispositionadmin_positionrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T21:48:16+00:00

This tab is used to establish and maintain a position record for each position at the LEA. If using Position Management, a position record is established for each position by assigning a position number and billet number to the job. Each position should have a default record with a 0000 billet number. A default record allows you to easily create a new position record using the default record data.

general:maint_pmispositionhistory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T17:16:48+00:00

This page is used to view historical position changes. Since each change made to a position management record creates a new historical record, many records may exist for an employee. Each change in position (CIP), position maintenance, and forecast moves are displayed on this page. This information is helpful if CIP calculation results are not as expected. You can review all position history or specific billet history.

general:maint_pmispositionmodify_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T19:26:01+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a position record. Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmispositionmodify_distribution

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T17:19:20+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the positions. Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmispositionmodify_positionrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T15:52:52+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the position record for each position in the school district. Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmissuppadminbudget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:21:11+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete budget data related to a supplement position record. * If the position is vacant, the budget values are used to calculate the budget requirements for the position. * If the position is for a new employee, the budget values will be populated to the new employee's payroll records (e.g., job information, pay information).

general:maint_pmissuppadmindate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T14:04:20+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a supplement position record. [PMIS Supplement Admin Date] Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-fille…

general:maint_pmissuppadmindistribution

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T14:03:45+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the supplement positions. [PMIS Supplement Admin Distribution] Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmissuppmodifybudget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:52:11+00:00

This tab is used to modify budget data related to a supplement position record. * If the position is vacant, the budget values are used to calculate the budget requirements for the position. * If the position is for a new employee, the budget values are populated to the new employee's payroll records (e.g., job information, pay information).

general:maint_pmissuppmodifydate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:50:52+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a supplement position record. [PMIS Supplement Modify Date] Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmissuppmodifydistribution

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:49:06+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the supplement positions. [PMIS Supplement Modify Distribution] Modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:maint_pmissupppositionhistory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:58:16+00:00

This page is used to view historical records of data changed on the Maintenance > Supplement Admin or Maintenance > Supplement Modify pages. Since each change made to a supplement position management record creates a new historical record, many records may exist for an employee. Since this data serves as a historical record, the data should not be altered.

general:maint_pmissupppositionrecord_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T20:53:30+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the supplement position record for each supplement position in the LEA. [PMIS Supplement Admin Position Record] Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field…

general:maint_pmissupppositionrecord_modify

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:44:46+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the supplement position record for each supplement position in the LEA. [PMIS Supplement Modify Position Record] Modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is no…

general:maint_pmissupppositionrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T17:42:48+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the supplement position record for each supplement position in the LEA. Modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:manage_leave_pay_campuses

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T19:39:56+00:00

The employee’s pay campus must exist on the Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > Leave Campuses tab to allow the employee to access the Leave Requests page in EmployeePortal. VCV Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Pay Info * Obtain the employee pay campus data. * Optional: Obtain the

Manage roles and users

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-16T18:22:21+00:00

Manage roles and users In Security Administration, set up the necessary purchasing roles (originators, approvers, etc.). Once the purchasing roles are established, assign the roles to the appropriate users. If a component (i.e., menu item) has a subcategory that is not selected, the upper-level title is displayed in italics. For example, if Utilities has sublevels, one of which has been cleared, then Utilities is displayed in italics denoting that not everything under Utilities is selected for …

general:maskcrosswalkeditnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-02T21:56:43+00:00

The from and to account codes cannot be all Xs or all spaces. If all digits are entered in each component, the codes must exist in the code table. The account code components are checked as follows: * The class objects (first digit of the object code) must be the same (e.g., 199-XX-5XXX.XX-XXX-5XXXXX cannot be crosswalked to 199-XX-6XXX.XX-XXX-5XXXXX).

general:maskcrosswalkexample

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-02T22:57:41+00:00

Fund 211/1 was included with other funds in the Funds/Yrs to not Decrement field when the EOY Payroll Accrual, Run Calculations was performed. In the Mask Crosswalk, you have selected to change fund 211/1 to 215/1. Then, the same logic of not decrementing the fiscal year will apply to the new fund. Accrual reports reflect fund 215/1, and that fund/fiscal year will be what is posted to Finance. If a fund/fiscal year in the Mask Crosswalk was not included in funds/years to not decrement, decrement…

general:maskcrosswalkfields

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-01-13T16:58:42+00:00

From MaskType the from fiscal year code you want to crosswalk.To MaskType the to fiscal year code you want to crosswalk.

Mass delete transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T19:54:54+00:00

Mass delete transactions Bank Reconciliation > Utilities > Mass Delete Transactions [Mass Delete Transactions] This page is used to mass delete cleared and outstanding transactions. Perform a mass delete: Field Description Bank Account GrpType the bank account group code to be used. If the bank account group code is not known, click

general:massdeletezerobalancefield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T16:33:02+00:00

Select to delete the fund/year(s) with zero balance accounts that have a zero amount in the following columns: Current Year Original Current Year Amendment Current Year Actual

general:masslockaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-22T19:15:21+00:00

The 20-character account code mask is displayed. You can enter a partial mask or complete account code elements (e.g., 1XX for all 1 account codes or 199 for all 199 account codes). Use a mask with all Xs to lock or unlock all accounts.

general:massunlocklockfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T16:20:09+00:00

A message is displayed prompting you to perform a backup.

general:max_hours_worked

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-20T18:37:50+00:00

Type the actual number of hours worked in the reporting period month. The below approach allows each work day to be assigned independently of the pay dates that may contain the work day. Also, it manages the days worked if an employee has multiple jobs with different calendar codes but the same TRS position. And, the TRS adjustment days for leave docks (each TRS position code will have an entry for every dock day in the TRS adjustment days table) can easily be applied per TRS position.

general:maxdays

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T15:50:11+00:00

Type the number of contract days which relate to the correct salary on the salary table. Note: If Use PMIS is selected on the District Administration > Options > Position Management page, the Max Days field is enabled.

general:maxgrossamtfordistrict

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:10:16+00:00

Type the amount of the largest gross employee paycheck for the district. A failure message is issued when a paycheck over this amount is attempted to be processed. If the check amount is correct, reset this field by entering a larger value and recalculate to continue processing payroll.

general:membercontributionnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-05T20:56:35+00:00

Example 1: Before September 1, 2015: 08-05-2015 (90-day waiting period end date) Pay date 08-15-2015 (08-01-2015 thru 08-15-2015, TRS Month 08), the employee is subject to the 90-day surcharge. Pay date 08-31-2015 (08-16-2015 thru 08-31-2015, TRS Month 08), the employee is not subject to the 90-day surcharge.

Members Directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-22T18:23:11+00:00

Members Directory Use the following fields to perform a members search. * To search for a member, type data in one or more of the search fields. * To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. * Click Search. A list of members matching the search criteria is displayed.

Members

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-20T18:45:11+00:00

Members In the Search field, begin typing a county district number or member name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a county district number. The Members lookup closes and the selected county district number and member name are populated in the

general:midpoint_salaries_basis_salary_change

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-21T19:24:34+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following options: C - Use position hrly/dly rate - Select to calculate the percentage increase for midpoints on the actual existing rate. This option is used by LEAs that are using a midpoint schedule in place of putting employees on a salary schedule.

general:midpoint_salaries_increase_pay_rate_minimum

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-17T21:40:44+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select Yes or No to increase or not increase the pay rate to minimum for midpoint salaries. This is a required field. If Yes is selected, the pay rate is increased to the minimum amount if it is below the minimum amount, and then the pay rate raise is applied per the simulation. This ensures that employees are not paid less than the minimum.

general:midpointcalculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-23T20:13:14+00:00

The Base Annual amount is calculated as follows: Hrs/Day x # of Days Empld = Annual Hours x Midpoint = Base Annual Example: 7.5 Hrs/Day x 175 # of Days Empld = 1312.50 Annual Hours x $35.00 Midpoint = $45,937.50 Base Annual If the Pay Rate is less than

general:midpointhours

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-04-11T21:25:35+00:00

Type the number of hours authorized for this pay grade. When pay types 1, 2, and 4 are calculated as daily rates, the Hours field is left blank. When pay type 3 is calculated as an hourly pay rate, the Hours field requires a value. Note: If there is data in the

general:minimumgrosssalary

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:30:00+00:00

Type the maximum amount of an employee salary on which unemployment is calculated. If no maximum is assigned, type 9,999,999.99. If the field is left blank, the system considers the maximum salary to be 0,000,000.00. Since this value is reached before the first paycheck is issued, the unemployment is not calculated.

general:modify_pmis_position

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-05T18:58:03+00:00

Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify > Position Record If necessary, update the Increase Eligible field to identify the employees who are eligible to receive a salary increase for the new school year when running simulations. Only the employees with this field selected will receive a salary increase.

Modify a requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T19:37:30+00:00

Modify a requisition Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition Use this page to modify saved requisitions (i.e., requisitions that have not been submitted). VCV Retrieve the requisition to be modified. * Add items, delete items, change account codes, change vendor, or change requestors.

general:modify_rp_record

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:13:42+00:00

VCV Click [Spyglass Icon] to view the record details. The corresponding maintenance pop-up window opens with the record details. * Make the necessary changes and click Save. * Click Close to close the pop-up window. VCV Click [Trashcan Icon] to delete a record. A warning message informing you that the selected record type will be deleted is displayed.

general:move_current_to_new

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-31T15:47:38+00:00

VCV Click Execute to move or copy the fund to the new file ID. * If the fund being moved exists in the Pay Distribution table or has a grant code in the Fund to Grant Code table, a Move Current to New File ID Error Report is displayed with the applicable error messages. The fund cannot be moved until those messages are cleared.

general:movebudtofinprocess

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-03T15:28:04+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that the export process completed successfully. Click OK. Notes: * The selected budget accounts are processed into Finance. * When data from the Budget application is moved to the Finance application, the following occurs:

general:moveforecasttocurrenterrors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-26T15:23:44+00:00

Error MessageDescriptionWarning: The employee has Contract Balance amounts not equal to zero for current jobs. The employee has not been paid off by payroll.Failure: Position Accept Changes Flag set to Y The position will not be moved to the current/payroll.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-16T16:37:26+00:00

Verify that the fiscal year for each account code is accurate. The account codes are validated against the budget, so if any of the displayed fiscal years are less than 9, it is necessary to generate a user-created report to identify and manually update the positions.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-05T22:38:20+00:00

Log on to the next year pay frequency. Position Management > Reports > User Created Reports > PMIS Report It is recommended that you review the Increase Eligible and Nbr Remain Payments fields for accuracy prior to calculating salaries for 10-month employees. The Increase Eligible field determines whether or not the employee will receive an increase for the next school year.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-16T21:07:22+00:00

Log on to the next year payroll frequency. Human Resources > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify Verify retiree information. If you have retirees that work for the district, confirm the TRS Status on the Budget tab is set to Retired. Failure to verify this information could cause the employee to come across to CY Payroll as TRS Eligible.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:30:47+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Reports > User Created Reports Generate a user-created report to identify the employees who begin their new contract in August. It is possible that the employees are inactive in the current year, be sure that the Active Employees Only field is not selected.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T15:09:29+00:00

Log on to the next year. Prior to setting up and performing salary simulations, review the Position Management: Salary Simulations Overview document for a description of the Salary Simulation pages and samples of the available simulation reports. Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options [PMIS Salary Simulation] VCV Complete the following: * (Recommended

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step8

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-02-08T21:48:18+00:00

* Ensure that the August payroll is processed. * Run the Regular Payroll (RP) extract with the Child Nutrition values (if applicable) and interface to Finance in order to run the TRS On-Behalf process and continue the end-of-year process in Finance.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step9

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:51:03+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Move Forecast to NY Payroll If your LEA uses ASCENDER Grade Reporting and/or accrues, 10-month employees may need to be moved to next year payroll. [PMIS Move Forecast To NY Payroll For 10 Month Employees] VCV Complete the following: * In the Select Pay Frequency field, select the frequency that represents the LEA's next year payroll.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step10

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T14:49:58+00:00

Skip this step if your LEA does not accrue in ASCENDER. After completing the August Accruals process and interfacing to Finance, ensure that there are no changes to the employee’s distribution accounts until the August accruals are posted to the payroll history as part of the end-of-year process (

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step11

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T14:39:24+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Reports > User Created Reports > CYR/NYR Positions [PMIS User Created Report] Generate a user-created report to identify employees who have a 9/1 or later start date. Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify > Position Record Retrieve each employee. For TRS purposes, select the Accept Changes field to avoid moving the employees to the current year payroll.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step12

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T13:54:11+00:00

Log on to the next year. Payroll > Next Year > Copy NYR Tables to CYR > Copy Next Year Tables [Copy Next Year Tables to CYR] VCV In the School Calendar field, select only the 10-month employee calendars. TIP: The calendar code is displayed in the first pay date code on the simulation (e.g., J40 includes calendar code 40 VCV Click Execute.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step13

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-31T21:11:54+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Reports > User Created Reports VCV Generate a user-created report with the Hrs Per Day, Wkly Hrs Sched, and Payoff Date fields selected. These fields are overwritten when positions are moved from the next year to the current year. [Payroll User Created Report] VCV Identify the employees who have an August payoff date, and then use the Mass Update utility to update the fields after all positions are moved from the next year to the current year.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step14

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-21T21:52:57+00:00

(If applicable.) Move employees to next year payroll.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step15

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-22T19:00:43+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Move Forecast to CYR Position and Payroll This process is used to move payroll and position forecast records to the current year PMIS with the same information that is set up in the next year PMIS records. It also updates fields on the following Maintenance tabs: Employment Info, Pay Info, Job Info, Distribution

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step16

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:29:37+00:00

Log on to the current year. Verify the current year data to confirm that the salaries are correct. The highlighted fields are updated: [Pay Info Tab With Extra Duty Pay] [Job Info Tab] [Distributions Tab]

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step17

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T14:25:29+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update > Employee Skip this step if your LEA has a 7/1 fiscal year. Mass update the fiscal year to the next school year for all employees. Select Fiscal Year and type the next year fiscal year. Before processing, stop to consider if the LEA uses other fiscal years in the account codes for employees. If the entered year is not the only used fiscal year, additional parameters may need to be selected.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step19

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:35:37+00:00

Payroll > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS6000 - Account Code Comparison This report compares the account code on the employee’s master distribution record and compares it to the Chart of Accounts in Finance file ID C. Complete the following parameters. [HRS6000 Parameters For 10 Month Employee] [HRS6000 Payroll Account Code Comparison Report] If your LEA has multiple pay frequencies, generate the report for each frequency. The generated report should be blank. If any account c…

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step20

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:27:54+00:00

Payroll > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS6050 - Contract Balance Variance Report This report looks at the pay rate for each employee and multiplies it by the number of remaining payments, and compares that amount to the Contract Balance on the Job Info tab. If there is a variance of more than a few pennies, perform manual calculations to determine if any corrections are needed.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step21

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:28:14+00:00

Log on to the current year. Use the Staff Job/Pay Data pages to enter new hire data. The HRS1550 - New Hire Report is helpful to identify these employees. When new hires are entered in the next year Position Management and moved to the current year payroll, only the fields related to the position are populated.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step22

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:49:05+00:00

Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Extract Process and submit all of the TRS extracts. Do not interface when processing the Regular Payroll (RP) extract.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step23

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-15T21:01:04+00:00

Submit TRS records/files.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step24

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:49:57+00:00

Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify > Position Record After all of the August TRS reports are in a completed status, clear the Accept Changes field in the next year PMIS for employees with a September start date.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step25

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-31T16:38:32+00:00

Move the TRS calendar and any calendars that pertain to employees with a 9/1 or later start date.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step26

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:56:19+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Move Forecast to CYR Position and Payroll Move employees with a 9/1 start date or later to the current year payroll. You can individually select employees. It is important to select ALL Position/Billets and Supplement Positions/Billets for the employee. [Move Forecast to Current Year Position And Payroll For 10 Month Employee]

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step27

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-31T16:39:46+00:00

If there were any adjustments to TRS contributions: * For LEAs with a 9/1 fiscal year, enter the necessary journal entries for the month of August in the prior year file ID. * For LEAs with a 7/1 fiscal year, enter the necessary journal entries for the month of August in the current year file ID.

general:moving_10month_employees_cyr_payroll_step28

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T16:56:40+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Payroll Processing > Run Payroll Run payroll calculations to verify any errors.

general:moving_10mosalarysimulationstep5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T20:41:01+00:00

general:moving_11month_confirmcyrsalaries

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:23:21+00:00

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-16T20:23:58+00:00

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T20:40:36+00:00

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step9

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-16T22:03:34+00:00

Log on to the next year. Position Management > Utilities > Move Forecast to NY Payroll If your LEA uses ASCENDER Grade Reporting and/or accrues, 11-month employees may need to be moved to next year payroll. [PMIS Move Forecast To NY Payroll For 11 Month Employees] VCV Complete the following: * In the Select Pay Frequency field, select the frequency that represents the LEA's next year payroll.

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step12

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T14:19:06+00:00

Log on to the next year. Payroll > Next Year > Copy NYR Tables to CYR > Copy Next Year Tables [Copy Next Year Tables to CYR] VCV In the School Calendar field, select only the 11-month employee calendars. TIP: The calendar code is displayed in the first pay date code on the simulation (e.g., J40 includes calendar code 40 VCV Click Execute.

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step13

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T21:04:53+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Reports > User Created Reports Generate a user-created report with the Hrs Per Day field selected. This field is overwritten when positions are moved from the next year to the current year.

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step15

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T16:17:15+00:00

general:moving_11month_employees_cyr_payroll_step19

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T17:27:24+00:00

Payroll > Reports > Payroll Information Reports > HRS6000 - Account Code Comparison This report compares the account code on the employee’s master distribution record and compares it to the Chart of Accounts in Finance file ID C. VCV Complete the following parameters: [HRS6000 Parameters For 11 Month Employee] If the LEA has multiple pay frequencies, generate the report for each frequency. The generated report should be blank. If any account codes are listed, determine if the account code…

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-14T13:33:45+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Reports > User Created Reports Generate a user-created report to identify the employees who begin their new contract in July. It is possible that the employees are inactive in the current year, be sure that the Active Employees Only field is not selected.

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T20:39:50+00:00

Log on to the next year. Prior to setting up and performing salary simulations, review the Position Management: Salary Simulations Overview guide for a description of the Salary Simulation pages and samples of the available simulation reports. Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options [PMIS Salary Simulation] VCV Complete the following: * (Recommended

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step12

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-17T20:15:01+00:00

Log on to the next year. Payroll > Next Year > Copy Next Year Tables [Copy Next Year Tables to CYR] VCV In the School Calendar field, select only the 12-month employee calendars. TIP: The calendar code is displayed in the first pay date code on the simulation (e.g., J40 includes calendar code 40). VCV Click Execute

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step15

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:09:53+00:00

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step16

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:17:16+00:00

Log on to the current year. Verify the current year data to confirm that the salaries are correct. The following fields are updated: [Employment Info Tab] [Pay Info Tab With Extra Duty Pay] [Job Info Tab] [Distributions Tab]

general:moving_12month_employees_cyr_payroll_step17

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:21:37+00:00

Log on to the current year. Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update > Employee Skip this step if your LEA has a 7/1 fiscal year. Mass update the fiscal year to the current school year for all employees. Select Fiscal Year and type the current year fiscal year. Before processing, stop to consider if the LEA uses other fiscal years in the account codes for employees. If the entered year is not the only used fiscal year, additional parameters may need to be selected.

Create and maintain user accounts in MemberPortal

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-21T14:58:21+00:00

Create and maintain user accounts in MemberPortal MemberPortal > Manage Users Once a user has a MemberPortal account, a fiscal agent has the ability to assign admin permissions to the user on the Grants and Projects > Tables > Manage Users page. This allows the MemberPortal admin user to manage user accounts and access for their users.

general:nbrofexemptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-07T20:50:18+00:00

This field was disabled as of 12/31/2019. Type a two-digit number of exemptions claimed by the employee for federal income tax withholding. If 99 is entered, no tax is calculated; however, withholding gross is accumulated. Click Save to save the data. If a change to the

general:new_file_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-01T20:52:12+00:00

Click [Drop Down Arrow] to select the one-character file ID. This field represents the file ID to which you can move or copy funds.

New Employee Document Checklist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T18:20:42+00:00

New Employee Document Checklist Review the following information to identify the needed documents before and upon hiring a new employee. This checklist serves only as a reference since document requirements can vary based on the LEA. It is important

general:nextavailableemployeenumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:10:37+00:00

The number displayed is the last number used plus 1. Click Next Available Employee Number. The system displays the next available employee number. If the Auto Assign Employee Number field is not selected, the Employee Number field is active. Select the field to highlight it and type a new next number for manual employee number assignment.

general:nextlinecampusid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:36:11+00:00

Begin typing the campus ID. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a campus ID. The Campus Name field is populated with the corresponding campus name. * Multiple departments per campus ID are allowed. *

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_accrualcalendar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-03-18T13:25:08+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Accrual Calendars > Accrual Calendar Create accrual calendars as needed. Review codes in the current pay frequency to ensure you are duplicating dates and days to the correct group. BBB Most districts only accrue 10-month employees. If that is true for you, each code should begin with August 31 and show the number of days that group of employees will work in August. Add 12 more lines and enter the true/regular Pay Dates. Enter the days employees work in the month asso…

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdate_jobinfodistrib

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-02T18:06:03+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info and Distributions Manually add or update salary information for those employees not tied to salary tables. For example, most often, administrators such as the Superintendent or Principal. BBB Manually enter an estimated annual salary amount for pay type 3 (Hourly) employees in order to budget for these employees.

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdate_salaries

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-16T16:41:27+00:00

Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR Update the next year salary tables to reflect any changes to the salary schedules (anticipated or known). BBB Local Annual - This tab is the most commonly used. You can make mass updates by percent or dollar amount, or by employee. To see a change before saving the record, enter the change and click

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdatetab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-16T16:04:44+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update Consider making updates using the following tabs: Deductions - Most updates to deductions will come from the TPA; however, you can mass update deduction information for those deductions administered here. Examples of this may include ATPE. The report previews will display confirmation that only employees with the selected deduction listed on their individual Deduction record will be affected. You can add, remove, or edit existing deductions. If you are not u…

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_taxtables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-03-08T20:24:26+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Tax/Deductions Update the following tabs as needed. BBB FICA Tax - This tab is used to copy rates from the current calendar year to next calendar year. BBB Unemployment - This tab can be updated as applicable to your LEA. Some LEA's budget by selecting

general:nextyearpayrollprocess_workdaycalendars

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-16T16:35:43+00:00

Personnel > Tables > Workday Calendars Create calendars. BBB Calendars tied to a numeric frequency (e.g., 6) are used for current year. BBB Calendars tied to an alpha frequency (e.g., F) are used for next year. Use the spyglass to create or edit calendars as needed. BBB You can copy calendars that begin in the same month.

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T15:57:45+00:00

1. Use the following Budget pages to begin managing next year Purchasing: * Budget > Utilities > Copy Current to New File ID * Budget > Utilities > Reinitialize Budget Data * Budget > Utilities > Mass Change Account Codes > Fund/Year * Budget > Utilities > Mass Change Account Codes > Mask Crosswalk * Budget > Utilities > Delete by File ID * Budget > Utilities > Clear/Move NYR Requisitions to CYR

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T15:58:01+00:00

2. In District Administration, visit the following pages: * District Administration > Utilities > Mass Update User Accounts By Fund * District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse > Next Year * District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Accounts

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T16:31:48+00:00

4. In Purchasing, visit the following pages: * Purchasing > Next Year > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition * Purchasing > Next Year > Maintenance > Approve Requisition * Purchasing > Next Year > Maintenance > Reverse Purchase Order * Purchasing > Next Year > Maintenance > Requisition Status Inquiry

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step3a

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T16:48:24+00:00

3. On the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options page: Under Purchasing Options, review the following fields and update as needed. * Use Automatic NYR PO Number Assignment * Use Automatic NYR Requisition Number Assignment

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T16:31:58+00:00

5. Finance > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Clear/Move NYR Requisitions to CYR OR Budget > Utilities > Clear/Move NYR Requisitions to CYR

general:nextyearpurchasing_checklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-24T16:32:08+00:00

6. Print the following reports to verify information: Finance * Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > FIN1400 - Detail General Ledger * Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > FIN1600 - Batch Process Balance Error Listing * Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Vendor/Purchase Order Reports > FIN2150 - Outstanding Purchase Orders Purchasing Note: The following reports include a Next Year option. * Purchasing > Re…

general:nontrspaymentmatrix

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-30T22:55:21+00:00

Non TRS PaymentsBus Reimbr Paid (Excess-Taxable)Bus Reimbr Paid (Base-Non-Taxable)Bus Allow Paid, TaxableBus Allow Paid, Non-TaxableBus Allow Non-Paid, TaxableBus Allow Non-Paid, Non-TaxableSpecial Suppl TaxablePayment Type1-Pay-Taxable ***1-Pay-Non-Tax

general:note_button

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:01:31+00:00

Click to add or read a note for the amendment. An amendment notes pop-up window opens. The text is in the standard font if there are no amendment notes entered. If there is a paper clip next to the button, an amendment note exists. In the amendment notes pop-up, type comments, additional justification, or instructions about the amendment transaction.

general:notestatus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:24:01+00:00

The note status of the account code is displayed. Y - Comments exist. N - No comments exist.

general:numberofdays

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-08T02:25:16+00:00

This field displays a value based on the following: If the TRS Member Pos field is 01, the # of Days field is populated with the # of Days Empld. If the TRS Member Pos field is 02 or 05 and the # of Days Empld field is greater than or equal to the

general:numberofdayspriortopaydatethatearningsareviewable

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T14:54:45+00:00

Type a three-digit maximum number to indicate the number of days prior to a pay date to display the earnings information on the Earnings page in EmployeePortal. By default, the field is set to 0. If the field is set to 0, the employee can view unlimited earnings information as soon as the earnings are posted.

general:numberofdirectdepositaccountsallowed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-20T19:54:50+00:00

Type a two-digit maximum number to indicate the number of direct deposit accounts allowed by the district. These accounts will be displayed in EmployeePortal. By default, the Number of Direct Deposit Accounts Are Allowed field is set to 0. If the

general:numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T15:54:06+00:00

PhoneType the phone number in the standard format of (000) 000-0000. A six-digit extension is also allowed.FaxType the fax number in the standard format of (000) 000-0000. A six-digit extension is also allowed.

general:ny_ersretireehealthelig

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-16T16:23:25+00:00

Select if the employee is an Employment Retirement System of Texas (ERS) retiree, and is eligible to receive health coverage for the next year through ERS.

general:nypayrollprereqs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-02-26T17:50:57+00:00

Gather Beneficial Data: This section is strictly for informational purposes. Before performing the next year payroll process, review the following tables and gather the data that will be beneficial while you are updating this information for the new school year.

general:nypayrollprocess_teaminformation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-06T16:07:18+00:00

TRS Reporting Requirements * ALL employees are reported. * Retired employees are only reported on the ER record. * A contract Begin and End Date is required for ALL employees. Required Information ASCENDER Business Page The FTE Hours (full-time equivalent) is required for the ED record if 30 hours or more.

general:nypayrollthingstoremember

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-02T18:37:22+00:00

VCV Ensure open communication exists between the payroll office and business office. * Verify that the Budget process is complete and the budget is open. * Set potential deadlines for various presentations. VCV Verify that you are logged on to the current pay frequency.

general:nypayrollthingstoremember2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-26T15:45:43+00:00

The following pages are shared between the current year and next year. Use Caution when updating these pages in the next year: * Personnel or Payroll > Tables > District HR Options * Personnel > Tables > Credential * Payroll > Tables > Tax/Deductions

general:objectcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-27T20:08:38+00:00

Enter an object code using either of the following: Type the four-digit object code, if known. Click [Ellipsis Icon] to open the Objects directory. For non-charter schools, object codes that begin with 2, 6, or 8 (2XXX, 6XXX, and 8XXX) can be used in the table.

general:objectdescription

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-02T15:56:10+00:00

VCV Under Object Description, select one of the following: Existing Code Description from Budget Select to retrieve the existing code element description from the current budget. New Object Description from Object TableSelect to replace the current description from the budget with the object code description in the account code table.

general:occupant_history

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-30T17:02:42+00:00

Employee NbrType the employee number of the employee in the position, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select from a list.Employee NamePopulated based on the selected Employee Nbr and is display only.Primary JobSelect if this is the employee's primary job. An employee may only have one primary job.

general:occupant_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-08T19:42:25+00:00

* Employee Nbr * Employee Name * Primary Job * Increase Eligible * Pay Grade * Pay Step * Schedule * State Step * Begin Date * End Date * Payoff Date * Days Off * Nbr Days Employed * Hourly/Daily Rate * Salary * Remaining Payments

general:occupant_modify

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-31T20:32:02+00:00

general:occupant_supplement_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-10T20:58:35+00:00

Employee NbrType the employee number, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select one from the list.Employee NamePopulated based on the selected Employee Nbr.RecalculateSelect to recalculate the supplemental pay amount during the forecast processing.AmountType the supplement amount.

general:occupant_supplement_history

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-03-29T16:27:43+00:00

Emp NbrType the employee number, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select an employee from the Employees list.Emp NameType the employee name.AmountType the supplement amount.Remaining PaymentsType the number of payments remaining to be made to the employee during the current contract period. This is a required field.

general:occupant_supplement_modify

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-08T19:17:51+00:00

general:occupant

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-03T20:25:07+00:00

general:offerofcoverage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-31T19:38:09+00:00

Make the necessary selections: If the employee received the same offer for the entire calendar year (January-December), in the All field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the received offer of coverage. 1A - Qualifying Offer 1B - Offer to employee only 1C - Offer to employee and dependents

Online Help

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-09T22:10:28+00:00

Online Help Access the ASCENDER online Help by clicking the Help button in the lower-right corner of the page. [Online Help Button] The Help topic is specific to the application page. You can browse other Help topics from the Help window. Online Help is available for all applications and is page sensitive. Additionally, you can access a variety of process-specific guides and checklists in the Online Help.

general:order_address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-06T15:48:29+00:00

Address Line 1Type the vendor point of contact or other address information.Street Nbr/NameType the vendor's mailing or physical address. Use the apartment abbreviation (APT) or the suite abbreviation (STE) and number, if known.City/StateType the name of the city where the vendor's address is located. Click

general:original_employdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-26T19:55:33+00:00

Type the original date on which the individual was employed by the LEA in the MM-DD-YYYY format. This date does not change if the employee left the LEA and then returned. This field is required to extract the employee for State Reporting. Note: Employees are only included in the Instructor directory in Grade Reporting if they have an

general:orignatorstatuscode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-05T20:45:09+00:00

Type the one-digit code used to identify the originator of the EFT tape. Valid codes for this field include the following: 1 - Originator is an ACH association member or originating DFI, subject to ACH rules 2 - Originator is a federal government entity or agency not subject to ACH rules

general:otherhelpfulbudgetresources

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T15:42:13+00:00

Review the following reports: Budget > Reports > Budget Reports [Budget Reports Page] ---------- Budget > Reports > Board Reports [Board Reports Page] ---------- Budget > Utilities > Mass Delete Zero Balance Accounts Accounts with a zero amount in the Current Year Original, Current Year Amendment, and Current Year Actual columns are deleted. [Mass Delete Zero Balance Accounts Page] [Delete Zero Balance Accounts Report] ---------- Budget > Utilities > Mass Lock/Unlock Funds Lock or …

general:overpayment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T21:22:40+00:00

VCV Click Apply Overpayment to disburse the indicated amount(s) to the outstanding invoice(s). The payment amount will be applied to the outstanding amount of the invoice. If the available overpayment amount is depleted, the overpaid invoice is no longer displayed in the top grid or on the Utilities > Print Overpayment Refunds page.

general:override

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-01T14:42:50+00:00

Select to allow the user to create an encumbrance that is greater than the budget amount for the account code when creating or submitting a requisition. It is important to note that the override capability is tied to the requestor (not the originator) on the

general:parameters

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:43:15+00:00

Field DescriptionPay StatusSelect whether active, inactive, or both groups are to be included in the process.Pay TypeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-digit pay type to be included in the process. The system is set to All.Job CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the four-digit job code to be included in the process. The system is set to All.

general:password_restrictions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:42:34+00:00

Passwords can be a minimum of one character and a maximum of 16 characters. The following special characters are not allowed: #, %, &

general:password

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-24T12:54:57+00:00

Type a password to encrypt the signature file. This password is required for decryption each time you select and use the signature in an application. If you upload a signature file that was previously password encrypted, a pop-up window is displayed prompting you for that password.

general:pay_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T15:51:45+00:00

PEIMS Reporting Element Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-digit code that best describes how the employee’s pay is calculated by the system. If this field is set to pay type 3, the Pay Rate field is required. This is a required field. Pay type 1 employees are generally those employees that are under contract such as superintendents, principals, instructors, etc. (exempt employees under FLSA) whose pay rate remains constant over the course of their contract.

general:paydate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-13T17:08:15+00:00

Pay DateClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a specific pay date with unprocessed leave transactions, and the leave transactions for this pay date are automatically retrieved into the detail grid. You do not need to click Retrieve to view unprocessed leave for the pay date selected. Simply highlight the leave type in the upper grid, and any leave posted to the selected leave type is displayed. If you click

general:paydatesinterfacefield

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-17T15:12:46+00:00

This field is automatically populated. This field indicates if the payroll has been run, posted, and interfaced to Finance. N - If there is no date in the Date Pay Run field, this indicates that payroll has not been posted to the payroll master file.

Payroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-17T15:29:02+00:00

Payroll VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) New Employee Setup VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) August Accruals * Accrual Overview VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) End-of-Year Accruals for June Year-End LEAs VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) End-of-Year Payroll Verification VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) First Payroll of the School Year (July Start LEAs) VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) First Payroll of the School Year (September Start LEAs) VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) Next Year Payroll Process * (CRT) Next Year Payroll Process Quick Checklist VCV ASCENDER - …

general:payroll_history_errors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:15:21+00:00

general:payroll_reminders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-18T17:19:31+00:00

* Verify that the prior month Payroll General Journal was interfaced to Finance, the TRS interface was completed, and that all necessary wire transfers and fund transfers were completed. * Verify that TexNet is posted in ASCENDER. * Report new hires to the

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step1

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T18:26:34+00:00

1. Payroll > Tables > Pay Dates Add a new pay date for the supplemental payroll.

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T19:44:51+00:00

2. Create hours/pay transmittals. The Hours/Pay Transmittals tabs are used to create supplemental transactions. The following Hours/Pay Transmittals tabs are used to create these adjustments. VCV Extra Duties - This tab is used for creating transmittals for extra duties that employees are assigned and for tracking pay associated with these assignments.

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T20:07:34+00:00

3. Payroll > Payroll Processing > Run Payroll Run a supplemental payroll. Only pay dates that have not been processed and posted can be run from this page. Notes: A payroll date must be set up in the Pay Dates table prior to processing a payroll. At any time prior to posting, you may click

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T16:48:16+00:00

4. Verify reports. Review all payroll reports selected above to ensure accuracy of data.

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T19:49:03+00:00

5. Payroll > Payroll Processing > Interface Processing > Interface to Finance Interface supplemental payroll to Finance. The interface process consists of two separate processes. VCV Create a General Journal: Before the supplemental pay information can be posted to Finance, you must create the general journal. This generates all of the transactions that will be posted to Finance. The program excludes X-type records. You specify the accounting period to which you want to post the payroll tr…

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step6

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T19:47:44+00:00

6. Payroll > Tables > Pay Dates BBB Y - Indicates payroll has been run and interfaced. BBB P - Indicates payroll has been run and posted to the master but not interfaced. BBB N - Indicates payroll has not yet been run.

general:payroll_supplementalpayrollchecklist_step7

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-02T18:57:26+00:00

7. Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > General Journal Run and review this report after running the supplemental payroll process.

general:payroll_transmittal_file_record_layout

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-09T14:56:01+00:00

This is the format for the employee hours file that contains data exported from the LEA's time clock system. ASCENDER will read this text file and create the corresponding payroll transmittal records that are used during payroll processing. Each record in this text file can contain three types of information (regular hours, overtime, and supplemental), and each type results in different transmittal records being created in ASCENDER. Each record in the text file can contain more than one type …

general:payroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-01T22:13:28+00:00

Payroll 4, 5, 6Type the first pay date for each of the three pay frequency fields in the MM-DD-YYYY format. Once the pay date is entered, it should not be changed until the next school year. The date entered should represent a payroll that will actually be processed, supplemental or regular. If a date is entered and no payroll is actually posted using that date, the system will have difficulty identifying when the new school year began. This could affect how data is handled in the new school yea…

Submit tax payments and post payments in ASCENDER

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-19T20:17:41+00:00

Submit tax payments and post payments in ASCENDER Payroll > Reports > Payroll Reports > HRS2200 - Payroll Earnings Register VCV Refer to the payroll general journal fund (863/163) for tax amounts or print the Payroll Earnings Register to obtain the total amount of taxes for Withholding, Social Security (FICA), and Medicare. The total should match the total from the Payroll General Journal.

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_adjustmentdaysbody

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T14:51:00+00:00

VCV Under Extract: Field Description Report Date (MM-YYYY)Type the reporting month and year for the report. VCV Click Execute. The Extract TRS Adjustment Days - Processing Report is displayed. Review the report.

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_adjustmentdaysbody2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T14:52:32+00:00

VCV Click Process to process the records. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successful. Or, click Cancel to return to the Adjustment Days tab. VCV Under Maintenance: EmployeeType the employee number or employee last name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the employee name to be retrieved.

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_adjustmentdaysbody3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T19:40:05+00:00

VCV Click Retrieve. The employee's existing adjustment day records are displayed; processed records cannot be changed. VCV Click +Add to add a row. TypeClick [Drop Down Arrow] to select one of the following record types for the record. BBB RP - Regular Payroll BBB

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_adjustmentdaysintro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T14:27:35+00:00

This tab is used to add, edit, and delete adjustment days for TRS reporting. The Extract function on this tab is used to extract the available days worked from the TRS calendar and from any leave docks that were processed through the payroll leave transmittals process for leave types with

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_adjustmentdaysotherfunctions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T14:12:29+00:00

Other functions and features: Retrieve The Retrieve button is also used to retrieve information from the last save. If you click Retrieve, any unsaved changes are lost. ErrorsThe Errors button is displayed at the top of the page if any errors are encountered. In addition, the tab name is displayed in red to indicate the tab on which the error occurred, and a TRS Processing pop-up window is displayed with a list of the encountered error(s).

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_body3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T16:02:52+00:00

If the TRS Position Code is 03, 04, 06, or 07, the Annual State Minimum Salary, Period State Minimum Salary, State Basic Days, and Wholly Sep Amount This Pay Period fields are disabled and cannot be changed.

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_body5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T16:05:43+00:00

* Freq * Pay Date * Adj Nbr * Extra Duty Code * Account Code * Amount The Exp 373 check box can be changed if the extra duty pay was from a transmittal without an applied extra duty code. VCV Click Save. Use the Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Extract tab to recreate the TRS processing reports.

general:payrollprocessing_trsprocessing_extract_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:11:44+00:00

Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Extract This tab is used to extract the following TRS reporting data. All six extracts (ED20, ED40, ER20, RP20, Adjustment Days to RP25, and Adjustment Days to ER27) can be run simultaneously while you perform other system tasks. You can extract per frequency or for all frequencies.

general:paytype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:24:44+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the one-digit code that best describes how the employee’s pay is calculated by the system. Pay type 1 employees are generally those employees that are under contract such as superintendents, principals, teachers, etc. (exempt employees under FLSA) whose pay rate remains constant during the course of their contract.

general:paytype1reportactualorscheduledhours

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-10-10T20:49:12+00:00

This field applies to the RP20 extract. Select A - Actual Hours to report actual hours worked for a pay type 1 job. Review the Use Pay Dates for TRS Month or Actual Date field selection to determine how the records are selected from the actual hours worked table.

general:paytype2reportactualorscheduledhours

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-10-10T20:51:20+00:00

This field applies to the RP20 extract. Select A - Actual Hours to report actual hours worked for a pay type 2 job. Review the Use Pay Dates for TRS Month or Actual Date field selection to determine how the records are selected from the actual hours worked table.

general:paytype3reportactualorscheduledhours

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-10-10T20:51:35+00:00

This field applies to the RP20 extract. Select A - Actual Hours to report actual hours worked for a pay type 3 job. Review the Use Pay Dates for TRS Month or Actual Date field selection to determine how the records are selected from the actual hours worked table.

general:peimsauxiliaryroleid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-01-07T19:15:05+00:00

Auxiliary Role IDClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the employee's auxiliary role ID, which indicates the capacity in which a non-exempt auxiliary employee serves. This must be reported for all employees who serve in a non-professional or non-paraprofessional role. Employees reported with an Auxiliary Role ID are reported with the base pay associated with object code 6129.

general:peimsparaprofessionalcert

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-07T16:39:31+00:00

Para CertSelect to indicate that the paraprofessional employee is certified. This field must be selected if the responsibility is 033 - Educational Aide and the population served is 06 - Special Education students.Begin DateType the effective date of the employee's paraprofessional certification in the MM-DD-YYYY format, or select a date from the calendar. This date is required if the

general:peimspkteacherrequirement

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:40:55+00:00

Indicates if a particular teaching specialization code is associated with required additional qualifications for the High Quality Prekindergarten grant. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the additional qualifications found in the PKTeacherRequirement descriptor table (C207).

general:percent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T16:39:55+00:00

Type what percentage of the total pay rate is represented by the amount indicated. The percentage is the portion of contract total from the Job Info tab. If the Distributions Built By Amt or % field on the District HR Options page is set to Amount, then only the

Perform an inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-08-11T15:46:20+00:00

Perform an inquiry Bank Reconciliation > Inquiry > Bank Transactions Status Inquiry [Bank Reconciliation Inquiry] This page is used to perform a status inquiry on cash receipts, checks, and journal vouchers. Perform an inquiry: VCV Retrieve bank transactions using one or more of the following search parameters: Notes: * At least one search parameter must be entered.

Process an auto bank reconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T19:22:48+00:00

Process an auto bank reconciliation Bank Reconciliation > Utilities > Auto Bank Reconciliation [Auto Bank Reconciliation] This tab is used to import a bank file with bank transactions. Once the bank transactions are imported, they are saved as pending. Auto Bank Reconciliation file layout Import bank transactions for auto bank reconciliation: Field

general:personnel_employee_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:36:37+00:00

Personnel

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-09-27T17:35:39+00:00

Personnel VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) New Employee Setup VCV ASCENDER - Assign a TSDS Unique ID VCV ASCENDER - Process 1095 Forms VCV ASCENDER - Create Service Records VCV Responsibilities - Quick Reference Chart VCV Federal EEOC Report Overview

general:personnel_localannualintro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-21T16:08:24+00:00

This tab is used to automatically reference the correct annual salary for employees, based on their pay grade, pay step, max days employed, and local schedule code. This table could be used for creation of salaries for those employees, such as teaching staff, whose pay is based on an annual amount with step increases for years of service.

general:personnel_retrieveemployeedemo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-01T17:34:36+00:00

Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve. Or, click Directory to perform a search in the Employees Directory. Note: The employee autosuggest field includes employees whose records were created in Personnel but do not have a Pay Info or Job Info record.

general:pmis_backup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-14T21:08:28+00:00

A backup is highly recommended. Click Yes to create an export. Otherwise, click No to not create the export and continue with the process. Type a password for the archive, and then click Continue. An export spinning wheel is displayed indicating the progress of the export process.

general:pmis_clear_copy_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-03T21:04:49+00:00

Log on to the current year pay frequency. CAUTION: Before moving forward, keep in mind that this step clears all manual changes that were made to next year salary tables. Perform the following two processes: Payroll > Next Year > Copy CYR Tables to NYR > Clear Next Year Tables

general:pmis_district_admin_action_first_pay_date_conversion

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-07T20:01:39+00:00

District Administration > Tables > PMIS > First Pay Date Forecast Conversion This page is used to change a start date code to another for forecast conversion, and should only be used if you need to transfer all positions from one First Pay Date Code to a different First Pay Date Code. All positions tied to the From Start Code

general:pmis_district_admin_action_inactivate_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:54:04+00:00

District Administration > Tables > PMIS > Inactivate Reason This page is used to create and maintain a list of inactive reason codes to be used for Position Management. When a position is changed to inactive status, you are prompted to enter a reason, which is saved in the historical records. [District Administration PMIS Inactivate Reason Page]

general:pmis_district_admin_action_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:53:45+00:00

District Administration > Tables > PMIS > Action Reason This page is used to create and maintain a list of action reason codes to be used for Position Management. An action code is required when a change is made to a position record that creates a historical record. Action Codes for termination transactions can be cross-referenced with the Termination Reason Codes on the

general:pmis_district_admin_categories

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:50:52+00:00

District Administration > Tables > PMIS > Category This step is optional. This page is used to create and maintain a list of LEA-defined category codes to be used for Position Management. The category codes can be assigned to positions to allow for easier inquiries. There are no calculations done based on the category. The codes are strictly for Position Management and do not impact any other system. Categories can be used in User Created Reports; however, they are not available in any other r…

general:pmis_district_admin_setup_first_pay_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:53:03+00:00

Use the following pages to establish the current and next year first pay dates and codes. District Administration > Tables > PMIS > First Pay Date > Current Year This tab is used to create and maintain a list of codes associated with current year pay dates to be used for Position Management. The codes are used: *

general:pmis_district_admin_setup_forecast_conversion_existingusers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-03T21:51:42+00:00

Prior to completing this step, the calendars and pay dates must exist in the next year payroll files. District Administration > Tables > PMIS > Forecast Conversion This page is used to create forecast data for the next year's records. This table maintains the data conversion information by the First Pay Date Code

general:pmis_district_admin_setup_forecast_conversion

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T19:05:54+00:00

general:pmis_district_admin_setup_pmis_options_existing_users

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-28T15:49:17+00:00

District Administration > Options > Position Management This page is used to create and maintain Position Management options including the calculation types used in PMIS and the default values to be used for certain types of PMIS transactions. Typically, these options do not change throughout the school year.

general:pmis_district_admin_setup_pmis_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T20:38:14+00:00

District Administration > Options > Position Management This page is used to create and maintain Position Management options including the types of calculations that should be used in Position Management and the specified default values to be used for certain types of Position Management transactions. These options are not typically changed throughout the school year.

general:pmis_district_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-14T20:48:26+00:00

* Update Position Management options. District Administration > Options > Position Management This page is used to create and maintain Position Management options including the types of calculations that should be used in Position Management and the specified default values to be used for certain types of Position Management transactions. These options are not typically changed throughout the school year.

general:pmis_employee_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:20:08+00:00

Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee, and click Retrieve. Or, click [Ellipsis Icon] to perform a search in the Employees directory. Type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:pmis_excel_formatting_instructions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:25:46+00:00

Format a Column in Excel Use the following steps to format a column with leading zeros. VCV In the Excel spreadsheet, click Home and click the drop-down arrow next to General. VCV Select More Number Formats. The Format Cells pop-up window opens.

general:pmis_export_next_year_pmis

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-26T15:34:50+00:00

Position Management > Utilities > Export PMIS Tables This utility is used to export current and next year position management tables for all pay frequencies including PMIS District Options. The export includes active/inactive positions and supplemental positions. You can use the Position Management > Utilities > Import PMIS Tables page to import the tables.

general:pmis_guides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-29T15:46:43+00:00

VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) Position Management Process - The following guides/checklists are included: * ASCENDER - (CRT) Setup and Processing for New Users * ASCENDER - (CRT) Setup and Processing for Existing Users * ASCENDER - (CRT) Salary Simulations Overview * ASCENDER - (CRT) Update NYR Positions and Move Employees to CYR Payroll * ASCENDER - (CRT) Interface to Budget Checklist * ASCENDER - (CRT) Import Position Data Checklist * ASCENDER - (CRT) Import Distribution Data Checklist…

general:pmis_maintenance_section

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-03T19:33:28+00:00

Log on to the next year. * Delete next year PMIS. Position Management > Utilities > Mass Delete Forecast Positions [Mass Delete Forecast Positions Page] VCV Leave all fields blank and click Execute. A list of processing reports is displayed. [Mass Delete Forecast Positions Processing Reports] VCV Select the reports to generate, and print or save the reports. VCV Click Process to delete the forecast records. You are prompted to create a

general:pmis_orignal_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-10T15:19:45+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the original transaction type. Move Forecast to CYR Maintenance Change In Compensation Separation Non-Comp Position Changes Non-Comp Funding Changes

general:pmis_position_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:19:12+00:00

A - Active - The position is occupied. H - Position on Hold - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget. I - Inactive - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget. P - Proposed - The position is vacant, never filled, and may become a vacant or active position. A proposed position can be included in the budget if needed.

general:pmis_positions_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-31T20:53:05+00:00

The Positions lookup is displayed. As you type data, a list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The Position Nbr field is populated with the selected position number. Otherwise, click

Create a simulation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:43:02+00:00

Create a simulation Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options Create a salary simulation for the group of employees who are owed retro pay that includes a raise. [Salary Simulation Options Tab] VCV Under Update Options, in the Update Forecast field, select Yes. VCV Click Execute to begin the simulation process. VCV

Perform Retro Pay

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-14T16:45:59+00:00

Perform Retro Pay Position Management > Utilities > Retro Pay Processing Perform the retro pay processing. You must be logged on to a next year pay frequency to access this utility. Create an export using Export PMIS Tables prior to using this utility. PMIS Overtime Notes * If the employee’s position record has hours per day, the following overtime calculation is used: overtime rate = (daily rate / hours per day) * 1.5, hourly rate = (daily rate / hours per day).

Move retro pay extra duties to Non-TRS

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-14T16:31:14+00:00

Move retro pay extra duties to Non-TRS Once retroactive pay has been processed, the Payroll > Maintenance > Hours/Pay Transmittals > Extra Duties tab is populated. According to TRS, retroactive salary increases are not creditable compensation for TRS benefit calculation purposes. Reference the TRS Salary Increases and Creditable Compensation

general:pmis_roll_cy_tablesemployees_to_ny_payroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-05T15:38:33+00:00

Log on to the current year pay frequency. Payroll > Next Year > Copy CYR Staff to NYR [Copy CYR Staff to NYR] Complete the following: VCV In the Pay Type field, select E - Exclude Substitute. VCV Under Options: * Select Include Employees with Termination Date. * In the Next Year’s Funding Code, type the fiscal year that exists in Budget.

general:pmis_simulation_reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T17:27:31+00:00

Forecast Simulation Errors - The error report provides a list of encountered errors. [Forecast Simulation Errors Report] Forecast Simulation Calculations Position/Distribution - This report is similar to the Next Year Payroll Employee Distribution report that is generated on the Payroll > Next Year > Interface NY Payroll to NY Budget page, HRS9960 - NY Payroll Extract Distribution by Name. The report provides the position, billet, and employee name.

general:pmis_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-18T19:38:04+00:00

Term DescriptionBilletThe count of the number of jobs within a position number. Alpha characters are allowed; however, it is important to use only numeric characters.CYRRefers to the current year.ForecastRefers to the next year records.NYRRefers to the next year.

general:pmis_update_ny_payroll_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-16T16:37:42+00:00

Update the following tables as needed: VCV Salaries * Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR > Local Annual - Only contracted employees * Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR > Hourly/Daily - All contracted, noncontracted, and hourly employees * Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR > Extra Duty * Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR > State Minimum * Personnel > Tables > Salaries NYR > Midpoint ---------- Log on to the next year pay frequency. VCV Tax/Deductions - Verify that you are logge…

general:pmis_updatesalarytables_backup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-15T15:33:56+00:00

general:pmis_updatingnyrpositions_and_rolling10moemployees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T19:56:48+00:00

This process moves employees who receive their first paycheck in September from next year Position Management to current year Position Management. It also updates some of the fields on the following Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data tabs in the current year payroll:

general:pmis_updatingnyrpositions_and_rolling11moemployees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-29T19:56:04+00:00

This process moves employees who receive their first paycheck in August from next year Position Management to current year Position Management. It also updates some of the fields on the following Payroll >Maintenance > Staﬀ Job/Pay Data and Personnel > Maintenance > Employment Info tabs in the current year payroll (see step 16 for detailed information):

general:pmis_updatingnyrpositions_and_rolling12moemployees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-06-23T15:10:33+00:00

This process moves employees who receive their first paycheck in July from next year Position Management to current year Position Management. It also updates some of the fields on the following Maintenance tabs in the current year (see step 7 for detailed information):

general:pmisexistingusersprereqs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-04T19:55:24+00:00

Verify accuracy of data in current year Position Management Verify that current year data in Position Management is accurate and matches Payroll records. Generate the following reports and make corrections as needed. Position Management > Reports > PMIS Reports > HRS8054 - PMIS/Payroll Discrepancy Report The report allows you to print a list of all positions that do not have payroll records or a list of payroll records that do not have position management records.

general:pmismaxdaysnote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-04-10T20:11:13+00:00

Late Start Employee Note: To avoid issues when processing a mid-year separation for an employee who started late in the same school year, access the Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify > Position Record tab and manually adjust the actual number of Max Payments the employee will receive for the position/billet being filled.

general:pmispositionadmin_budget_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-11-01T20:25:53+00:00

Add or modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:pmispositionadmin_budget_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T15:03:49+00:00

general:pmispositionadmin_date_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T14:53:50+00:00

general:pmispositionadmin_date_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T14:41:36+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates related to a position record.

general:pmispositionadmin_distribution_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-08T21:38:08+00:00

general:pmispositionadmin_distribution_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T14:07:39+00:00

general:pmispositionadmin_positionrecord_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-16T13:06:37+00:00

general:pmispositionadmin_positionrecord_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-14T14:06:36+00:00

general:pmispositionhistory_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-09-16T16:35:34+00:00

Retrieve a historical position record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:pmispositionhistory_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T16:49:54+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_budget_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-11-01T20:24:57+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_budget_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T19:52:49+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_date_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T19:20:33+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_date_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T19:22:00+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a position record.

general:pmispositionmodify_distribution_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T16:59:35+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_distribution_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T16:59:58+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the positions.

general:pmispositionmodify_positionrecord_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-31T20:34:07+00:00

general:pmispositionmodify_positionrecord_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-09T15:41:23+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the position record for each position in the school district.

general:pmisretropayprocessingreports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-14T16:51:07+00:00

FieldDescriptionSelect Pay FrequencyClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the pay frequency that you wish to move to current year. This is a required field.Validate Accounts against General LedgerBy default, this field is selected. Clear Validate Accounts against General Ledger

general:pmissupplementalbudget_modify_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:40:36+00:00

Modify a record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:pmissupplementalbudget_modify_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:38:25+00:00

general:pmissupplementaldate_modify_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:31:38+00:00

Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:pmissupplementaldate_modify_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:31:16+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a supplement position record.

general:pmissupplementaldistribution_modify_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:29:59+00:00

general:pmissupplementaldistribution_modify_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:26:46+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the supplement positions.

general:pmissupplementalpositionrecord_modify_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T17:39:57+00:00

general:pmissupplementalpositionrecord_modify_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T17:41:27+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the supplement position record for each supplement position in the LEA.

general:pmissupppositionhistory_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:54:46+00:00

Retrieve a historical supplement position record: Field Description Position Number Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:pmissupppositionhistory_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:53:53+00:00

general:pmisupplementalbudget_admin_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:17:51+00:00

general:pmisupplementalbudget_admin_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:16:33+00:00

general:pmisupplementaldate_admin_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:10:31+00:00

general:pmisupplementaldate_admin_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T21:08:56+00:00

This tab is used to create, modify, or delete dates relating to a supplement position record.

general:pmisupplementaldistribution_admin_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T20:56:54+00:00

general:pmisupplementaldistribution_admin_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T20:55:53+00:00

This tab provides a list of the accounts used to fund the supplement positions.

general:pmisupplementalpositionrecord_admin_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T20:43:12+00:00

general:pmisupplementalpositionrecord_admin_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-11T20:35:15+00:00

This tab is used to maintain the supplement position record for each supplement position in the LEA.

general:po_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-04-10T20:44:01+00:00

Type an alphanumeric purchase order number, hyphens are allowed. Leading zeros are not required. However, if the purchase order number is alphanumeric, the field is not zero-filled. The field can be six characters. Note: If a match is found, a message is displayed indicating a duplicate purchase order number was entered and prompts you to enter a different PO number.

general:po_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:15:57+00:00

Type the user-defined reason for creating the purchase order. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters. If the Default PO Reason field was entered before you added a blank row for a new purchase order, the PO Reason field displays the default reason. You can change the reason if necessary.

general:position_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-03T20:24:33+00:00

StatusClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a position status. A - Active - The position is occupied. H - Position on Hold - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget. I - Inactive - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget.

general:position_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:21:19+00:00

Begin typing a position description, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position description from the list. If the position description is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon]. The Positions pop-up window opens with a list of all positions.

general:position_history

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-25T13:10:24+00:00

FreqClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a payroll frequency. This is a required field.School YrType the school year in the YYYY format. This is a required field.Job CodeType a job code to identify the job, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a code from the Job Codes list. The field can be a maximum of four characters (e.g., 0001 = Superintendent, 1003 = 10 month - 3rd Grade Teacher). This is a required field.

general:position_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-28T15:48:26+00:00

* Status * Frequency * School Year * Category * Supplement Attached * Job Code * 1st Pay Date Code * Primary Campus * Dept * Hours Per Day * Percent Day Employed * Percent Year Employed * State Minimum Days * Pay Concept *

general:position_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:21:06+00:00

Begin typing a position number, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a position number from the list. The field can be a maximum of 13 characters. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.

general:position_supplement_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-30T17:07:02+00:00

StatusClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the status of the supplement position. A - Active - The position is occupied. H - Position on Hold - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget. I - Inactive - The position is vacant and is not included in the budget.

general:position_supplement_history

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-28T22:41:45+00:00

Primary JobSelect if this is the primary job for the employee. An employee may only have one primary job.Pay GradeType the code for the pay grade. The field can be a maximum of three characters.Pay StepType the code for the salary level within the indicated pay grade. The field can be a maximum of two characters.

general:position_supplement_modify

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-01-30T17:28:22+00:00

Accept ChangesSelect to indicate that any changes made in the current year will be reflected in the next year. Any changes made in forecast do not reflect in the current year regardless of the field selection.StatusClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the status of the supplement position.

general:position

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-28T15:35:48+00:00

general:positioninquiry_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:26:32+00:00

general:positive_pay_export_informational_sheet

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T14:25:16+00:00

Positive Pay is an automated tool offered by most banks to detect forged, altered, and/or counterfeit checks. Positive Pay requires the company/organization (e.g., LEA) to transmit a file for each day checks are issued. The check issue file that is sent to the bank contains the check, number, account number, issue date, dollar amount, and sometimes the payee name. When the issued checks are presented for payment to the bank, they are electronically verified to the list of transmitted checks. …

(If applicable) Create positive pay file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-18T19:24:22+00:00

(If applicable) Create positive pay file Payroll > Utilties > Positive Pay Create a Positive Pay file (positive_MMDDYYY.txt). Positive Pay background Positive Pay is an automated tool offered by most banks to detect forged, altered, and/or counterfeit checks. Positive Pay requires the company/organization (e.g., LEA) to transmit a file for each day checks are issued. The check issue file that is sent to the bank contains the check, number, account number, issue date, dollar amount, and so…

general:post_to_general_ledger

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-08T14:26:36+00:00

* If Use Automatic JV Number Assignment is not selected on the Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options tab, the Post to General Ledger Amendment Number field is set to the amendment number selected and can be modified. * If Use Automatic JV Number Assignment

general:posting_pa_credit_memo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-31T17:10:21+00:00

Type the credit memo number for the return transaction. The field can be a maximum of ten alphanumeric characters. The field zero-fills the number to ten digits when you enter a partial credit memo number and tab out of the field (e.g., you entered 123456, the field zero-fills to 0000123456). If alphanumeric values are used, the field does not zero-fill the credit memo number to ten characters (e.g., you entered ABC2, the credit memo number remains ABC2).

general:posting_pa_detail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-27T20:00:59+00:00

In the detail section, a new row is added with the same account code, description, and contra account code, but with a negative amount in the Net Expend Amt field. ReasonThe field displays CREDIT CARD REVERSAL.Trans Date The current system date is displayed by default, but it can be modified. If it is modified, all new transactions default to the last transaction date that was entered.

general:posting_pa_netexpend

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-31T17:09:50+00:00

Type an amount for the credit card transaction. The field is display only for saved transactions. If Credit Card is selected in the Type field, the amount must be a positive number. If Return is selected in the Type field, the amount must be a negative number.

general:posting_pa_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:58:30+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the transaction type. Select Credit Card to disable to Credit Memo Nbr field. Select Return to enable the Credit Memo Nbr field.

general:posting_po_liquidated

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T20:14:31+00:00

Type an amount to be liquidated for the credit card transaction. Or, click Fully Liquidate to automatically populate the Liquidated Amt field. The amount defaults to zero and displays a warning message if nothing is entered. Notes: If the liquidated amount is zero for the selected account code, an amount must be entered in the

general:posttomasterbackup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-31T21:22:31+00:00

It is highly recommended that the user export a copy of the affected tables prior to completing the posting process. Click Yes to export a copy of the affected tables. Click No to not create the backup and continue with the interface. If the user clicks

Predefined Abbreviated Deduction Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T16:31:07+00:00

Predefined Abbreviated Deduction Codes Abbreviated Code Description Object CodeW-2 BoxW-2 CodeA3403b FICA Annuity (FICA Alternative)2159 ACTRS Health Insurance215312 14DD HEALTHANAnnuities215912ECUCredit union2154D1457 deferred comp215912GD2457 deferred comp lump amount

general:prenote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-10T19:55:19+00:00

A prenote file is a test authorization EFT that is sent to the bank to verify that the EFT account numbers are correct. The prenote file includes the vendor name, account number, and bank routing number. It does not include any currency amounts.

general:preupdatelisting

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T02:22:31+00:00

Review the report. Review the report using the following buttons: Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page of the report. Click [Previous Page Button] to go back one page. Click [Next Page Button] to go forward one page. Click [Last Page Buton] to go to the last page of the report. The report can be viewed and saved in various file formats

general:print_account_code_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:22:46+00:00

Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Account Code Tables - displays the following Account Code Table Selection options: Fund/Fiscal Yr Function Object Sub-Object Organization\ Program Intent Educational Span

general:print_asset_man_code_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:02:42+00:00

Click to print data. The following Asset Management Code Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Code Tables - displays the following options from which you can select: Catalog Status Code

general:print_bank_account_group

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-29T15:32:39+00:00

The following Bank Account Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Account Code Tables - displays the following Bank Account Table options: * Bank Account Group * Bank Account Group Funds

general:print_bank_recon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-18T20:34:40+00:00

Click to print data. If the reconciliation record is in a pending status, the Pending Reconciliation Report is displayed. If the reconciliation record is in a reconciled status, the Reconciliation Report is displayed. Review the report.

general:print_bankinformation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-05T20:47:46+00:00

Click to print bank table data. The following Bank Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Code Tables - displays the following Bank Table options: Bank Code Table EFT Code Table All Code Tables

general:print_calendar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-14T16:00:26+00:00

Click to print calendar data. The following Workday Calendar selections are displayed: In the drop down, select a calendar code to be included. Specific School Calendar - prints only the tab page currently open. All School Calendars - prints all the school calendars.

general:print_checks_check_select_date_range

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-30T15:40:31+00:00

Type the ending date in the MM-DD-YYYY format, or select a date from the calendar. Include the latest check transaction posting date, or leave blank for all outstanding checks. If the Payables Date Used field in Finance Options is set to T - Use transaction date for payables

general:print_checks_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-25T16:38:26+00:00

Type the fund/fiscal year that has outstanding checks. You can enter the fund/fiscal year with or without the slash (e.g., 161/5 or 1615). Use a comma (with no space and no other symbols) to separate multiple funds. Click [Ellipsis Icon] to search for multiple funds/years. To use all funds, leave the field blank. When using the Student Activity Fund option on the District Finance Options page, and Student Activity Fund checks were created, they must be separate from all other funds' checks. To…

general:print_checks_next

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-01T19:26:12+00:00

VCV Click Next. A preview of the checks to be printed is displayed. Review the report. Use the scroll bars to view the check details. VCV Under Print Options, select one of the following: * Vendor Checks - Selected by default and displays the vendor checks to be printed.

general:print_checks_preview

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-27T14:18:19+00:00

Vendor NumberDisplays the vendor number.Vendor Sort KeyDisplays the vendor sort key.Vendor NameDisplays the vendor name.Check AmountDisplays the check amount.Trans AmtDisplays the total transaction amount.Credit AmtDisplays the total amount of credit memos applied to the check.

general:print_checks_update

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T19:59:38+00:00

If you click Update, a message box is displayed verifying that the checks have printed properly. If the printed check is acceptable, click Yes to update the records. A message is displayed suggesting a backup be created before continuing. * If the check did not print properly, click

general:print_contract

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:45:14+00:00

VCV Click Print Contract to print the contract based on the contract format layout selected in the Contract Format Nbr field. Review the report.

general:print_credential_code_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-21T19:02:03+00:00

Click to print code table data. The following Credential Code Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Code Tables - displays the following Credential Code Table Selection options: Major/Minor Table

general:print_districtfinanceoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:23:36+00:00

Click to print the report. The following Account Code Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Account Code Tables - displays the following options: Finance Options Accounting Periods Clearing Funds

general:print_jobcontract_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-02T19:49:59+00:00

Click to print job contract table data. The following Job Contract Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Code Tables - displays the following Job Contract Table options: BBB Job Code Table

Print purchase orders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T21:54:51+00:00

Print purchase orders Purchasing > Reports > Purchase Order Reports > REQ1450 - Print Purchase Orders This report provides an automated means of printing purchase orders to send to vendors. VCV Click PO Signature to select a signature to be displayed on the purchase order. VCV Click Contract to display contract formats. If purchase orders did not correctly print, use the

general:print_salary_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-09-01T14:10:12+00:00

Click to print the salary table data. The following salary table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Salary Tables - displays the following Current Year Salary Table Selection options: Local Annual

general:print_tax_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T21:21:24+00:00

Click to print tax table data. The following Tax Table options are displayed: Current Tab Page - prints only the tab page currently open. Selected Code Tables - displays the following Tax Table Selection options: FIT Exemption FIT Tables FICA Tax

general:printer_icon

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-29T19:05:30+00:00

Click to print the contract template that you created.

Printing Forms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-18T19:13:58+00:00

Printing Forms When printing checks in PDF format or when printing special forms, the default printer settings will need to be changed. The settings will need to be reset to the original settings when you are not printing checks and special forms. Otherwise, reports and other documents will not print correctly.

general:printreport_acct_list

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-03T15:16:59+00:00

Review the account list using the following buttons: Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page of the report. Click [Previous Page Button] to go back one page. Click [Next Page Button] to go forward one page. Click [Last Page Buton] to go to the last page of the report. Click [Drop Down Arrow] to select a specific page number to display.

general:printreport_leaveunits

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:23:16+00:00

The Print Options pop-up window opens. Select one or both of the below options: * Print Current Leave Type - Prints only the selected leave type report. * Print All Saved Leave Types - Prints the All Leave Units report. Review the report using the following buttons

general:printreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:11:12+00:00

Review the report using the following buttons: Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page of the report. Click [Previous Page Button] to go back one page. Click [Next Page Button] to go forward one page. Click [Last Page Buton] to go to the last page of the report. The report can be viewed and saved in various file formats

general:printreportanderror

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T20:54:32+00:00

general:process_delete_funds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-31T19:17:59+00:00

VCV Click Process to continue the process and complete the delete process for items with a Y in the Deleted column. A message is displayed indicating that the process was successfully completed. Click OK. Note: Items with an N in the Deleted column cannot be deleted; the process is automatically canceled if the

general:process_fund_close

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:04:47+00:00

Click to continue the process and accept the changes. A message is displayed indicating that the process was completed successfully. Click OK.

general:process_mass_change_bank_acct_group_by_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:48:54+00:00

* Click Process to proceed and complete the mass change process for items with a Y in the Process column. Items with an N in the Process column cannot be processed; the process is canceled if the Process button is clicked. You are prompted to create a

general:process_mass_delete_vendors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:11:33+00:00

* Click Process to continue the process. A message is displayed indicating that the process was completed successfully. Click OK.

general:process_the_budget_simulation_to_zero_amounts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:56:36+00:00

Budget > Utilities > Budget Level Processing Process the budget simulation to zero the amounts. This step processes the previously created simulation. Depending on the selections, the amounts in the Recommended or Approved columns are set to zero. On the Recommended or Approved tab, select the simulation and click

general:process_transfer_checks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T15:09:17+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Transfer Transaction Processing > Process Transfer Checks This utility is used to record and interface wire (or regular) transactions to Finance. Before interfacing to Finance, print the reports from the Transaction Maintenance tab to verify the amounts. Although actual checks are not issued, the wire transactions are displayed on the check register as checks.

general:purchasing_account_code_field_display

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-05T16:25:08+00:00

The 20-character account code mask with all Xs is displayed. * Type only the account code elements (e.g., fund, function, object, etc.) to be included in the search (e.g., for a summary of all supply accounts for campus 001, the account mask would look like the following: XXX-XX-63XX-XX-001-XXXXXX).

Verify or add Purchasing accounting period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-16T18:28:34+00:00

Verify or add Purchasing accounting period Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Accounting Periods Verify or add the purchasing accounting period. [District Finance Options Purchasing Accounting Period] Purchasing Accounting PeriodType the purchasing accounting period. The field is a two-digit number from 01-12. The period can be the same as the current accounting period or the next accounting posting period.

general:purchasing_approve_bundle_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-26T16:53:25+00:00

VCV Click Approve Bundle Requisition to approve the requisition bundle. The Bundle Requisitions report is displayed. Review the report. VCV Click Process to continue. A message is displayed with the bundle and purchase order number and prompts you to print the Purchasing Requisition Report.

general:purchasing_approve_req_requestor_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-23T14:53:47+00:00

The requestor name for the requisition is displayed.

general:purchasing_approve_req_requisition_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-23T14:54:45+00:00

The six-digit requisition number is displayed.

general:purchasing_approve_req_requisition_requested_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-23T14:55:57+00:00

The date of the requisition request is displayed.

general:purchasing_bid_requisition_comments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-26T19:59:25+00:00

Click to view or add comments to the bid. The comments are strictly for bid purposes and are not displayed on the purchase order. If comments exist, a paperclip icon is displayed on the Comment button. Click OK to save the comment and close the window.

general:purchasing_bid_requisition_create_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-05T19:56:25+00:00

Click to finalize the bid. The bid status is changed to A - Approve, and a purchase order is created for each awarded vendor.

general:purchasing_bid_requisition_return_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-05T19:57:25+00:00

Click to return the bid to the Vendor Response page.

general:purchasing_campus_dept

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:38:31+00:00

Type the name of the campus submitting the requisition. This field is also used to direct the requisition to the first approver. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a campus/department. Notes: This field is only displayed if the

general:purchasing_catalog_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T19:37:03+00:00

Type an item catalog number. This field can be a maximum of 15 characters.

general:purchasing_contract_requisition_submit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:48:23+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit the requisition. A pop-up window is displayed indicating that the requisition process is completed, and prompts you to print the Purchasing Contract Requisition Report. * Click Yes to continue and print the report. *

general:purchasing_delete_bid_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-30T18:51:31+00:00

Click to delete a bid. All associated requisitions are updated with a P - Pending status. Requisitions can be viewed on the Purchasing > Inquiry > Requisition Status Inquiry page, and approved on the Purchasing > Maintenance > Approve Requisition page.

general:purchasing_delete_pa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-27T19:48:17+00:00

Click to delete the purchase authorization.

general:purchasing_delete_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-17T12:58:02+00:00

VCV Click Delete to delete the requisition. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. * Click Yes to delete the requisition. * Otherwise, click No to not delete the requisition. Notes: * A requisition cannot be deleted while it is being edited.

general:purchasing_items_consider

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T16:11:00+00:00

Consider the below items prior to setting up the purchasing options: * If your LEA plans to use the Receiving feature, do you want to automatically create payables on the Finance > Maintenance > Pending Payables page? * Do you have a cutoff date for submitting requisitions? How often are Finance checks run?

general:purchasing_long_description_display

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T19:48:46+00:00

Type a detailed item description (e.g., training dates, etc.)

general:purchasing_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-27T21:54:55+00:00

PO Object Code Restriction Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the allowed range of object codes to be used on requisitions. Only account codes with object codes in the selected range are allowed. BBB R - Class 62XX-64XX and 66XX BBB E - Class 6XXX and 8XXX BBB A - Class 1XXX, 2XXX, 6XXX and 8XXX

general:purchasing_order_for

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-02T15:06:58+00:00

Type the shipping contact name to be displayed on the purchase order. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters. If blank, the data from the Requestor field is displayed on the purchase order. Note: Data from the Order For or Requestor field is only displayed on the purchase order if a Y is entered in the

general:purchasing_receiving_search_for_bundled_requisitions_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-02T18:56:29+00:00

If Use Blind Receiving is selected, order quantities are not shown on this page. If Allow Partial Receiving is not selected, only complete requisition items can be received. If Allow Receiving Overage is not selected, only the original item quantity ordered or less can be received.

general:purchasing_receiving_search_for_bundled_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T20:34:33+00:00

Purchase Order NbrType the purchase order number to be retrieved. If the PO number is numeric, leading zeros are not required. Click Retrieve. * If the purchase order number is not known, click Directory. * To search for a specific purchase order or requisition number, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:purchasing_receiving_search_for_requisition_bundle

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:32:34+00:00

Purchase Order NbrType the purchase order number to be retrieved. If the PO number is numeric, leading zeros are not required. Click Retrieve. If the purchase order is not known, click Directory. Notes: The following receiving options selected on the District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse page determine how information is displayed as well as if certain requisition items can be received on this page.

general:purchasing_receiving_search_for_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:29:15+00:00

Purchase Order NbrType the purchase order number to be retrieved. If the PO number is numeric, leading zeros are not required.Requisition NbrType the requisition number to be retrieved. If the requisition number is numeric, leading zeros are not required.

general:purchasing_req_stat

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-23T16:36:44+00:00

For each requisition line item: * In the Status field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the status of the item (Disapproved, Free, Approved). * If a line item is disapproved and the rest of the requisition is approved, the disapproved line item is not visible to the next approver.

general:purchasing_requestor_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T19:13:33+00:00

Type the name of the person or organization who is requesting the item(s). As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the requestor. Notes: The requisition follows the requestor's approval path that is set up on the

general:purchasing_requisition_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-04T14:18:17+00:00

Type the account code to be charged. The account code must exist in the general ledger and in the user profile (the account code must be assigned to the Requestor's user profile in District Administration.). The account code is comprised of the fund, function, object, subobject, organization, and program codes, and are the individual components that uniquely identify a specific budget category. You can add multiple accounts for each item.

general:purchasing_requisition_approve

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-22T14:10:28+00:00

Click to approve the requisition and forward the requisition to the next approver in the approval path. Note: An error message is displayed when approving a requisition that contains a line item without an account code. The originator can submit a requisition without an account code, but a requisition cannot be approved without an account code.

general:purchasing_requisition_bidcategory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-23T15:36:04+00:00

Type the category code to be used for the requisition. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a bid category code. Only category codes identified as a bid category on the Finance > Tables > Vendor Categories page and assigned to the selected vendor on the

general:purchasing_requisition_comments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:27:35+00:00

Click to add or view requisitions comments. These comments are displayed on the District copy of the purchase order. A Requisition Comments window is displayed. If there is a paper clip icon next to the Comments button, a requisition comment exists. In the Requisition Comments window, type comments about the requisition.

general:purchasing_requisition_credit_card_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:13:03+00:00

Type the credit card code to be used for the requisition. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a credit card code. Only active credit card codes that are assigned to the requestor on the District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Credit Cards tab are displayed in the drop-down list.

general:purchasing_requisition_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T19:38:34+00:00

Type a short description (e.g., computer, pens, books, etc.) of the item being ordered. This field is required and can be a maximum of 30 characters.

general:purchasing_requisition_nextyearaccountcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-22T12:51:07+00:00

Type the account code to be charged. The account code must exist in the general ledger and in the user profile (the account code must be assigned to the requestor's user profile in District Administration.). BBB If an account code exists in Finance file ID C, it cannot be used in next year purchasing.

general:purchasing_requisition_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-02T15:06:00+00:00

The requisition number is populated when the requisition is saved if the Use Automatic CYR Requisition Number Assignment field is selected on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options tab. Otherwise, you must enter a six-digit requisition number.

general:purchasing_requisition_path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-31T21:26:40+00:00

Click to view the approval path for the requisition. The Approval Path window is displayed. Under Insert Approver: In the Approver field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an approver name to insert before or after your name. Select Before or After to indicate if you want the approver's name to be inserted before or after your name in the approval path.

general:purchasing_requisition_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-02T15:07:41+00:00

The requisition period for this transaction is displayed. This field is the same as the accounting period and is set to the current or next period on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options tab.

general:purchasing_requisition_return

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-02-18T16:27:24+00:00

Click to disapprove the complete requisition and return the requisition to the originator. If there are changes to the requisition, a pop-window with the requisition details is displayed prompting you to verify and continue. If there are no changes, a pop-window is displayed prompting you to continue.

general:purchasing_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-02T18:45:04+00:00

By default, this field set to Y - Approved. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a different requisition item status. Notes: If Y - Approved is selected, a unit price other than $0 is required. If F - Free is selected for goods or services being requisitioned without charge, the account code must be blank.

general:purchasing_requisition_submit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T20:13:53+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit the requisition. A message with the requisition number is displayed indicating that the requisition process is completed. You are prompted to print the Purchasing Requisition Report. * Click Yes to continue and print the report.

general:purchasing_requisition_unit_price

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-22T19:44:08+00:00

Type the price per unit of issue for the requested item.

general:purchasing_requisition_vendor_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:27:23+00:00

Click to add or view vendor notes. A Vendor Notes window is displayed. If there is a paper clip next to the Vendor Notes button, a requisition vendor note exists. In the Vendor Notes window, type the note to be printed on the purchase order for the vendor to view.

general:purchasing_reverse_po_retrieval

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:37:59+00:00

Under Retrieval Options: PO NbrType the purchase order number.VendorBegin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor.From DateType the starting purchase order retrieval date in the MMDDYYYY format, or select a date from the calendar.

general:purchasing_save_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:04:21+00:00

VCV Click Save. The bid status is changed to N - Saved, and the status for all pending requisitions in the bid is changed to Q - Bid for Quote. Requisitions can be viewed on the Purchasing > Inquiry > Requisition Status Inquiry page, but cannot be retrieved or approved on the Purchasing > Maintenance > Approve Requisition page.

general:purchasing_save_bundle_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-07-03T13:22:00+00:00

VCV Click Save Bundle Requisitions to bundle and save the selected requisitions. The Bundle Requisitions report is displayed. Review the report. VCV Click Process to continue. A message is displayed with the bundle number and prompts you to print the Purchasing Requisition Report.

general:purchasing_save_vendor_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:06:03+00:00

VCV Click Save to save the vendor quote request. The bid status is changed to Q - Saved.

general:purchasing_save_vendor_response

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T00:47:50+00:00

VCV Click Save to save the vendor response. The bid status is changed to R - Vendor Response.

general:purchasing_scope_of_work

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:25:05+00:00

Click to add or read the work for the contract. The entered notes are printed on the contract when the purchase order is printed. There is only one scope of work per requisition. The field is required prior to the requisition becoming a purchase order. If work exists for any line item, a paperclip icon is displayed on the

general:purchasing_search_for_approve_bundle_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:32:02+00:00

Under Retrieve By: VendorBegin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor.Bundle NbrType the six-digit bundle number. Click Retrieve.

general:purchasing_search_for_bundle_requisition_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-14T20:36:34+00:00

Select to perform a search using the requisition bundle number. If selected, the following is displayed under Retrieval Options. Bundle NbrType the requisition bundle number and click Retrieve.

general:purchasing_search_for_bundle_requisition_req

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:45:47+00:00

Select to perform a search using the requisition number. If selected, the following is displayed under Retrieval Options: Req NbrType the six-digit requisition number.From DateType the beginning search date in the MMDDYYYY format.To DateType the ending search date in the MMDDYYYY format.

general:purchasing_search_for_bundle_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-05T20:01:37+00:00

Under Retrieve By: Requisition Nbr Select to perform a search using the requisition number. If selected, the following is displayed under Retrieval Options: Req NbrType the six-digit requisition number.From DateType the beginning search date in the MMDDYYYY format.

general:purchasing_submit_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:04:52+00:00

VCV Click Submit. The bid is transferred to the Request Vendor Quote page.

general:purchasing_submit_vendor_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-27T19:06:25+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit all of the bid line items to each selected vendor. The bid is transferred to the Vendor Response page. Note: You must print or email the Reports > Bid Processing Reports > Request for Quotation Report (REQ2000) before you can retrieve a bid or enter a vendor response on the Vendor Response page.

general:purchasing_submit_vendor_response

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T00:48:14+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit the vendor responses. The bid is transferred to the Award Bid page.

general:purchasing_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:35:47+00:00

The following terms are used throughout the Purchasing Requisition processing steps. Term DescriptionApproverAny individual in the approval path who has permission to approve a submitted requisition.Commodity CodeA standard classification code for products and services used to detail where funds are expended.

general:purchasing_unit_of_issue

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T19:40:17+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a basic unit (e.g., EA (each), CA (case)) on which the price is based.

general:purchasing_vendor_search

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:41:57+00:00

Vendor SearchBegin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor. VCV Click Retrieve. The vendor record is displayed. If the vendor name or number is not known, click Directory.

general:purchasingguides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-10T16:19:17+00:00

VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) Credit Card Process VCV ASCENDER - Using Commodity Codes VCV ASCENDER - Purchasing: Requisition Process - The following documents are included: * ASCENDER - Set up Purchasing Options and Permissions * ASCENDER - Manage Purchasing Approval Workflows * ASCENDER - Perform Requisition Maintenance * ASCENDER - Approve and Receive Purchase Orders VCV ASCENDER - Contract Requisition/Purchase Order Checklist VCV ASCENDER - Next Year Purchasing Checklist VCV ASCENDE…

general:purchasingrequisitionprocess_beforeyoubegin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:16:44+00:00

Terms: The following terms are used throughout the Purchasing Requisition processing steps. Term DescriptionApproverAny individual in the approval path who has permission to approve a submitted requisition.Commodity CodeA standard classification code for products and services used to detail where funds are expended.

general:quickchecklist_nextyearpayrollprocess_copycurrentstafftonext

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-02T18:01:31+00:00

Payroll > Next Year > Copy CYR Staff to NYR Copy the employees from the current year payroll to the next year payroll. If you have multiple pay frequencies, complete this task in all pay frequencies. BBB Under Pay Status, select Active to copy only active employees. BBB In the Pay Type field, select

general:quickchecklist_nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdate_extra_duty

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-12-19T17:03:47+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update > Extra Duty Mass update the remaining payments on all extra duties for applicable employees. Complete the Remain Pymts field under Change Existing Extra Duty Code Information.

general:quickchecklist_nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdateemployeetab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-02T18:06:42+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update > Employee Mass update the Pay Step and State Step fields for all employees tied to a salary table. This allows preliminary payroll data to be sent to Budget as a starting point. Consider repeating this step as follows for each pay type to ensure that all employees are incremented properly.

general:quickchecklist_nextyearpayrollprocess_massupdateemployeetab2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-02T17:59:11+00:00

Payroll > Utilities > Mass Update > Employee Mass update data as needed. The following fields are commonly updated. BBB Fiscal Year - If some employees should not be incremented to the next fiscal year, repeat this step only selecting specific employees and mass update them back to the correct fiscal year. An example of this may include those paid with Elementary and Secondary School Emergency Relief (ESSER) Programs.

general:quickchecklist_nextyearpayrollprocess_trsrates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-12-19T17:03:15+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Tax/Deductions > TRS Rates Update the TRS rates if the new rates are available. Type the new year (2025) and click Retrieve. A message is displayed indicating that the new record is populated based on the prior year's (2024) TRS rates record, click Save to retain the record.

general:ratetype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-18T16:43:49+00:00

If the Hrs Per Day field is left blank, the rate type is set to the daily rate. If the Hrs Per Day field contains hours, the rate type changes to the hourly rate.

Receive purchase orders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-27T18:56:55+00:00

Receive purchase orders Purchasing > Maintenance > Receiving > Requisition This page is used to receive purchased goods/services. Use the packing slip to accurately update the receiving details. Only requisitions for which you are the originator are displayed. Receiving is performed by the requisition number within the purchase order number. Purchase orders are displayed in the summary section, and associated requisitions are displayed in the detail section. Purchase orders created in the cur…

Reconciliation Search

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-03T16:15:26+00:00

Reconciliation Search Recon TitleType a bank reconciliation title.Bank Account GrpType a bank account group.GL File IDType the general ledger file ID. This field is optional when adding a reconciliation record. Accounting PeriodType the accounting period to be used. The leading zero is not required. Or, click

general:refresh_reload_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T17:35:45+00:00

The ASCENDER system allows you to retrieve, sort, filter, reset, and refresh data within the specific applications. To restore the data to its original view, click Refresh or Reset within the application. Note: Avoid using the following methods in Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, and Safari to refresh or reload data within the application as these methods may generate unpredictable results or cause you to lose unsaved work:

general:refresh_tab

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-29T15:23:21+00:00

Click to refresh the Group Code field on each of the Bank Account Group Funds, Cash Object, and Investment Objects tabs if the group code is changed or if a new group code is added. You do not need to exit that page to make changes and refresh the page.

general:refreshvendordetails

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-25T14:32:18+00:00

Click to update the vendor details. For example, if you select vendor number but not a vendor name, the Vendor Name field is not automatically populated. You can click Refresh Vendor Details to update the Vendor Name field.

general:remittance_address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-28T21:01:15+00:00

NameType the remittance vendor name that may be different from the actual vendor name. The field is optional and can be a maximum of 35 characters.Address Line 1Type the vendor point of contact or other address information.Street Nbr/NameType the vendor's mailing or physical address. Use the apartment abbreviation (APT) or the suite abbreviation (STE) and number, if known.

Generate a Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-25T20:32:45+00:00

Generate a Report The main report page allows you to select the report that you want to generate. Select a report: * Click a report to select it. The parameter page for the selected report is displayed. * Type or select the report options. Parameters in bold are required.

general:repost_transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:09:07+00:00

This field is displayed and automatically selected if Allow for repost option when voiding checks is selected on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options tab. This field is not displayed if Allow for repost option when voiding checks

general:requestedcutoffdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:53:15+00:00

The date for which updates to accounts are no longer accepted is displayed. If the LEA uses cutoff dates, no data can be transferred after the displayed cutoff date. If the LEA does not use cutoff dates, simulation data can be transferred at any time up to final budget approval.

Obtain Web Service Access

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-12-14T16:12:48+00:00

Review the following: Terms: SAMService Account Manager status in TEAL that provides one access to manage TSDS service accounts for the LEA. Service AccountAn account managed through TEAL allowing an LEA to use a specific web service. A service account must be set up by the Service Account Manager. The service account provides user name and password credentials that can be entered into a web application via an administrative interface to enable the application to use the web service.

general:requisition_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:37:22+00:00

Click to select a requisition to be added to the bid. The Requisition Directory is displayed. Only requisitions pending final approval from the logged-on user are displayed. To search for a specific item, type data in one or more of the search fields.

Perform a requisition inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-17T12:58:24+00:00

Perform a requisition inquiry Purchasing > Inquiry > Requisition Status Inquiry Use this page to view the status of each item included on a specific requisition or purchase order without a contract. The Requisition Status Inquiry page can be accessed from two menus: * For the current year, click Requisition Status Inquiry from the Inquiry menu.

general:requisition_printreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T19:45:04+00:00

Click to print the report. * Review the report using the following buttons: * Click [First Page Icon] to go to the first page of the report. * Click [Previous Page Icon] to go back one page. * Click [Next Page Icon] to go forward one page. * Click [Last Page Icon] to go to the last page of the report.

Generate and review requisition report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T17:04:50+00:00

Generate and review requisition report The following reports are available to assist you in tracking requisition and purchase order information. Purchasing > Reports > Purchasing Reports > REQ1050 - Requisitions Pending Approval This report provides a list of requisitions that have been submitted but are not yet approved. The report allows you to view pending requisitions by vendor number assignment or by account number assignment. The requisitions are totaled by the requisition number, orig…

general:requisition_requisition_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:30:52+00:00

Type the account code to be charged. The codes must exist in the general ledger and in the user profile.The account code is comprised of the fund, function, object, subobject, organization, and program codes, and are the individual parts which, taken together, form an account number that uniquely identifies a specific budget category. You can add multiple accounts for each item.

general:reset_mask_crosswalk_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T21:34:40+00:00

VCV Click Execute to initiate the mask crosswalk. * If any errors are encountered during the process, an Error Listing report is displayed. * If there are no errors, the Error Listing report is not displayed. If there are no errors, the Mask Crosswalk report is displayed.

general:reset_mask_crosswalk

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-17T21:34:19+00:00

VCV Click Reset to clear all crosswalk records and reset all previously selected options to the default.

general:reset_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:07:02+00:00

Click to restore the report to the original view, removing all sorting and filtering that has been applied.

general:reset_sort_filter_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T15:58:31+00:00

Click to restore the report to the original view, removing all sorting and filtering that has been applied.

general:reset

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-10T16:16:30+00:00

Click to clear the account code and return to the default setting (all Xs).

general:resetdata

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-09T15:00:16+00:00

Click to reset all previously selected options to the default.

Restrict campus/department

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-21T17:13:18+00:00

Restrict campus/department District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Restrict Campus/Dept This tab is used to restrict users to specific first approver campuses for purchasing requisitions. This feature can only be used if Restrict Campus/Dept is selected on the District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse > Current Year page. [District Administration User Profile Purchasing Restrict Campus Department Tab] VCV Click +Add to add a campus. The Campus Direct…

general:retireeemploymenttype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T19:29:32+00:00

Required TRS reporting field. (for retirees) Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the retired employee's retiree employment type code. BBB C - Combination of Substitute and Half-Time or less BBB F - Full-Time BBB H - Half-Time or less BBB S - Substitute

general:retireeemploymenttypefieldoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T15:16:36+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the employee's retiree employment type code. BBB B - Non-Profit Tutor Substitute BBB C - Combination of Substitute and Half-time or less BBB E - Surge Personnel BBB F - Full-Time BBB H - Half-time or less BBB N - Non-Profit Tutor Half Time or Less

general:retrieve_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-04T19:42:35+00:00

Click to retrieve data.

general:retrieve_inventory_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-04T22:09:33+00:00

Click to view a copy of the report. Review the report.

general:retrieve

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-08-26T13:27:07+00:00

The Retrieve button is also used to retrieve information from the last save. If you click Retrieve, any unsaved changes are lost.

general:retrieveemployeedemo_hrspay_transmittals

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-15T14:15:18+00:00

Type the employee name or number and click Retrieve. Or, click Directory to perform a search in the Employees directory.

general:return_vendor_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-04T19:10:31+00:00

Click to return the bid to the Create/Modify Bid page.

general:reverse_cash_receipt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:19:32+00:00

You can reverse a cash receipt in either the transaction or detail section of the tab. Note: You can click Reverse, and the resulting reversal entries are displayed in the detail section. If you have not saved the reversal, Reverse cannot be clicked again. However, once the reversal is saved, you can select Reverse again, and it reverses all transactions in the detail section. The summary section displays zero amounts. Once saved, all entries in the detail section are displayed on the general …

general:reverse_line_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:02:08+00:00

VCV Next to the applicable line item in the grid to be reversed, click Reverse. * The line item status is updated to V - Order Voided. * The total outstanding amount for the line item is deducted from the Total Outstanding Amount of the purchase order.

general:reverse_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-04T20:40:51+00:00

VCV Click Reverse PO to reverse the selected purchase order. The Total Outstanding Amount (i.,e., amount yet to be liquidated) is reversed. The Status field under Purchase Order Information is updated to Voided/Reversed/Canceled, and the individual line item(s) status is updated to

Review data for September employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-03T20:06:32+00:00

Review data for September employees Log on to current year payroll frequency. - Verify that all applicable data has been updated for all employees who start their contracts in September. Please refer to the Before You Begin section of this guide for items to review.

Review data for September employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-23T19:23:57+00:00

Review data for September employees Log on to the CYR payroll frequency. Verify that all applicable data has been updated for all employees with a September contract. Refer to the Before You Begin section of this guide to review the Payroll Verification Items

general:reviewreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T19:29:26+00:00

Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page. Click [Previous Page Button] to go back one page. Click [Next Page Button] to go forward one page. Click [Last Page Buton] to go to the last page.

Correct out-of-balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-23T16:50:08+00:00

Correct out-of-balances Log on to file ID 5. Finance > Utilities > Out of Balance Correction After the opening balances have been posted in file ID 5, correct any out-of-balance occurrences. If there are no out-of-balance occurrences, continue to the next step. This utility is designed to locate out-of-balance accounts in the End-of-Month (

Correct out-of-balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-09-23T19:02:20+00:00

Correct out-of-balances Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Out of Balance Correction After the opening balances have been posted in file ID C, correct any out-of-balance occurrences. This utility is designed to locate out-of-balance accounts in the End-of-Month (EOM), current, and next accounting periods.

Carry forward end balance sheet account balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-23T16:51:19+00:00

Carry forward end balance sheet account balances Log on to file ID 5. Finance > Utilities > Fiscal Year Processing > Create New Accounts by Fund Skip this step if you prefer to manually enter opening entries. Carry forward the ending balance sheet account balances from file ID 5 to file ID C. This step will copy the accounts and balances to file ID C. If the account already exists, it will not recreate the account but instead will add the amount to the balance that exists in the account for…

Correct out-of-balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-18T19:26:19+00:00

Correct out-of-balances Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Out of Balance Correction Use the Out of Balance Correction page to view and correct any out-of-balance occurrences after the opening balances have been posted in file ID C. [Out of Balance Correction] This utility is designed to locate out-of-balance accounts in the End-of-Month (

Perform an export

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-06-23T16:47:40+00:00

Perform an export Log on to file ID 5. Finance > Utilities > Export by File ID Perform an export prior for file IDs 5 and C. [Export By File ID] VCV Select file IDs 5 and C and move to the right side of the page. VCV Click Execute to execute the process. A message is displayed indicating that you are about to export Finance tables.

Print and review Finance reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-05T18:40:27+00:00

Print and review Finance reports Log on to file ID C. Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > FIN1150 - General Journal Generate this report with the JV number used in Step 3 to verify account balances. For example, this document used JV number OPENBA as seen in the following image. [FIN1150 - General Journal] Finance > Reports > Finance Reports > Journals, Checks, Detail Ledgers > FIN1400 - Detail General Ledger Generate this report to verify account bala…

general:roundtothenearestdollar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-12-13T15:19:45+00:00

Select if all calculations are to be rounded during the simulation. If not selected, exact calculated amounts are displayed.

general:rp20extract_child_nutrition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-06-07T14:12:56+00:00

VCV Select Regular Payroll (RP20) Extract to extract regular payroll data. Maximum Days WorkedType the actual number of days worked in the reporting period month.Maximum Hours Worked Type the actual number of hours worked in the reporting period month.

general:rp20extract_payrollcalculationnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-12T16:16:50+00:00

During payroll calculations, absence deductions and coded absence deductions are allocated to the selected job when processing dock amounts that affect the state minimum salary. Leave Docks are allocated based on the percent assigned to the jobs, which may cause differences in the TRS 373 and TRS Non-OASDI calculations if the employee has multiple jobs.

general:rp20info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-13T19:09:06+00:00

Extracts employee compensation and contribution information for the selected reporting period. * Multiple RP20 records should be submitted for an employee with multiple TRS position codes; one RP20 for each TRS position code. If the various jobs fall within the same position code, only one RP20 record should be submitted per position code.

Run Payroll Guide

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-28T17:23:29+00:00

Run Payroll Guide

general:run_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-30T19:43:57+00:00

Type the one-digit run type code. Or, select one of the following from the drop-down list. BBB 2 - Finance EFT file BBB 3 - Finance Prenote EFT file

Correct out-of-balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-09-23T19:01:19+00:00

Correct out-of-balances Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Out of Balance Correction In the current file ID (soon to be historical file ID), correct any out-of-balance occurrences. If there are no out-of-balance occurrences, continue to the next step. This utility is designed to locate out-of-balance accounts in the End-of-Month (

Correct out-of-balances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-09-23T19:03:39+00:00

Correct out-of-balances Log on to file ID C. Finance > Utilities > Out of Balance Correction In the new current file ID, correct any out-of-balance occurrences. If there are no out-of-balance occurrences, continue to the next step. This utility is designed to locate out-of-balance accounts in the End-of-Month (

general:runpayroll_example

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-05T21:57:55+00:00

You printed checks 000100 -000120, and check numbers 000115 and 000117 did not print correctly. You cannot reprint only check numbers 000115 and 000117. Therefore, check numbers 000115-000120 must be reprinted. To assign new check numbers for checks 000115-000120, do the following:

Process Payroll Quick Checklist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-19T20:20:12+00:00

Process Payroll Quick Checklist [printer icon] Click here to generate a PDF of this checklist. Step1.Verify payroll frequency.2.Verify pay dates.3.Add or update employee information.4.(If applicable) Create and send prenote file.5.Report new hires to the Office of the Attorney General of Texas.6.Import or manually enter employee and substitute leave.

general:safeharbor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-11-12T17:17:15+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the Section 4980H safe harbor employer relief code that applied to the employee. If the same safe harbor code applied to the employee for all 12 calendar months, select the applicable code in the All drop-down field. If different safe harbor codes applied to the employee throughout the 12 calendar months, select the applicable codes in the respective month (

general:safeharborcodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-11-30T16:48:33+00:00

2A - Employee not employed on any day of the month 2B - Employee not a full-time employee for the month and did not enroll in coverage 2C - Employee enrolled in coverage offered 2D - Employee was in a Limited Non-Assessment Period 2E - Multiemployer interim rule relief

general:salarysimulationoverview_deductions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:23:35+00:00

This tab is used to designate estimated employee and employer annual amounts for deductions. PMIS does not use the next year Staff Job/Pay Data; therefore, employee deductions are not available for budgeting. Vacant positions can also be included in the simulation.

general:salarysimulationoverview_deletesimulations

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:19:19+00:00

This tab is used to delete simulation tables. The Delete Simulations tab is not a required step in the simulation process. You must be logged on to a next year pay frequency to access this utility. Prior to using this utility, create an export using the

general:salarysimulationoverview_extraduty

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:22:53+00:00

This tab is used to automatically reference the correct extra duty salary for employees based on their extra duty codes. This table can be utilized to alter simulations for those pay rates for part-time functions required at each campus or LEA (e.g., Cheerleader Sponsor, and UIL events).

general:salarysimulationoverview_firstpaydatecodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T15:20:43+00:00

This tab is used to designate positions to be included in the simulation based on first pay date codes. You must be logged on to a next year pay frequency to access this utility. Set up first pay date codes: FieldDescriptionSimulation NameType the name of a simulation or click

general:salarysimulationoverview_fundfiscalyrexclusions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T15:21:16+00:00

This tab allows you to designate which funds should not be included in updates to budget (if Update Budget is selected on the Position Management > Utilities > Salary Simulation > Simulation Options tab). If no funds are selected, all funds are available for the update. You must be logged on to a next year pay frequency to access this utility.

general:salarysimulationoverview_hourlydaily

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:21:19+00:00

This tab is used to automatically reference the correct hourly/daily salary for positions, based on their pay grade, pay step, max days employed, and local schedule code. This table can then be utilized to alter simulations for those positions, such as teachers, paraprofessionals, maintenance, bus drivers, and other jobs as maintained by the district.

general:salarysimulationoverview_localannual

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T15:21:30+00:00

This tab is used to automatically reference the correct annual salary for employees, based on their pay grade, pay step, max days employed, and local schedule code. This table can be utilized to alter simulations for those employees, such as teaching staff, whose pay is based on an annual amount with step increases for years of service.

general:salarysimulationoverview_midpoint

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:22:09+00:00

This tab is used to manage the pay rates for hourly, noncontract employees, and contract employees not covered under the Annual or Hourly/Daily salary tables. Midpoint Salary Schedule Set up midpoint salary data: FieldDescriptionSimulation NameType the name of a simulation or click

general:salarysimulationoverview_simulationoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T15:20:23+00:00

The Salary Simulation menu is only available when logged on to a next year pay frequency. Create an export using Utilities > Export PMIS Tables prior to using this tab. This tab is used to create a forecast position salary simulation and to select the parameters associated with the simulation.

general:salarysimulationoverview_updatesalarytables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-15T16:24:12+00:00

This tab is used to select the simulation records to update the next year salary data. All simulations that will be updated in the next year tables need to be updated at one time. Once the update process has been completed, the process is disabled until the Copy CYR Tables to NYR Tables process is completed again.

general:samplepayrolldistreport_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:47:24+00:00

general:samplepayrolldistreport

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:15:28+00:00

general:sampletrs373onbehalf_monthlypayrollgeneralfund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T18:06:30+00:00

general:sampletrs373onbehalf_monthlypayrollsplitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T18:02:19+00:00

general:save_report_template

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-14T15:57:25+00:00

Click to save the report template.

Title of the Page

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2016-10-14T18:27:27+00:00

Title of the Page Save your work by...

general:schoolyearforpeimscodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-21T16:44:02+00:00

Type the school year for the PEIMS edit tables in the YYYY format. Note: If the School Year for PEIMS Codes field does not contain a valid value or if left blank, values are not displayed in the PEIMS drop-down fields (e.g., Sex, Ethnicity, etc.) on the

general:schoolytddataintro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-14T14:12:57+00:00

This page is used to access and maintain the payroll year-to-date totals for individual employees including accrual data and accrued days worked by job code. The page is divided into three data groups: Payroll Data, Accrued Data, and Workers' Comp Data. Although the fields are populated as payroll is processed, you can change school YTD records.

Select Insurance Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:41:34+00:00

Select Insurance Codes The Insurance Codes lookup is used to select one or more insurance codes. Select an insurance code: * The insurance codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific insurance code, begin typing the insurance code or description in the

Select Bank Account Group Code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-25T20:29:21+00:00

Select Bank Account Group Code The Bank Account Group lookup is used to search for and select a bank account group code(s). Select a bank account group code(s): * The bank account group codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific bank account group code, begin typing the bank account group code in the

Select Bank Account Group Code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-25T19:08:52+00:00

Select Bank Account Group Code The Bank Account Group lookup is used to search for and select a bank account group code. Select a bank account group code: * The bank account group codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific bank account group code, begin typing the bank account group code in the

Select Bid Category

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:39:48+00:00

Select Bid Category The Bid Categories lookup is used to select one or more bid category codes. Select a bid category: * The bid category codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific bid category code, begin typing the bid category code or description in the

Select Bid Number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:39:02+00:00

Select Bid Number The Bid Numbers lookup is used to select one or more bid numbers. Select a bid number: * The bid numbers are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific bid number, begin typing the bid number or reference description in the

Select Bid Status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:38:27+00:00

Select Bid Status The Bid Status lookup is used to select one or more Bid statuses. Select a Bid status: * The Bid status codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific Bid status code, begin typing the code in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the Bid status codes that contain the numbers or characters that you have typed.

Select Bid Vendor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:25:07+00:00

Select Bid Vendor The Bid Vendors lookup is used to select one or more bid vendors. Select a bid vendor: * The vendors are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific vendor number, begin typing the vendor number, name, or sort key in the

Select Budget Report Levels

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T17:07:29+00:00

Select Budget Report Levels 1. Select Requested, Recommended, and/or Approved to include these budget levels in the report. You may select one, two, or all three levels in any combination. 2. Click OK to accept the selection and return to the report parameters, or click

Select Buyer

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:24:13+00:00

Select Buyer The Bid Buyers lookup is used to select one or more bid buyers. Select a bid buyer: * The buyers are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific bid buyer, begin typing the vendor number or name in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the buyers that contain the numbers or characters that you have typed.

Select a Campus

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:23:32+00:00

Select a Campus The Campuses lookup is used to select one or more campus IDs. Select a campus: * The campus IDs are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific campus, begin typing the campus ID or description in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the campus IDs that contain the characters that you have typed.

Select Capital Projects Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:22:43+00:00

Select Capital Projects Fund The Capital Projects Funds lookup is used to select a capital projects fund(s). Select a capital projects fund(s): * The capital projects funds(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific capital projects fund, begin typing the capital projects fund/yr or description in the

Select Columns to Print

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-09T22:50:12+00:00

Select Columns to Print The Please Select Columns to Print lookup is used to select budget columns to print. Select columns to print: * By default, all columns are selected. Clear any columns you do not want to include on the report. * Click OK

Select Condition Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:21:48+00:00

Select Condition Codes The Condition Codes lookup is used to select one or more condition codes. Select a condition code: * The condition codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific condition code, begin typing the condition code or description in the

Select Contract Type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:20:39+00:00

Select Contract Type The Contract Types lookup is used to select one or more contract types. Select a contract type: * The contract types are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific contract type, begin typing the contract type or description in the

Select Created by User ID(s)

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-08-11T19:50:53+00:00

Select Created by User ID(s) The Created by User ID(s) lookup is used to select one or more user IDs. Select a created by user ID: * The user IDs are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific user ID, begin typing the user ID in the

Select Customers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:10:52+00:00

Select Customers The Customers lookup is used to select one or more customer numbers. Select a customer: * The customer numbers are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific customer, begin typing the customer name or number in the

Select Debt Service Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:19:30+00:00

Select Debt Service Fund The Debt Service Funds lookup is used to select a debt service fund(s). Select a debt service fund(s): * The debt service funds(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific debt service fund, begin typing the debt service fund/yr or description in the

Select Departments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:19:55+00:00

Select Departments The Departments lookup is used to select one or more departments. Select a department: * The departments are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific department, begin typing the department code or description in the

Select Function

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:20:15+00:00

Select Function The Function lookup is used to select a function(s). Select a function(s): * The functions(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific function, begin typing the function or description name in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the function(s) that contain the numbers or characters you have typed.

Select Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:21:07+00:00

Select Fund The Funds lookup is used to select funds/year(s). Select a fund: * The fund/yr(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific fund, begin typing the fund/yr or description name in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the fund/yr(s) that contain the numbers or characters you have typed.

Select Funds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:21:21+00:00

Select Funds The Funds lookup is used to select one or more funds. Select a fund: * The funds are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific fund, begin typing the fund or description in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the funds that contain the characters that you have typed.

Select Gain Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:21:34+00:00

Select Gain Codes The Gain Codes lookup is used to select one or more gain codes. Select a gain code: * The gain codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific gain code, begin typing the gain code or description in the Search

Select General Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:22:07+00:00

Select General Fund The General Funds lookup is used to select a general fund(s). Select a general fund(s): * The general funds(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific general fund, begin typing the general fund/yr or description in the

Select Governmental Exp Trust Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:22:30+00:00

Select Governmental Exp Trust Fund The Governmental Exp Trust Funds lookup is used to select a governmental exp trust fund(s). Select a governmental exp trust fund(s): * The governmental exp trust funds(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific governmental exp trust fund, begin typing the governmental exp trust fund/yr or description in the

Select HUB Status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:23:00+00:00

Select HUB Status The HUB Status lookup is used to select one or more HUB statuses. Select a HUB status: * The HUB status codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific HUB status code, begin typing the code in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the HUB status codes that contain the numbers or characters that you have typed.

Select Invoice Status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T13:51:55+00:00

Select Invoice Status The Invoice Statuses pop-up window lists additional invoices that may be included with the original invoice. Invoices are selected using individual checkboxes. At least one invoice option must be selected. * Select VCV next to the invoice(s) you want to include.

Select Item Number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:23:17+00:00

Select Item Number The Items lookup is used to select one or more item numbers. Select an item number: * The item numbers are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific item number, begin typing the item number or reference description in the

Select Item Numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:23:45+00:00

Select Item Numbers The Inventory lookup is used to select item numbers. Select an item number: The item numbers are listed in ascending order. To search for a specific item number, begin typing data in the available search fields and click Search

Select Object

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:23:59+00:00

Select Object The Objects lookup is used to select an object(s). Select an object: * The object(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific object, begin typing the object code or description name in the Search field. The list is automatically filtered to display the objects that contain the numbers or characters you have typed.

Select Organization Code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:24:52+00:00

Select Organization Code The Organization Codes lookup is used to select one or more organization codes. Select an organization code: * The organization codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific organization code, begin typing the organization code or description in the

Select Organization

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:24:32+00:00

Select Organization The Organization lookup is used to select an organization(s). Select an organization: * The organization(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific organization, begin typing the organization code or description name in the

Select Program Intent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:19:03+00:00

Select Program Intent The Program Intents lookup is used to select a program intent code(s). Select a program intent: * The program intent(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific program intent, begin typing the program intent code or description name in the

Select Property Classes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:18:20+00:00

Select Property Classes The Property Classes lookup is used to select one or more property classes. Select a property class: * The property classes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific property class, begin typing the property class or reference description in the

Select Purchase Orders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:18:02+00:00

Select Purchase Orders The Purchase Orders lookup is used to select one or more purchase orders. Select a purchase order: * The purchase orders are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific purchase order, begin typing the purchase order number in the

Select Receiving Address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:17:39+00:00

Select Receiving Address The Receiving Addresses lookup is used to select one or more receiving addresses. Select a receiving address: * The receiving addresses are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific receiving address, begin typing the receiving address, description, or campus ID in the

Select Requestors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:17:02+00:00

Select Requestors The Requestors lookup is used to select a requestor(s). Select a requestor: * The requestors are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific requestor, begin typing the requestor name or employee number in the Search

Select Requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:18:37+00:00

Select Requisitions The Requisitions lookup is used to select one or more requisitions. Select a requisition: * The requisitions are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific requisition, begin typing the requisition number in the

Select Room Numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:18:50+00:00

Select Room Numbers The Room Numbers lookup is used to select one or more room numbers. Select a room number: * The room numbers are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific room number, begin typing the room number or description in the

Select Simulation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:19:15+00:00

Select Simulation The Simulations lookup is used to select simulations(s). Select a simulation: * The simulation(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific simulation, begin typing the simulation name or description in the Search

Select Special Revenue Fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:38:13+00:00

Select Special Revenue Fund The Special Revenue Funds lookup is used to select a special revenue fund(s). Select a special revenue fund(s): * The special revenue funds(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific special revenue fund, begin typing the special revenue fund/yr or description in the

Select Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:38:49+00:00

Select Codes The Status Codes lookup is used to select status codes. Select a status code: The status codes are listed in ascending order. To search for a specific status code, begin typing data Search field. The list displays the status codes that matched what you have typed.

Select Sub Object

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:39:18+00:00

Select Sub Object The Sub Objects lookup is used to select a subobject(s). Select a subobject: * The subobject(s) are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific subobject, begin typing the subobject code or description name in the

Select Travel Numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-23T17:09:16+00:00

Select Travel Numbers The Travel lookup is used to select one or more travel numbers. Select a travel number: Click Search to retrieve all available travel numbers. OR Use the following search fields to search for travel numbers: Travel Req NbrType a travel request number.

Select Vendors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:34:52+00:00

Select Vendors The Vendors lookup is used to select one or more vendors. Select a vendor: Click Search to retrieve all available vendors. OR Use the following search fields to search for a specific vendor: Sort KeyType a vendor sort key.Vendor Name

Select Status Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:39:34+00:00

Select Status Codes The Status Codes lookup is used to select one or more status codes. Select a status code: * The status codes are listed in ascending order. * To search for a specific campus code, begin typing the campus ID or description in the

general:select_a_student

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-20T21:15:50+00:00

The following receiving options selected on the Options > Purchasing Options page in District Administration determine how information is displayed as well as if certain requisition items can be received on this page. * If Use Blind Receiving is selected, order quantities are not shown on this page.

general:select_accounting_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T20:04:54+00:00

VCV Under Accounting Period, select the general ledger period in which to post. Field Description CurrentSelected by default if Current Accounting Period Close is not selected on the District Finance Options > Accounting Periods tab. NextSelected by default if

general:select_available_amendment_nbrs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-15T20:07:23+00:00

Under Amendment Nbrs Available, if the Note button is italicized, an amendment note exists for the amendment transaction. VCV Click Note to display the notes. The amendment notes cannot be modified. VCV Use the following buttons to select which amendment numbers to place under Post to General Ledger:

general:select_check_signature

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-22T19:10:10+00:00

Click Check Signatures. A pop-up window opens. Note: The signature files are maintained on the Tables > Electronic Signatures page in District Administration. * The Please choose signature style field is set to the 2 Line Signature by default. Click

Select Copy to Print

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-05-31T21:31:02+00:00

Select Copy to Print The Copy to Print pop-up is used to select the labels to be printed. Select a label(s) to print: * Select any combination of Print Label 1 through Print Label 5 to be included on the report * Click OK to accept the selection and return to the report parameters page, or click

general:select_credit_card_transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:23:35+00:00

VendorBegin typing the vendor name or number for which you want to reconcile credit card transactions. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor number or name, and click Retrieve. Only active credit card vendors that are in use by a transaction are displayed in the drop-down list.

Select Difference Report Columns

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T17:13:55+00:00

Select Difference Report Columns This is a required field. You must choose one amount for each column of the report from the lists or type N for none. * Click one column title from which to create an appropriation report. * Click OK to accept the selection and return to the report parameters, or click

Include Reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T17:18:17+00:00

Include Reports The Include Reports window lists additional specialty reports that can be included with the original report. * Select the check box next to the reports to be included. Report check boxes that are disabled indicate that report data is not available for that report.

Invoice Status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:16:57+00:00

Invoice Status The Invoice Statuses pop-up window is used to select one or more invoice statuses. Select an invoice status: * Select All Printed to include all printed invoices on the report. Or, select any combination of the following: * Pending Payments

general:select_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-07T19:27:54+00:00

Capture As Original BudgetSelect if the posting needs to be captured in the original budget. The entries being posted will change the original budget values currently seen on the Budget Amendment > Budget Amendment Maintenance page for those accounts being changed.

general:select_purchase_authorization

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-03T16:27:04+00:00

PA NumberType the purchase authorization number to retrieve. Leading zeros are not required.Vendor NumberType the vendor number to retrieve. Leading zeros are not required. If the purchase authorization number is not known, click Directory. Type data in one of the following search fields, and click

general:select_purchase_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:59:18+00:00

PO NumberType the purchase order number to retrieve. Leading zeros are not required.Vendor NumberType the vendor number to retrieve. Leading zeros are not required. If the purchase authorization number is not known, click Directory. Type data in one of the following search fields, and click

Select Report Column

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T17:10:53+00:00

Select Report Column This is a required field. You must choose one amount for the report column from this list or type N for none in the Value field. * Click one column title from which to create an appropriation report. * Click OK to accept the selection and return to the report parameters, or click

Select Signature

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:02:36+00:00

Select Signature Click PO Signature. A pop-up window opens. * The Please choose signature style field is set to the 2 Line Signature by default. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to display a drop-down list with both the 2 Line Signature and 3 Line Signature options. * Select

general:select

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-09T20:33:22+00:00

Select an employee leave transmittal row for the mass update process. Use one of the following methods to select a group of employees: To select multiple rows when the employees are consecutive, select an employee to start at, and then press and hold SHIFT while selecting an employee to end the selection process.

general:selfservicedemoapprover

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-12-17T15:28:05+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the user ID of the person authorized to approve data changes in the category displayed. Notes: The Approver ID field or the Auto check box must be completed; one is required. If Auto is selected, the Approver ID field remains blank and is disabled.

general:selfservicedemoauto

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-13T18:03:42+00:00

Select to allow users to automatically update the information listed in the category without requiring approval. Notes: The Approver ID field or the Auto check box must be completed; one is required. If Auto is selected, the Approver ID field remains blank and is disabled.

general:selfservicedemooption

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:23:12+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the code to determine if data can be updated, viewed, or not displayed at all on the EmployeePortal Self-Service Profile page. U - Update - The user can submit changes to all information listed in the category. I - Inquiry - The user can only view the information listed in the category and cannot submit changes.

general:servicerecord_paytype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-28T14:08:04+00:00

Type the pay type(s) to be included separating multiple pay types with a comma (e.g., 1, 2) or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select one or more pay types. If blank, all pay types (including substitutes) are included. Notes: If a substitute is a certified teacher and they substitute for at least 90 days, it is possible for them to earn a year of service credit.

Years of Service Notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-09-29T14:04:11+00:00

Years of Service Notes 1. On TEA's website, the Salary and Service FAQ's page clarifies how data is displayed on the service record. Question: My service record shows ‘0’ for my first year of service even though I have completed that first year. Why isn’t it changed to a ‘1’?

Years of Service Notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-07-23T14:42:50+00:00

Review the following information: WARNING: The Extract Teacher Service Record page retrieves the employee's contract begin/end dates from the Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info tab to create the service record, which means that service records must be extracted before new contract information is entered for the current year or rolled in from next year, and prior to updating the

Verify leave type descriptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-24T18:17:03+00:00

Verify leave type descriptions Payroll > Tables > Leave > Leave Type Description Verify that the leave types and descriptions are accurate. State Leave (whether the old State Sick and/or the State Personal) must exist in this table. [Leave Type Descriptions Tab]

Select bank reconciliation options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T14:35:40+00:00

Select bank reconciliation options Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Options [Bank Reconciliation Options] This page is used to set a bank reconciliation option, which is used on the Bank Reconciliation page. Set option: VCV Under Options: Field Description All Computer Checks to Finance Clearing Fund

general:set_the_standard_workday

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T18:36:15+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District HR Options In the Standard Hours per Workday field, type the standard number of hours that the LEA requires hourly employees to work. [District HR Options Page]

general:set_up_a_bank_account_group_fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-26T19:35:14+00:00

Field Description Group Code Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a bank account group code from the list. All fund codes and years that exist for the group code are displayed. VCV Click +Add to add a fund to the selected group code.

Set up the bank account group table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T14:55:41+00:00

Set up the bank account group table Bank Reconciliation > Tables > Bank Account Fund Groups > Bank Account Group [Bank Account Group] This tab is used to manage bank account group codes that are used for bank reconciliation, positive pay, and auto bank reconciliation. Each bank account group has fund codes and fund years associated with that group.

general:set_up_supervisor_and_temporary_approver_profiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T18:26:51+00:00

Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information VCV Create an employee record. The record cannot be a non-employee record created in District Administration. VCV Add an email address to the employee record to allow the supervisor or temporary approver to receive automatic reply and workflow emails.

general:setup_district_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-08-09T20:09:05+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options [District EP Options ] VCV Under Enable, select Leave Request to enable the leave request feature in EmployeePortal. VCV Under Messages, select Leave Request to enable employees to view a preset message on the Leave Requests page in EmployeePortal. * Type the applicable message in the text box.

Set up District Administration purchasing options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-02-12T19:40:43+00:00

Set up District Administration purchasing options District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse > Current Year Select the applicable options to set up purchasing tables and files for the current year. These options enable the LEA to determine how receiving is used, if requisition/purchase order numbers are automatically assigned, and if payable transactions are automatically created on the

Set up Finance purchasing options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-17T15:33:18+00:00

Set up Finance purchasing options Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Finance Options Under Purchasing Options, complete the following fields: [District Finance Options With Purchasing Options] PO Object Code Restriction Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the allowed range of object codes to be used on requisitions. Only account codes with object codes in the selected range are allowed.

general:setup_leavecampuses

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-05T21:40:18+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > Leave Campuses Use this page to manage a list of available campuses when using the Leave Request feature in EmployeePortal. Employees must be assigned to a Leave Campus in order to access the Leave Requests menu in the EmployeePortal.

Add receiving addresses

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:26:27+00:00

Add receiving addresses District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Addresses Add user receiving addresses. Only one address can be selected as the default receiving address. The Purchasing Address Directory is populated with the addresses that are established on the District Administration > Tables > Receiving Addresses page. [District Administration User Profile Purchasing Addresses Tab] VCV Click +Add to add a row. The Purchasing Address Directory is displayed.

Set up purchasing credit card data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:28:05+00:00

Set up purchasing credit card data District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Credit Cards If your LEA uses the credit card functionality and has existing credit card codes on the Finance > Tables > Credit Card Codes tab, you can assign those credit card codes to individual users. This allows users to select from a list of active and assigned credit card codes when entering requisitions on the

Set up purchasing permissions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:34:21+00:00

Set up purchasing permissions District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Permissions Complete the applicable fields to provide additional purchasing permissions to a user who is authorized to create requisitions, approve requisitions, or inquire about requisitions. [District Admin User Profile Purchasing Permissions Tab] Global AccessSelect to allow the user to view all account codes in reports and inquiries.

Set up purchasing requestors

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:26:54+00:00

Set up purchasing requestors District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Requestors If necessary, you can limit the requestors for whom the user (originator) can create or modify requisitions. The requestor must have a user profile that includes authorized accounts to expense against as well as any approvers who are associated with the requestor.

Set up user profiles

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-20T14:25:33+00:00

Set up user profiles District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Accounts Establish user profiles and assign the accounts to be used in Purchasing. [District Admin User Profile Accounts Tab] VCV Retrieve a user or click Add User to add a user. VCV Enter the accounts to which the user can access. Once the account codes/masks are entered, click

general:setupcommoditycodetable

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-04-27T14:46:32+00:00

District Administration > Tables > Commodity Codes The commodity code table allows you to define “like-types” of items. You have two options to create the commodity code table. 1. Manually add the commodity code data. VCV Click +Add to add a row. Group IDType a group ID to identify a group of

general:setupepwjoptions_admin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-27T16:15:00+00:00

Personnel > Tables > WorkJournal > Admin At this time, this page does not function as intended. This will be corrected with future programming. Add WorkJournal admin users. WorkJournal admin users will have access to view timesheet details in ASCENDER EmployeePortal. Notes: * It is recommended that LEAs set up at least one admin per campus. For example, each campus could set up a payroll clerk to view timesheet details.

general:setupepwjoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-09T16:10:38+00:00

Personnel > Tables > WorkJournal > Options Set up the following WorkJournal options to determine how employees enter their time based on the work week, time conversion table, and pay type when creating WorkJournal entries in EmployeePortal. [EmployeePortal WorkJournal Options] Field

general:setupepwjoptionsforextraduty

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-09T16:37:08+00:00

Personnel > Tables > Salaries > Extra Duty Select the following to identify which extra duties will use standard overtime rates and be displayed for WorkJournal in EmployeePortal. [Extra Duty WorkJournal Options] Use for ST OTSelect to indicate that the extra duty code will use the standard overtime rate in WorkJournal. This field is only enabled for S-type extra duty codes and can only be selected for one S-type extra duty code.

general:setupepwjoptionsforjobcodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-26T14:38:17+00:00

Personnel > Tables > Job/Contract > Job Codes Use the following options to identify how employees with certain job codes enter their time and how their time is calculated for WorkJournal entries in EmployeePortal. [Job Code WorkJournal Options] Time OptionClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the time option to be used for WorkJournal in EmployeePortal.

(Optional) Set up grant type payment dates

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:57:26+00:00

(Optional) Set up grant type payment dates Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Grants > Payment Dates Set up a list of cut-off dates and expected payment dates for each grant type. These dates are for informational purposes only. The payment cut-off date is displayed for the grant type in MemberPortal to remind member LEAs of the fiscal agent's cut-off date.

Set up grant types

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T14:48:40+00:00

Set up grant types Grants and Projects > Tables > SSA Grants > Grant Types Set up a list of grant types and descriptions that can be used to facilitate the appropriate workflows and member notifications for each grant. Grant types are tied to a Grant ID and Member on the Grant Maintenance page. Grant types cannot be changed once they are in use; however, grant descriptions can be changed at any time.

general:setuptravelacctperiod

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T16:43:19+00:00

Finance > Tables > District Finance Options > Accounting Periods Verify that the travel accounting period is accurate. [Accounting Periods Tab] Travel Accounting PeriodType the Travel accounting period. The field is a two-digit number from 01-12. The period can be the same as the current accounting period or the next accounting posting period.

general:setuptraveldefinelocations

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T18:52:03+00:00

Finance > Tables > Travel > Locations Define a list of travel locations. These locations can be used on the Finance > Tables > Travel > Distances tab to predefine a list of distances between to/from travel locations. If the Location Locking feature is enabled on the Finance > Tables > District Finance Options 2 page, the Mileage (Start, Stop, and Map) fields, Point of Origin

general:setuptraveldistrictoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-27T13:31:43+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options Set up the following EP options to allow employees to view the Travel Reimbursement Request menu in EmployeePortal. [EP Options Travel Enabled] VCV Under Enable, select Travel Reimbursement Request to enable the travel reimbursement request feature in EmployeePortal.

general:setuptravelfinanceoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T18:44:19+00:00

Finance > Tables > District Finance Options 2 Set up the appropriate parameters to be used for the LEA's travel reimbursement requests. [District Finance Options 2] FieldDescriptionNext Available Travel Request Number Type the next available travel request number. Or, click the Next Available Travel Request Number link to automatically populate the field with the last travel request number plus one.

general:setupworkjournaltoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-09T15:57:56+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options Set up the following EP options to allow employees to view the WorkJournal menu in EmployeePortal. [District EP Options] VCV Under Enable, select WorkJournal to enable the WorkJournal request feature in EmployeePortal. VCV Under Messages, select WorkJournal to enable employees to view a preset message on the WorkJournal page in EmployeePortal.

general:show_details

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-05T20:15:27+00:00

Select to display and print a detailed list of all transactions. If not selected, a summary for all accounts is displayed and printed: Totals - The totals of all accounts with the selected account code component are displayed. Balance Accts Only - The totals for only the accounts that are selected in the account code mask are displayed.

general:signature_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-14T13:45:30+00:00

Type the name of the signature to be displayed across the applications. BBB Click Browse to open the Import window. BBB Select the desired file and click Open to select the signature file. You can import a .bmp, .jpeg, .jpg, gif., or .png file.

general:sort_by_alpha_numeric

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-17T18:38:10+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select to sort vendors by Alpha or Numeric. If Alpha is selected, the checks and EFTs are sorted by the vendor sort key. If Numeric is selected, the checks and EFTs are sorted by the vendor number.

general:sort_columns_available

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-24T20:58:51+00:00

Select the columns by which you want to sort, the columns are highlighted blue. Click [Forward Arrow] to move the selected columns to the right side of under Sort Columns. Continue moving columns to the right grid as needed.

general:sort_columns

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-06T21:11:36+00:00

You can rearrange the columns to indicate the order in which you want the sort applied. Click a column name, and drag it up or down to a new location. In the right grid, for each column, click to indicate if you want that data sorted in ascending (e.g., A-Z, 0-9) or descending (e.g., Z-A, 9-0) order.

general:sort_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T15:45:39+00:00

You can sort data to make it easier to review or find records in the reports. Not all reports allow this option. From the report window, click Sort/Filter to open the Sort/Filter window. By default, the Sort Criteria section is expanded. If not, click

general:sort_grid_data

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:33:41+00:00

You can re-sort the grid by clicking on an underlined column heading. It will sort in ascending order. Click it again to sort in descending order.

general:sort_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:06:19+00:00

You can rearrange the fields to indicate the order in which you want the sort applied. Click a field name, and drag it up or down to a new location. * In the right grid, for each field, click to indicate if you want that data sorted in ascending (e.g., A-Z, 0-9) or descending (e.g., Z-A, 9-0) order.

general:spyglass

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T21:30:49+00:00

Click to view additional details for a selected row.

Staff Extract Automatic Crosswalks

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-11-16T17:15:50+00:00

Staff Extract Automatic Crosswalks If your district maintains staff payroll data in greater detail than the state-mandated level, the detail is summarized to the state-mandated level. The automatic crosswalks in the extract program perform the summarization.

general:staffcredentialcertification

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-05-27T14:35:11+00:00

Certification TypeClick [Ellipsis Icon] to select the one-character code that describes the type of certificate held by the employee. The Certification Type values are maintained on the Personnel > Tables > Credential > Certification Type tab. DateType the date when the employee received the certificate in the MM-DD-YYYY format.

general:staffcredentialeducation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-31T15:53:06+00:00

Field Description CollegeClick [Ellipsis Icon] to select the college that the employee attended. YearType the year the employee received the degree in the YYYY format.MajorClick [Ellipsis Icon] to select the college major for the employee.

general:staffcredentialspecialcredentials

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T15:59:12+00:00

DescriptionType the name of the special credentials that the employee holds. The field can be a maximum of 20 characters.YearType the year that the employee received the special credentials in the YYYY format.Classroom HrsType the number of classroom hours the employee has accrued in the specialty area.

general:staffcredentialspermit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T16:08:35+00:00

Permit TypeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the type of permit that the employee holds.DateType the month and year the employee received the permit in the MMYYYY format.Issue StatusClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the circumstances under which the permit was issued.Ren #Type the number of times TEA has renewed the permit. The field can contain a single digit. If the permit has not been renewed, leave the field blank.

general:staffcredentialspermitarea

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-31T15:53:31+00:00

Role IDClick [Ellipsis Icon] to select the three-digit code that identifies the capacity in which a person serves under the permit indicated. This field is required for all permits.PopulationClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the type of permit that the employee holds.Grade RangeClick

general:staffcredentialteacherallotment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-02T14:57:46+00:00

Allotment Code Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the appropriate teacher (ROLE-ID 087) allotment code. BBB 01 Active National Board Certified Teacher - Indicates that the teacher is an Active National Board Certified Teacher. BBB 02 Active Teacher Incentive Allotment Designation

general:staffdemoworkemail

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T15:20:11+00:00

* .com * .net * .org * .edu * .biz * .tv * .us * .cc * .ws * .bz * .vg * .gov * .ms * .tc * .gs * .info * .name

general:staffsalarypositiondefinitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-07-02T20:43:16+00:00

Employees are categorized on the report by the FSP code associated with their job code on the Job Codes table. FSP codes: A - Administrator C - Counselor L - Librarian N - Registered nurse T - Class teacher To categorize the employees, the program looks at the latest payroll date for the report month being queried and the job code that was associated with the last payroll date in that month. Only the primary job extracts. Extra duty jobs do not extract.

general:standard_gross_cd

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-05-10T21:08:37+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select whether pay from the extra duty position is considered supplemental pay or is part of the employee's standard gross pay. If S is selected, the amount is recorded as supplemental salary in the employee’s calendar, school, and TRS YTD records. (TRS YTD is based on the expense 373 selection for the transmittal.) The resulting distribution history record is created as an S type.

general:startingbankcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-08-12T13:42:52+00:00

Type the starting bank code from which you want to retrieve data.

general:startingcategorycode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-05T14:30:10+00:00

Type the beginning category code from which you want to retrieve. Click Retrieve. A list of category codes equal to and greater than the entered starting category code is displayed.

general:startingcreditcardcode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-08T19:54:10+00:00

Type the starting credit card code from which you want to retrieve data. Click Retrieve. A list of credit card codes equal to and greater than the entered starting credit card code is displayed.

general:startingfund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-08T19:50:56+00:00

Type the starting fund from which you want to retrieve data. Click Retrieve. A list of fund codes equal to and greater than the entered starting fund is displayed.

general:state_matching_calculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:33:25+00:00

5. State Matching Calculation Eligible TRS Salary - New Member Waiting Period (90 Days) x TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%) = State Matching Eligible TRS Salary minus New Member Waiting Period (90 Days)multiplied by TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%)

general:stateinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-28T17:46:49+00:00

The Personnel > Tables > Salaries > State Minimum tab must be completed in order to populate state minimum calculations. State StepType the state step that the employee has earned based on years of service. State step does not include Career Ladder. ASCENDER does not support Career Ladder as it is no longer required.

general:statematchcalc_monthlypayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-03-03T14:27:22+00:00

State Matching Calculation Eligible TRS Salary x TRS Rates (District 8.25% + TRS-Care 1.25%) = State Matching Eligible TRS Salary by payrollmultiplied by TRS Rates (District 8.25% + TRS-Care 1.25%)State Matching$3,000.00x .09500= $285.00

general:statematchcalc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:04:54+00:00

State Matching Calculation Eligible TRS Salary x TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%) = State Matching Eligible TRS Salarymultiplied by TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%)State Matching$36,000.00x .07644= $2,751.84

general:statematchingcalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:53:20+00:00

State Matching Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund/Number of Annual Payments = Monthly Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll C. Monthly Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll x TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%) =

general:statematchingcalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:30:38+00:00

State Matching Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund x TRS Rates (District 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%) = State Matching Note: State Matching is not calculated on any fund with a grant code.

general:statement_type

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-19T14:22:55+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to assign a calculated amount or allow for user entry.

general:statement_type2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:02:12+00:00

The following statement types are calculated amounts: Cleared Deposits - A total of cash receipts with the Recon checkbox selected is displayed. Outstanding Deposits - A total of cash receipts without the Recon checkbox selected is displayed.

general:statementtype

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:03:30+00:00

Cleared Deposits - Total of cash receipts with the Recon checkbox selected. Cleared Checks - Total of cash receipts with the Recon checkbox selected. Cleared JVs - Total of JVs with the Recon checkbox selected. Banking Fees/Charges - Type the fees/charges from the bank statement.

Delete users

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-18T17:04:33+00:00

Delete users To completely delete a user from Security Administration, complete the following steps in the order in which they are listed: VCV District Administration > Workflow 1. Alternative Approver: Click Clear Row. 2. Approval Rules: Delete the rules for the

general:sub_employee_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:55:42+00:00

Type the substitute's employee number, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the substitute employee name you wish to select. The substitute's name is displayed in the Sub Name field, and all leave associated with the employee's pay date that has not been created with the selected substitute or any other substitute is displayed.

general:subtractfrombalance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-04-11T21:20:26+00:00

By default, Subtract From Balance is selected. This option is often used to track In-Service or Jury Duty absences. If selected, the leave taken is subtracted from the balance and added to the leave used, and docking occurs according to the selection for the leave type on the Leave Rates table.

general:subtypesbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-23T19:33:35+00:00

In the Search field, type Enter the locally assigned substitute type codes and descriptions. Click +Add to add a row. TypeType the two-character code.DescriptionType the description for the substitute type code. The field can be a maximum of 22 characters.

general:suggestedpurhasingaccess

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-26T20:11:30+00:00

Review the suggested minimum access for Purchasing originators and approvers:

general:summarizebenefitsinterface

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-09T22:09:54+00:00

Select to display benefits in a summary format. If not selected, the benefits are displayed in a detail format. If selected, the benefit accounts are collapsed to a zero subobject and the last three digits of the code (e.g., 199-11-6119-01-001-311423 benefit accounts are collapsed to 199-11-6119-00-001-311000).

general:summerschool_beforeyoubegin

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T18:07:39+00:00

Review the following information and/or complete the listed tasks before you begin the TRS and Summer School Payments processing steps. Background information: Summer school payments apply to ANY work that is performed in the summer outside of the employee's normal contract/work agreement and is not subject to the Statutory Minimum.

general:suppl_position_history

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-03-25T13:09:54+00:00

FreqClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a payroll frequency. This is a required field.School YrType the school year in the YYYY format. This is a required field.Extra Duty CodeType an extra duty code, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a code from the Extra Duty Codes lookup. Primary Campus

System Alerts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-12T13:14:19+00:00

System Alerts At the bottom of each page, there is an orange message line that displays any system alerts. Click Hide to hide the message line. The message line will remain hidden as you navigate to other tabs within the same page. The message line will show again if you navigate to a new menu item or when a record is saved.

general:tea_contrib_factor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-08T03:44:47+00:00

Type the number of times (if not one) the TEA state health insurance contribution is to be applied during the current pay period. Example: An employee and spouse are eligible for and participating in the health insurance program, and only one of them receives the TEA state contributions for both in his/her paycheck. So you would enter a 2 in this field for the employee with Y in the

general:teahealthinscontribution

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-15T19:59:23+00:00

VCV Under TEA Health Ins Contribution: Amount Type the amount of the TEA state health insurance contribution (e.g., 75.00). Note: For an employee to be eligible for the TEA health insurance contribution, the employee must have a Y in the Health Insurance Code

general:teahealthinscontributionamount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-01-31T21:23:33+00:00

Type the amount of the TEA state health insurance contribution (e.g., 75.00). Note: For an employee to be eligible for the TEA health insurance contribution, the employee must have a Y in the Health Insurance Code field on the Pay Info tab in Maintenance, must be eligible for TRS (TRS Status Code must be set to 1 in the

general:teahealthinscontributionsobj

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-11T19:18:06+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the subobject code of the account number for the amount to be expensed in the Finance system. Note: If the district does not use one of the pay frequencies, access to these fields is not allowed. If the user does not have security access to a pay frequency, access to these fields is not allowed.

general:test_scores_create_report_directory_user_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-29T18:10:14+00:00

Type all or any part of the user ID that created the template.

general:tia_allotmentcodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-10-13T20:42:09+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the appropriate teacher (ROLE-ID 087) allotment code. BBB 01 Active National Board Certified Teacher - Indicates that the teacher is an Active National Board Certified Teacher. BBB 02 Active Teacher Incentive Allotment Designation

general:toc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-02-06T21:32:41+00:00

Use the Table of Contents to access a page.

general:tocontractbegindate_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-25T15:47:57+00:00

Type the to contract begin date in the MM-DD-YYYY format to specify an ending date range to be used to determine which records should be included in the extract. If this field is populated, the From Contract Begin Date must be populated and vice versa.

general:totals_reconciliation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:07:36+00:00

VCV Click Totals to display the bank reconciliation total fields as defined on the Categories tab. Based on the Categories tab, some of the fields are automatically calculated and cannot be edited. The totals are updated as transactions are selected or cleared. The

general:traeligibility

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-24T21:48:29+00:00

Select to indicate that the teacher works in an academic instructional setting for an average of at least four hours per day. Note: Staff are not required to hold a certificate but must meet the following criteria: * Teach in an academic instructional setting for at least an average of four hours per day (including planning periods).

general:trans_date_pa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-18T15:22:09+00:00

The current system date is displayed by default. If the transaction has not been through end-of-month processing, the date can be modified.

general:trans_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-27T19:31:19+00:00

The current system date is displayed by default, but it can be modified. If it is modified, all new transactions default to the last transaction date that was entered.

Perform transaction maintenance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-24T16:28:32+00:00

Perform transaction maintenance Bank Reconciliation > Maintenance > Bank Transactions > Transaction Maintenance [Bank Reconciliation Transaction Maintenance] This tab is used to create, edit, and delete unreconciled data from the bank reconciliation transactions table. Retrieve data: Field Description Group CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a group code from the drop down. After you select a group code, the associated transactions (

general:transaction_maintenance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-17T14:29:16+00:00

Field Description Group CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a group code from the drop down. After you select a group code, the associated transactions (Cash Receipts, Checks, and Journal Vouchers) are displayed in accordion style sections. The group codes are populated from the Tables > Bank Account Fund Groups > Bank Account Group tab.

general:transfer_transactions_perform_gl_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-15T17:02:20+00:00

Finance > Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry > General Ledger Inquiry Use this page to perform a general ledger inquiry to verify the wire payment amount posted to Finance.

general:trashcan_vendor_information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-04T18:58:51+00:00

Click to delete a vendor name from the bid. The vendor name is highlighted red to indicate that it will be deleted upon saving the record.

general:trashcan

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-04-04T18:59:58+00:00

Click to delete a requisition from the bid. The requisition line item(s) is highlighted red to indicate that it will be deleted upon saving the record. A trashcan icon is displayed for each requisition. You cannot delete a single line item, unless it is the only line item in the requisition.

general:travelaccount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-03T20:43:55+00:00

District Administration > Utilities > Assign Travel Accounts Mass assign account codes by primary campus, department code (optional), and year for employees using the travel reimbursement request feature in EmployeePortal. After running this process, a user profile is created with the assigned account codes for each active person with the primary campus/dept on their Job Info record that matches the selection on this page.

general:traveladdbankinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-15T19:21:10+00:00

Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous Add bank information for the vendor/employee. VCV Under Bank Information: Bank Begin typing a bank code or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. The bank information must exist on the Finance > Tables > Bank Codes tab. Select a bank code. If the bank code or name is not known, click

general:travelcreatevendorrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-02-28T19:11:09+00:00

Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address Create a vendor record for the employee. VCV Click Add. VCV Complete the applicable fields. TIPS: * Under EIN/SSN, the Type must be SSN and the Number must match the employee's SSN on the Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information tab. It is important that this information matches as this is the link between the employee's vendor and demographic record, and determines the availability of the copy bank i…

general:traveldemodistance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T19:01:08+00:00

Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information Indicate the employee's commute distance. This information is used when calculating travel distances for travel reimbursement requests. [Demo Tab Commute Distance] VCV In the Travel Commute Distance field, type the commute distance (the number of miles between the employee's home and assigned work location). Valid values are 0-999.9.

general:traveldistancesbody

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-07-29T15:45:30+00:00

VCV Click +Add to add row. OriginationClick [Ellisis Icon] to open the Location lookup and select a starting location. DestinationClick [Ellisis Icon] to open the Location lookup and select an ending location. DistanceType the number of miles from the Origination (starting) location to the Destination (ending) location.

general:travellocationsbody

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-27T20:50:25+00:00

VCV Click +Add to add a row. Location IDType a unique user-defined location ID. This field can be a maximum of twenty alphanumeric characters. This is a required field. Location NameType a user-defined location name. This field can be a maximum of thirty-five alphanumeric characters. This is a required field.

Location Lookup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-18T16:33:57+00:00

Location Lookup In the Location Search field, begin typing a location ID or name. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a location ID. The Location Lookup closes and the selected location is populated in the originating field.

general:travelsetupdaoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-06T16:38:14+00:00

District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Accounts Create, modify, or delete user profiles as needed. You can allow and/or limit users to certain budget accounts. You can also mass assign travel accounts to user profiles by using the District Administration > Utilities > Assign Travel Accounts utility.

general:travelworkflows

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-06-03T14:35:57+00:00

Use the following pages to set up the applicable approval workflows for Travel Reimbursement: * District Administration > Workflow > First Approver * District Administration > Workflow > Approval Path * District Administration > Workflow > Approval Rules * District Administration > Workflow > Alternate Approver

general:trs_373_district_contribution_calculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:29:23+00:00

3. TRS 373 District Contribution Calculation Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum x TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (6.644%) = TRS 373 District Contribution Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum multiplied by TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (6.644%)

general:trs_month

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-10-31T15:16:09+00:00

Type the month in which the pay date falls. Valid codes are 01-12. If the TRS month is September (09), October (10), November (11), or December (12), the TRS year is the pay date year +1 (e.g., September 2014 payroll is indicated in the pay date table as TRS month of 09, and the TRS year assigned to that payroll is 2014+1=2015; November 2014 payroll is indicated in the pay date table as TRS month of 11, and the TRS year assigned to that payroll is 2014+1=2015).

general:trs_on-behalf_calculation

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-05T21:35:04+00:00

6. TRS On-Behalf Calculation State Matching - TRS 373 District Contribution - New TRS Pension Contribution = TRS On-Behalf State Matchingminus TRS 373 District Contributionminus New TRS Pension ContributionTRS On-Behalf$2,751.84- $157.32- $597.96= $1,996.56

general:trs_processing_delete_pending

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-18T20:00:36+00:00

Select a JV transaction. Click Delete Pending. A warning message is displayed prompting you to continue or cancel. Click OK to delete the selected transaction. A delete successful message is displayed. Click Cancel to return to the Interface tab.

general:trs

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-04-14T15:37:01+00:00

StatusRequired TRS reporting field. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the code indicating the employee's status in regard to having a TRS deposit computed. BBB 1 Eligible BBB 2 Non-eligible BBB 3 Substitute BBB 4 Retirement waived BBB 5 Retired BBB 6 Other (non-eligible)

general:trs373districtcontribcalc_monthlypayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-03-03T14:23:50+00:00

TRS 373 District Contribution Calculation Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum x TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (8.25%) = TRS 373 District Contribution Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimummultiplied by TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (8.25%)

general:trs373districtcontribcalc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:02:25+00:00

TRS 373 District Contribution Calculation Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimum x TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (6.644%) = TRS 373 District Contribution Adjusted TRS Salary above Adjusted State Minimummultiplied by TRS 373 District Contribution Percentage (6.644%)

general:trs373districtcontributioncalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:50:29+00:00

general:trs373districtcontributioncalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:28:07+00:00

TRS 373 Setup

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-04T20:29:09+00:00

TRS 373 Setup This document provides helpful reminders to running successful TRS 373 Statutory Minimum calculations. The values for these calculations should be set prior to running payroll; some can be changed after running payroll. Set HR Tables

general:trsgrantandcareamtcalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:56:27+00:00

TRS Federal Grant and Care Amount Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund/Number of Annual Payments = Monthly Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll C. Monthly Eligible TRS Salary by Fund by Payroll x Federal Grant and Care Percentage (7.644%) =

general:trsgrantandcareamtcalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:39:26+00:00

TRS Federal Grant and Care Amount Calculation A. Eligible TRS Salary x Fund Percentage = Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund B. Annual Eligible TRS Salary by Fund x TRS Rates (Federal 6.644% + TRS-Care 1%) = TRS Federal Grant and Care Amount (A)

general:trsinsurance

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-05T21:46:41+00:00

Type the percent amount of the contribution for the retirees' health insurance program. This is a percentage (e.g., X.XX%). Select Employer Paid if the employer pays the TRS Insurance. IMPORTANT: If your LEA uses this field, be sure that it is selected prior to running a payroll. If it is selected after running a payroll and the RP20 extract is performed, the amount is incorrectly calculated (doubled) on the RP20 extract.

general:trsirssalarycap

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-05T16:16:18+00:00

Type the employee's salary cap. Employees who first became a TRS member on or after September 1, 1996 are subject to the salary cap. For additional information, reference TRS website: . Note: The TRS IRS Salary Cap field only applies to employees reported as active members. When an employee reaches the TRS IRS salary cap amount, any TRS-related amounts (TRS employer care contribution, TRS grant amounts, performance pay amounts, etc.…

general:trsmemberpos

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T19:30:22+00:00

Required TRS reporting field. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the code indicating the employee's classification. This field is required for All employees. BBB 01 - Professional staff BBB 02 - Teacher, librarian BBB 03 - Support staff BBB 04 - Bus driver BBB

general:trsnonoasdi

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-31T15:25:55+00:00

The Public Education Employer Contribution (Previously known as the TRS Non-OASDI Contribution) uses the following calculation: State Minimum Salary x Public Education Employer Contribution Rate = Public Education Employer Contribution. Type the employer's contribution rate (e.g., 1.500%). Effective September 1, 2014, employers who do not contribute to Social Security for TRS-eligible employees will be required to contribute 1.5% of TRS-eligible compensation. If the member’s position is subject…

general:trsonbehalfcalc_monthlypayroll

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-03-03T14:29:10+00:00

TRS On-Behalf Calculation State Matching - TRS 373 District Contribution = TRS On-Behalf State Matchingminus TRS 373 District ContributionTRS On-Behalf$285.00- $21.70= $263.30

general:trsonbehalfcalc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T16:06:06+00:00

TRS On-Behalf Calculation State Matching - TRS 373 District Contribution = TRS On-Behalf State Matchingminus TRS 373 District ContributionTRS On-Behalf$2,751.84- $209.70= $2,542.14

general:trsonbehalgcalc_monthlypayroll_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:59:52+00:00

TRS On-Behalf Calculation State Matching - TRS 373 District Contribution for General Fund (161) = TRS On-Behalf (Fund 161) State Matching (Fund 161)minus TRS 373 District Contribution for General Fund (161)TRS On-Behalf (Fund 161)$114.66- $8.74 (1)=

general:trsonbehalgcalc_splitfunds

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-01-03T17:59:32+00:00

TRS On-Behalf Calculation State Matching (Fund 161) - TRS 373 District Contribution for General Fund (161) = TRS On-Behalf State Matching (Fund 161)minus TRS 373 District Contribution for General Fund (161)TRS On-Behalf (Fund 161)$1,375.92- $104.85 (1)

general:trspositioncode

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T19:40:35+00:00

Click [Drop Down Arrow] to select the applicable TRS member position code: BBB 01 - Professional staff BBB 02 - Teacher, librarian BBB 03 - Support staff BBB 04 - Bus driver BBB 05 - FT nurse/Counselor BBB 06 - Peace Officers BBB 07 - Food service worker BBB

general:trsprocessing_employee_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:48:45+00:00

Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T20:45:00+00:00

Field Description TRS MonthThis field defaults to the current TRS reporting month. Click [Account Period Selection Scroll Arrows] to select the TRS reporting month. This is a required field.TRS YearThis field defaults to the current TRS reporting year.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:17:04+00:00

VCV Select one of the following extract options: * Delete All and Insert New Records - Select to delete existing data and insert new records. * Insert New Records - Select to only insert new records. First Time Reporting Select if this is the first time the local education agency (LEA) is submitting an ED20 or ED40 report.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody3

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-01T13:30:40+00:00

VCV Select Employee Demographic (ED20) Extract to extract employee demographic data. VCV Select Contract and Position (ED40) Extract to extract contract and position data. From Contract Begin DateType the from contract begin date in the MM-DD-YYYY format to specify a beginning date range to be used to determine which records should be included in the extract. If this field is populated, the

general:trsprocessing_extractbody4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:20:33+00:00

VCV Click Extract Status to view the details (extract and error reports, status, user details, etc.) for each processed extract.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:25:44+00:00

The TRS Extract Processing pop-up window is displayed with the extract Status, Extract Type, Start date and time, End date and time, User ID, and user Email address. If the logged-on user has an email address on the Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Demographic Information tab, an email message is forwarded for each extract after completion.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody6

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:27:32+00:00

VCV Under Error Report, click Print Report to display the selected error report. Review the report.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody7

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:28:36+00:00

VCV Under Print Report, click Print Report to display the selected extract reports. Review the report.

general:trsprocessing_extractbody8

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T18:29:17+00:00

VCV Click Continue to continue through the list of reports for the selected extract. VCV Click Return to return to the Extract tab. Extract Error Report Notes: * If a Warning message is displayed, the data is extracted and you can address the issue(s) on the Maintenance tab.

general:trsprocessing_maintenance_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T20:24:14+00:00

Payroll > Payroll Processing > TRS Processing > Maintenance This tab is used to add, edit, and delete Employee Demographic, Regular Payroll, and Employment After Retirement records for TRS reporting. Access the RE Portal Resources page for additional reporting information and complete file record layouts.

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_body

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T15:50:00+00:00

Field Description TRS MonthThis field defaults to the current TRS reporting month. Click [Account Period Selection Scroll Arrows] to select the TRS reporting month for which you want to retrieve data. This is a required field.TRS YearThis field defaults to the current reporting TRS year.

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_body2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T16:00:08+00:00

FieldDescriptionEmployee Begin typing the employee name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select an employee and click Retrieve. The employee's payroll history data for the selected TRS reporting month and year is displayed. All jobs (non-XTRA) are displayed for all pay frequencies (4, 5, and 6) and for each pay date/adjustment (including voids). System adjustments are not included.

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_body4

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T16:09:27+00:00

Under Job Information, the following information is displayed from the employee's job history table. FreqThe pay frequency is displayed.Pay DateThe pay date associated with the selected TRS reporting month and year is displayed.Check NumberThe check number for the specified payroll run is displayed.

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_body5

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T16:15:49+00:00

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_extraduty

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T15:56:14+00:00

FieldDescriptionExtra Duty CodeThe extra duty code and description from the Payroll > Tables > Salaries > Extra Duty tab for the selected TRS reporting month and year is displayed.Expense 373Select if the extra duty code is eligible for the expense 373 state minimum expenditure. Otherwise, leave blank.

general:trsprocessing_payrollhistory_intro

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-29T15:38:21+00:00

This tab is used to make changes to an employee's payroll history data. The saved extra duty table and employee payroll history data can be retrieved for a selected TRS reporting month and year. If the extra duty table values and/or the employee's payroll history data is updated, the TRS processing reports can be recreated using the

general:trsprocessing_periodstateminsalary_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-18T15:49:07+00:00

The employee's state minimum salary for the current payroll period is displayed. The salary is calculated by dividing the annual (total) state salary by the number of pay periods (according to the pay frequency) in the fiscal year. The amount can be changed.

general:trsprocessing_reportingrequirements

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T17:41:24+00:00

general:trsprocessing_statebasicdays_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-29T20:13:52+00:00

The employee's number of state minimum days is displayed. The number of days can be changed. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the number of days in the contract for the employee. BBB 000 TRS - Non contract BBB 187 Valid basic days in contract BBB 202 Valid basic days in contract

general:trsprocessing_stateminsalary_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-18T15:48:53+00:00

The employee's annual (total) state minimum salary is displayed. The salary is computed by multiplying the foundation daily rate by the percent assigned times the number of days in the contract. The amount can be changed. This field is only enabled if the

general:trsprocessing_totalgross_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-15T17:18:17+00:00

The employee's total gross amount for the current payroll period is displayed. The amount is calculated by dividing total contract amount by the number of pay periods (according to the pay frequency) in the fiscal year. The value cannot be changed.

general:trsprocessing_wholly_sep_amt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-18T15:49:56+00:00

The wholly separate amount is displayed for the pay period if any. This field should only be used if part of the contract total includes a wholly separate amount. This field is only enabled if the TRS Position Code is 01, 02, or 05. If so, type the total salary for the current pay period that is not subject to the State Base.

general:trsprocessing_whollyseparate_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-15T19:22:14+00:00

The employee's number of state minimum days is displayed. The number of days can be changed. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the number of days in the contract for the employee. 000 TRS - Non contract 187 Valid basic days in contract 202 Valid basic days in contract

general:tsds_responsibilityrecords

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-01-31T21:00:30+00:00

Use the following guidance when entering Responsibility Records for TSDS reporting: Entity: StaffEducationOrganizationAssignmentAssociation ASCENDER page: Personnel > Maintenance > Staff Demo > Responsibility Professional (6119) OR Instructional Aides (11-6129)

general:tsdsextracts

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-11-19T19:24:32+00:00

TSDS Extracts The budget and payroll data are extracted nightly along with the other TSDS extracts until period 10 is closed. After period 10 closes, the data extraction stops. The Fall Finance TSDS Data tab in District Administration becomes available for editing the day after period 10 closes. The user can then begin making corrections to the budget and payroll data on the Fall Finance TSDS Data tab.

general:tsdsguides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2025-09-25T18:41:05+00:00

Reference the TSDS guides for complete information: District Administration Training Guides Page. For a complete listing of the most current TSDS Data Standards, access the TWEDS website: . VCV TSDS Best Practices for New Employee Records VCV TSDS Best Practices for Terminated Employee Records

general:tsdsuniqueidbutton

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-12-11T19:38:04+00:00

VCV Click TSDS Unique ID. The Texas Unique Staff ID pop-up window is displayed. * In the User ID and Password fields, type the user ID and password for the service account using the Unique ID Web Service. This is the user ID and password provided by TEAL.

TSDS Unique ID Status Messages

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-12-14T17:24:10+00:00

TSDS Unique ID Status Messages Status MessageDescriptionSUCCESS_NO_MATCHING_RECORDSRequest was a success, no matching records found.SUCCESS_SINGLE_MATCH_RECORDRequest was a success, a single matching record found.SUCCESS_MULTIPLE_MATCHING_RECORDSRequest was a success, multiple matching records found.

general:type_field_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-18T19:13:39+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select either computer- or district-type check. The following table shows which fields are required depending on the selection in the Type field. Field to Fill In Computer District Check Nbr No YesCheck Date No YesReason No NoInvoice Date No

general:type_field

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-17T14:41:43+00:00

general:typepayment

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-05T15:44:12+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a code, or type the first letter of the 1099 box code of the transaction that should be printed in the field (e.g., R = Rent). Note: This field determines to which box the dollar amount is added on the 1099-MISC form. Refer to the

general:unemploymentelig

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-04-13T18:47:18+00:00

Select if the employee is eligible for unemployment insurance. Notes: According to the South Texas Region of the Texas Workforce Commission, all individuals should be flagged to accumulate unemployment gross, and then submitted in the quarterly file submission. This does not mean that substitutes are eligible to file for unemployment, but that the wages earned as a substitute are figured in the calculation in the event that his status changes to that of a regular employee.

general:update_active_positions_only

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-09T18:07:43+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following options: A - Calculate Budget Based on Vacancy Data B - Move Actual Amount to Budget Amount C - Move Actual Amount to Budget if Actual > Budget This is a required field.

general:update_budget_amount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-09T18:08:35+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following options: R - Recommended Amount A - Approved Amount This is a required field.

general:update_budget

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-09T18:08:18+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select one of the following options: N - Do not update Budget I - Increase or add to the amounts in Budget R - Replace the amounts in Budget (This is how next year payroll to next year budget works.) This is a required field.

general:update_current_year_payroll_tables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-09-07T14:11:15+00:00

Update Current Year Payroll Tables - If selected, the master distribution records and unprocessed transmittals that include account codes (e.g., Coded Absence Deduction, XTRA Duty, and Non-TRS) are updated with the new account code.

general:update_deduction_code_table

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:20:29+00:00

Payroll > Tables > Tax/Deductions > Deduction Code Complete the following: WireSelect to create a transfer check. Actual checks are not printed; however, the transactions are interfaced to Finance. If selected, the Vendor Name/Sort Key and Vendor Nbr fields must be populated. Deduction codes with the

general:update_fiscal_for_distributions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-19T15:40:10+00:00

Prior to completing this step, verify that the new year budget is initialized in ASCENDER. Position Management > Utilities > Update Fiscal Year by Fund VCV Select the fund/years to be incremented. This process increments the position distribution fiscal year by 1. [Update Fiscal Year By Fund] VCV Click Execute.

general:update_positions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-05-28T16:19:48+00:00

Note: If your LEA comes across a situation where teachers are not being captured in the ASCENDER Student system for grade reporting or scheduling, contact your regional ESC consultant for guidance. Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify or PMIS Supplement Modify [PMIS Position Modify Page] If working on the Distribution tab, you must select an account code from the autosuggest drop down in the

general:updatebudgetdataexecute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-30T15:34:59+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. The Update Budget Data Report is displayed with the old and new account codes that were updated. Review the report. VCV Click Process to update the budget data. VCV Click Cancel to cancel processing.

general:updatebudgetdataexecutestep14b

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-06T17:33:07+00:00

VCV Click Execute to execute the process. The Update Budget Data Report is displayed with the old and new account codes that were updated. Review the report. [Update Budget Data Report New Accounts] VCV Click Process to continue processing. Otherwise, click Cancel to cancel processing.

general:updatebudgetdatautilityprocess

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-02T20:01:45+00:00

Click Process to continue processing. Click Cancel to cancel processing.

general:updateemployeemasterrecord

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-04-12T19:27:31+00:00

Update the following fields on the employee's master record: Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Job Info Job Code Pay Type Payoff Date TRS Year Accrual Code Accrual Rate Payroll > Maintenance > Staff Job/Pay Data > Distributions Account Code Percent TRS Grant Codes Notes: If you change an employee’s job code on the Job Info tab and the

general:use_alternate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-10-18T15:38:19+00:00

Select to use the alternate approver instead of the approver. If selected, and no date range is entered in the From Date and To Date fields, the alternate approver becomes the approver. If selected, and no date range is entered in the From Date

general:use_pmis

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-23T19:33:41+00:00

Select to enable Position Management options and functionality. Do not select this option until you are ready to fully utilize Position Management. If selected: The Automatically Compute options (Pay Rate, Daily Rate, Dock Rate, Accrual Rate, and

general:usepaydatesfortrsmonthoractualdate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-01T22:18:57+00:00

This field applies to the RP20 and ER20 extracts. Select A - Actual Hours Table Date to use the actual date from the Maintenance > Actual Hours Worked page to determine the accumulated actual hours worked for pay type 3 employees. And, determine the days worked for pay type 4 jobs (i.e., substitutes). The actual date, month and year, must be the same as the TRS reporting month and year.

general:user_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-27T20:03:21+00:00

The name of the user who created the reversal transaction is displayed.

general:usercreated_vendor_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-03-01T23:04:39+00:00

In the Search for Vendor Key field, type all or some of the vendor number and click Search. A list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed. * To search through all available data, leave the Search for Vendor Key field blank and click

general:usingcommoditycodes_assign_to_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T20:08:39+00:00

Purchasing > Maintenance > Create/Modify Requisition Create a requisition in Purchasing/Warehouse and assign a commodity code. VCV In the Commodity Code field, press the SPACEBAR to view a drop down of all commodity codes or begin typing the code to narrow the list. * Commodity codes are maintained on the District Administration > Tables > Commodity Codes page.

general:usingcommoditycodes_enter_actual_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T20:08:59+00:00

Purchasing > Maintenance > Actual Cost If an item was not entered in Receivables but has already been paid, you can manually update the Actual Cost. This allows you to track and report the actual expenditures for each commodity code.

general:usingcommoditycodes_receivegoods

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-19T19:49:03+00:00

Purchasing > Maintenance > Receiving > Requisition Retrieve a purchase order or requisition to process the receipt of purchased goods or services. Use the packing slip to accurately update the receiving details. VCV Under Retrieval Options: Retrieve an existing record.Purchase Order NbrType the purchase order number to be retrieved. If the PO number is numeric, leading zeros are not required.

general:usingcommoditycodes_reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-14T15:57:10+00:00

The following reports are available to track commodity code information in Purchasing and Warehouse. VCV REQ1800 - Purchasing > Reports > Purchase Order Reports > Commodity Codes Actual Cost Report [Purchasing Commodity codes Actual Cost Report] VCV BWH1600 - Warehouse > Reports > Warehouse Reports > Commodity Codes Actual Cost Report

general:usingcommoditycodes_set_buyer_role

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-19T19:40:40+00:00

District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Permissions If you selected Restrict Commodity Codes to Buyer in the previous step, then only those users with buyer permission can view and edit commodity code data on requisitions. Use this page to add buyer permission to selected user profiles. VCV Select the employee from the drop-down field and click

general:usingcommoditycodesstep2_notusingcommcodes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-19T19:28:38+00:00

District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse > Current Year Select the following: Restrict Commodity Codes to BuyerSelect to restrict the use of commodity codes to only buyers (i.e., Buyer is selected on the District Administration > Maintenance > User Profiles > Purchasing Permissions tab). If selected, only buyers can view the

general:usingcommoditycodesstep2

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-30T17:37:32+00:00

District Administration > Options > Purchasing/Warehouse > Current Year Select the following: Create Receiving PayablesSelect to automatically create payable transactions on the Finance > Maintenance > Pending Payables page when items are received. If not selected, payable transactions are not created in Finance when items are received. Note: For bundled requisitions, the payable transaction is created on the Finance > Maintenance > Postings > Check Processing - PO tab.

general:vendor_active_inactive

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-05T20:20:58+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select whether or not this vendor is active. The default is set to Active. If the vendor is set to inactive, the record remains, but you cannot use it in posting data. If the field is set to Inactive, you can use the vendor name for transactions that were created prior to setting the flag (e.g., printing checks, reversals, changes).

general:vendor_nbr_po_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:31:40+00:00

VendorBegin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the vendor. Click Retrieve. * If the vendor number is not known, click Directory. * Type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:vendor_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:21:22+00:00

In the Vendor field, begin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor. Click Retrieve. The vendor information is displayed. If the vendor number is not known, click

general:vendor_number_address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-05T19:48:03+00:00

If Use Automatic Vendor Number Assignment is selected on the Tables > District Finance Options page, type the vendor's name and click Save. A vendor number is automatically assigned to the vendor based on the Next Available Vendor Number field on the District Finance Options page.

general:vendor

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:42:18+00:00

Begin typing the vendor name or number. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select vendor name and click Retrieve. The vendor record is displayed. If the vendor name or number is not known, click Directory. The

Add/Update Vendor EFT Email Address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T19:38:33+00:00

Add/Update Vendor EFT Email Address Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address Add a new vendor record or update an existing record with the vendor's EFT email address. The EFT email is required for all vendors participating in electronic funds transfer (EFT) payments. [Vendor Information Tab] VCV Under Links, add or update the EFT email address:

Add/Update Bank Codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-31T13:47:20+00:00

Add/Update Bank Codes Finance > Tables > Bank Codes > Bank Codes Verify the appropriate bank codes exist. If not, add the applicable codes. A bank code is required for each bank participating in electronic funds transfer (EFT) payments. In order for a vendor to receive an EFT payment, you must indicate a specific bank for the vendor.

Post Transaction(s)

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T19:25:34+00:00

Post Transaction(s) Finance > Maintenance > Postings > Check Processing - PA OR PO Create a transaction for an existing or new purchase authorization (PA) or purchase order (PO). By default, the EFT checkbox is automatically selected if the vendor retrieved has bank information on the Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous tab and an EFT email address on the

Create EFT File

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T19:37:15+00:00

Create EFT File Finance > Maintenance > EFT Processing > Create EFT File Create the EFT file. The file is then given to the local education agency's (LEA) bank to be transmitted to an automated clearing house (ACH) as a request to electronically transfer the payment to the vendor. The File Type defaults to

Add/Update EFT Information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-12-18T13:42:59+00:00

Add/Update EFT Information Finance > Tables > Bank Codes > EFT Create the LEA's EFT record to be used when sending vendor EFT payments to their bank. This function is accomplished by creating an EFT file during a payment run. This file is then given to the local education agency's (LEA) bank to be transmitted to an automatic clearinghouse.

Print Check(s)

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-31T13:56:46+00:00

Print Check(s) Finance > Maintenance > Check Processing > Print Checks Process all applicable computer checks/EFT transactions that are ready for the check cycle. [Print Checks Tab] VCV Complete the Print Checks tab. The Beginning EFT Reference Number defaults to 00001 for the first time that EFT transactions are processed, and then increments each EFT run.

Add/update Vendor Bank Information

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T18:54:22+00:00

Add/update Vendor Bank Information Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Miscellaneous Add bank information for each vendor (or employee) doing business with the local education agency (LEA). If a vendor has bank information on file, the vendor can receive electronic payments via an electronic funds transfer (EFT). This bank information is also used for employee travel reimbursements.

general:vendorname

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:19:40+00:00

Type the vendor name, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor name. Only existing active vendors are displayed in the drop-down list. The Vendor Number field is automatically populated with the vendor number.

general:vendornumber_eft

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:06:04+00:00

Type an active vendor number, if known. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select a vendor number. The vendor number must exist on the Maintenance > Vendor Information page. The Vendor Name field is automatically populated with the vendor name.

general:vendornumber

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T19:45:24+00:00

general:vendorrecord_prenote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-30T14:21:45+00:00

general:vendors_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T18:53:47+00:00

general:verify_fiscal_year_for_11_month

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-11-30T17:27:36+00:00

Position Management > Utilities > Update Fiscal Year by Fund Verify that the account code fiscal years are accurate. This tab provides a list of the fund/fiscal years that are set up in the positions. This process increments the position distribution fiscal year by 1. Note: Since the account codes are validated against the budget, there should not be any fiscal years less than the next year. If there are, generate a user-created report to identify the positions and manually update the informat…

general:verify_fiscal_year_for_12_month

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-06T15:05:41+00:00

Position Management > Utilities > Update Fiscal Year by Fund Verify that the account code fiscal years are accurate. This tab provides a list of the fund/fiscal years that are set up in the positions. Note: The account codes are validated against the budget; therefore, if there are any fiscal years that exist in this list that are less than 9, generate a user-created report to identify the positions and manually update the information.

general:verify_increase_eligible_positions_11mo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T13:21:44+00:00

Position Management > Reports > User Created Reports > CYR/NYR Positions Generate a PMIS User Created Report to verify that the Increase Eligible field is selected for applicable positions. It is possible that the field is not selected for new LEA employees from last year. TIP: For 10- and 11-month employees, it is recommended

general:verify_increase_eligible_positions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-05-27T13:00:06+00:00

Position Management > Reports > User Created Reports > CYR/NYR Positions Generate a PMIS user-created report to verify that the Increase Eligible field is selected for applicable positions. It is possible that the field is not selected for new LEA employees from last year. VCV It is recommended to verify the Nbr Remain Payments

general:verify_retiree

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-17T14:52:59+00:00

Position Management > Maintenance > PMIS Position Modify > Budget Verify that the TRS Status field is set to 5 - Retired for retirees. If the TRS status is incorrect, there is a possibility that the status will be incorrect (TRS-eligible) when the employee is moved to the current year payroll.

general:verifyepoptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-02-12T14:41:25+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options For EmployeePortal users, verify that the 1095 Information and 1095 Electronic Consent options are set up accordingly. Keep in mind that if you want to allow your employees to print the actual 1095 form from EmployeePortal, the 1095 Electronic Consent

general:view_calendar

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-10-26T16:15:04+00:00

Click to view an existing calendar.

general:void_transactions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:24:15+00:00

VCV Click Void Transactions to void transactions. Transfer transactions can be voided. The transfer transaction is voided and reinserted without the check number and check date in order to reprocess the vendor. All transactions for the selected check number and vendor number are voided. Partial voids are not allowed. If a check has been cleared through Bank Reconciliation, you are given the choice to continue with the void or to cancel.

general:voidchecksnotes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-30T15:43:32+00:00

* Checks created in the current accounting period can be voided in the current or next accounting period. * Deferred checks can be voided in the current or next accounting period. * Checks created in the next accounting period can only be voided in the next accounting period.

general:w-2electconsent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-10-25T14:50:24+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select whether or not the employee provided consent to receive the W-2 form electronically rather than receive a printed, mailed copy. This field is updated to reflect any changes made by the employee in EmployeePortal. If the W-2 Electronic Consent

general:w2_check_file_using_accuwage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T19:42:59+00:00

Run the W2REPORT file (i.e., submission file) through the SSA’s AccuWage program at . CAUTION: Do not continue this process until the W-2 Report file is verified through AccuWage. (from Accuwage website) AccuWage Online is a free application from Social Security Administration that enables you to check W-2 (Wage and Tax Statement) and W-2C (Corrected Wage and Tax Statement) Wage reports for format correctness before uploading them to the Electronic Wage…

general:w2_compare_reports

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T13:57:37+00:00

Compare the following data on the Calendar YTD, 941 Worksheet, Third Party Sick Pay and the W-2 Validation reports: * Taxable Gross/Withholding Gross * Withholding Tax * FICA Gross * FICA Tax * Medicare Gross * Medicare Tax VCV Review and Compare 941 Reports - Add the totals from each of the four Quarterly Reports previously filed by the LEA and compare that total to the 941 Worksheet for the year. If the totals do not match for any reason (e.g., voided checks, etc.) you may nee…

general:w2_create_submission_file

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T16:31:58+00:00

Payroll > Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5100 - W-2 Forms Report VCV Set the Validation Rpt (V); W2 Forms - Copy A (A), Non-preprinted 3 Up (N); or W2REPORT File (F) parameter to F (W2REPORT File) and enter the necessary parameter data. [W2 Forms Report Parameter Page] VCV Click PDF. The W-2 Processing report is displayed and the file is generated in a separate window. Save the file as a .txt or .csv file.

general:w2_enter_third_party_sick_pay

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-12T13:57:07+00:00

Payroll > Maintenance > Calendar YTD Data > Third Party Sick Pay Skip this step if you do not use third-party sick pay. If the employee received sick or disability pay directly from a third party, enter the data from the third-party administrator report. * Third-party sick pay is displayed in Box 12 - J on the W-2.

general:w2_generate_calendar_ytd_and_941

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-10-24T19:21:38+00:00

Payroll > Reports > Year To Date Reports > Calendar Year To Date Report VCV Generate the HRS3000 - Calendar YTD and HRS5000 - 941 Worksheet reports to verify that the fourth quarter totals and the previously reported 941 Worksheet quarter totals equal the total YTD amounts. * If the totals do not balance, it is possible that data changed in a previous quarter (in ASCENDER) and a 941C was not reported; if that is the case, make the necessary adjustments to correct the issues.

general:w2_generate_comparison_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-11-19T17:12:45+00:00

comparison

general:w2_generate_validation_report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T14:34:33+00:00

Payroll > Reports > HR Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5100 - W-2 Forms VCV Generate the W-2 Validation report to review your W-2 totals. Also, verify the totals against the Payroll > Reports > Year To Date Reports > HRS3000 - Calendar Year To Date Report and Payroll > Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5200 - Third Party Sick Pay Report. * The combined totals for the Calendar YTD and Third Party Sick Pay reports should balance to the Validation report. Although the third-part…

general:w2_print_employee_w-2s

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-12-09T21:22:08+00:00

At this point, the W-2s should be balanced and any AccuWage formatting issues corrected. Payroll > Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5100 - W-2 Forms VCV Generate this report to print and finalize the W-2 wage and earnings statements for each employee. VCV After the W-2s are verified and completed, create a W-2 historical file for each employee on the

general:w2_printall

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-25T19:07:05+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options If your LEA needs to print or save copies of W-2s for all employees, unselect the W-2 Information checkbox and click Save. Then, use the Payroll > Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5100 - W-2 Forms page to generate and save/print copies of all W-2s. Keep in mind that employees will not have access to view W-2s in EmployeePortal as long as the

general:w2_reprint

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T16:37:53+00:00

If an employee needs a reprinted W-2, generate the Payroll > Reports > Quarterly/Annual Reports > HRS5100 - W-2 Forms report for the employee(s) or refer the employee to EmployeePortal to print an official copy of the W-2 (as long as the LEA settings allow access).

general:w2_submit_file_to_ssa

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-11-10T16:34:42+00:00

If filing paper copies with the SSA, print Copy A and complete a W-3 transmittal form. VCV Use the following parameters for a paper submission: * Set the Validation Rpt (V); W2 Forms - Copy A (A), Non-preprinted 3 Up (N); or W2REPORT File (F)

general:w2_terminology

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-20T16:58:08+00:00

Term DescriptionAccuwageA part of the Business Servies Online (BSO) suite that allows files to be uploaded to check for format correctness before submitting to the Social Security Administration (SSA). BSOBusiness Services Online is a suite of services that allows various individuals and entities the ability to exchange information with the Social Security Administration securely over the internet. You must register and create your own password to access Business Services Online.

general:w2_update_ea_options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2026-01-20T19:35:52+00:00

Payroll > Tables > District EP Options > EmployeePortal Options Update the EmployeePortal options to allow employees to access the W-2 Information page and print official W-2 copies in EmployeePortal. VCV Under Enable, select W-2 Information to enable the W-2 Information page in EmployeePortal. If not selected, the W-2 Information menu is disabled when the employee logs on to EmployeePortal.

general:w2electronicconsent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-01-07T19:44:31+00:00

Select to allow the W-2 Consent button to be displayed. If not selected, W-2 forms are printed for all employees. Note: If W-2 Information is selected giving the employee access to the EmployeePortal > Inquiry > W-2 Information page, the W-2 Consent

general:w2options

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-15T19:59:04+00:00

VCV Under W-2 Print Options, select the amounts to be included on the employee W-2 (Box 14). These options also apply to W-2 forms that are printed from ASCENDER EmployeePortal. Amount TypeDescription/Calculation (from the Calendar YTD page)TRSTRS Salary Reduction

general:w2printlatestyear

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T14:56:17+00:00

Type the four-digit year of the latest year for which the employees can print an official copy of their W-2. This field should not be updated until the LEA has run and finalized its W-2s. W-2s will be copies and will not be used in lieu of the LEA generating W-2s.

general:w4_marital_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-05-07T20:49:51+00:00

This field was disabled as of 12/31/2019. Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the code indicating the marital status of the employee. Click Save to save the data. If a change to the W4 Marital Status field is saved in the current year, you are prompted to save the change to the next year’s pay information. If you make a change to next year, you are prompted to save the change to the current year’s pay information.

general:w9

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T22:32:45+00:00

The W-9 is a federal IRS form required from all vendors with whom the district expects to do business of $600 or more and that qualify for 1099 eligibility within the year. MailedType the date in the MMDDYYYY format on which the W-9 form was mailed.

general:warehouse_account_code_general_ledger_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:25:33+00:00

The 20-character account code mask with all Xs is displayed. Use either of the following methods to select an account code: Type only the digits that are used during the selection process (e.g., for a summary of all supply accounts for campus 001, the account mask would look like the following: XXX-XX-63XX-XX-001-XXXXXX).

general:warehouse_add_inventory_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T15:25:35+00:00

Click to add a new inventory item.

general:warehouse_add_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-07-24T18:55:56+00:00

Add - Clear AllClick to clear all data for the requisition and add a new row.Add - Clear DetailClick to clear the item and account data only and add a new row. Other existing information is not cleared.Add - Clear VendorClick to clear the vendor information. Other existing information is not cleared.

general:warehouse_add_warehouse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T17:56:28+00:00

Click to add a new warehouse.

general:warehouse_allow_for_approval_process

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T19:42:33+00:00

Select to allow warehouse requisitions to flow through the approval process; otherwise, if not selected, the warehouse requisitions will follow the regular requisition process.

general:warehouse_allow_partial_receiving

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T22:33:08+00:00

Select to allow partial receiving per line item for a requisition on the Receive Inventory Items page.

general:warehouse_allow_receiving_overage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T19:55:13+00:00

Select to allow excess of the amount ordered to be received. If selected, you must indicate the maximum percentage of overage in the Percent of Items Over field.

general:warehouse_approve_requisition_path

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:05:09+00:00

VCV Click Path to display the Approval Path page, which allows you to insert an approver. * Under Insert Approver: * Click Before or After to indicate where the inserted approver will be placed. * In the Approver field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an approver.

general:warehouse_approve_return

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:07:19+00:00

VCV Click Return to disapprove the requisition and return the requisition to the originator. The originator can edit the returned requisition and resubmit it.

general:warehouse_approve_skip

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:07:42+00:00

VCV Click Skip to continue to the next requisition without returning or approving the displayed requisition.

general:warehouse_approve

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:08:08+00:00

VCV Click Approve to approve the requisition and forward the requisition to the next approver in the path.

general:warehouse_audit_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T17:05:43+00:00

Type the reason the inventory item is being added, deleted, or updated. This field is displayed when a new item is added or deleted, or when the Quantity on Hand or Unit Cost field is updated. This is a required field.

general:warehouse_auto_assign_inventory_item_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-28T16:48:33+00:00

Select to allow inventory item numbers to be automatically assigned. Leave blank if using alphanumeric inventory item numbers on the Warehouse > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance page.

general:warehouse_auto_assign_shipping_order_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T20:55:53+00:00

This field is selected by default and cannot be changed.

general:warehouse_award_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:24:34+00:00

Click to award the bid to the selected vendor. A message is displayed indicating that the Award Bid process was completed. Click OK to continue and close the message. Click Print to print the report.

general:warehouse_back_ordered

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:02:27+00:00

The total number of units of issue of this item which have been back-ordered is displayed.

general:warehouse_bid_inquiry

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:14:09+00:00

Bid NbrType the six-digit bid number to be retrieved, if known. Leading zeros are not required.ORBid StatusClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select a bid status. All bid numbers with the selected status are retrieved. Click Retrieve. If only a bid number was entered, the bid details for the bid are displayed. If a bid status was selected, all bid numbers with the selected bid status are displayed.

general:warehouse_bid_process_trashcan

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-06T20:35:57+00:00

Click to delete an inventory item from the bid. The line item(s) is highlighted red to indicate that it will be deleted upon saving the record.

general:warehouse_blind_receiving

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:51:03+00:00

Select if your warehouse uses blind receiving. If Blind Warehouse Receiving is selected, the quantity ordered or received year to date on the Receive Inventory Items page is not displayed and a warning message indicating if the amount received is over the amount requested is not generated.

general:warehouse_campus_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T15:34:59+00:00

Type the three-digit campus location of this warehouse within the district. If the warehouse number is unknown, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select from a list.

general:warehouse_campus_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:09:54+00:00

Type a campus description.

general:warehouse_cancel_eoy_outstanding_back_orders_proceed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T21:27:31+00:00

VCV Click Proceed to continue the process. A message is displayed prompting you to create an export. * Click Yes to create an export. A message is displayed prompting you to enter a password to be used for the Archive. Type the password and click

general:warehouse_capital_outlay

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T17:04:21+00:00

Select to indicate that the item is a capital outlay item. Otherwise, leave the field blank.

general:warehouse_catalog_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-28T16:26:51+00:00

Type the catalog number from which the item may be purchased. This field can be a maximum of 16 digits. An association between the catalog number and the item number is established. If an association exists between the catalog number and the item number, the catalog number is displayed on other pages when the item number is entered.

general:warehouse_category_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T21:40:26+00:00

Type a five-character code to represent the category.

general:warehouse_category_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T21:41:21+00:00

Type the description of the category. The description can be a maximum of 25 characters.

general:warehouse_create_receiving_payables

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-02-10T19:29:32+00:00

Select to automatically create payable transactions on the Finance > Maintenance > Pending Payables page when using the receiving feature. If not selected, payable transactions are not created in Finance when using the receiving feature.

general:warehouse_delete_a_warehouse

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T21:09:16+00:00

Click to delete the selected warehouse record.

general:warehouse_delete_bid_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-06-06T20:38:43+00:00

Click to delete the bid.

general:warehouse_delete_inventory_record

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:53:52+00:00

A message is displayed asking you to confirm the item deletion. Click Yes to delete the inventory item number. Click No to not delete the inventory item number. Note: An Audit Reason must be entered when an item is deleted, and you must click Delete

general:warehouse_delete_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:57:26+00:00

Click to delete the requisition. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the item deletion. Click Yes to delete the requisition. Click No to not delete the requisition.

general:warehouse_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T20:38:32+00:00

Type the description of the warehouse. The description is required and can be a maximum of 25 characters.

general:warehouse_exclude_objects_61xx

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T14:40:53+00:00

Select to exclude all objects that begin with 61.

general:warehouse_extended_cost_rounding

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T21:04:45+00:00

Select to round the extended amount to the hundredth position when the quantity of items is multiplied by the unit price. If Extended Cost Rounding is not selected, it is set to round to tenths.

general:warehouse_file_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T22:49:57+00:00

Defaults to C to represent the current file ID.

general:warehouse_fill_back_order_note_misc

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T22:03:27+00:00

* Item Description * Campus * Units to Ship

general:warehouse_fill_back_order_note

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T22:03:10+00:00

Note: When more than one campus has the same inventory item on back order, *** is displayed in the following fields: * Item Description * Campus * Units to Ship

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_date_button

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T22:20:52+00:00

Click to fill back orders in date order (e.g., oldest date are filled first).

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_equal_button

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T22:22:24+00:00

Click to fill the back orders in equal quantities for each order. If there is not enough quantity on hand, the order is not filled. For example, if there are only three items on hand, and there are four orders, the order cannot be filled using the Equal

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_fill_button

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-19T20:09:38+00:00

Click to fill back orders manually. This option allows you to manually enter the order quantities based on the quantity on hand without considering dates or calculations. You must manually add a value in the Units to Ship field prior to clicking the

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_on_hand

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T20:52:37+00:00

This field indicates the number of items available to fill the back orders. The number may or may not be enough to fill all back orders. By default, the On Hand field for each back order is automatically populated with the number of items equal to the number of items on back order, if there were enough items received to fill all back orders. Otherwise, use the buttons at the top of the page to populate this field.

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_percent_button

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T22:29:45+00:00

Click to fill back orders using a calculated percentage.

general:warehouse_fill_backorders_units_to_ship

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T20:59:22+00:00

This number should not exceed the number in the On Hand field.

general:warehouse_free_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-07-22T14:43:02+00:00

Select to indicate that the item has no cost. Otherwise, leave the field blank. If selected, the Unit Cost field is disabled. A free item needs to have a different item number if the same item is also available at a cost.

general:warehouse_from_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T20:09:22+00:00

Type a date from which to retrieve outstanding back orders to be canceled.

general:warehouse_general_ledger_inquiry_reset

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-12-02T14:25:24+00:00

VCV Click Reset to clear the account code and return to the default setting (all Xs).

general:warehouse_general_ledger_inquiry_retrieve

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-30T15:40:28+00:00

Click to process the inquiry based on the selected values. Only the account codes listed in your user profile that match the selected accounts are displayed. Review the report. Review the report using the following buttons: Click [First Page Button] to go to the first page of the report.

general:warehouse_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-10T19:48:48+00:00

Type a single-digit code to represent the warehouse ID. If you select a specific warehouse ID using the drop-down field, the Warehouse ID field is display only.

general:warehouse_include_current_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T22:51:51+00:00

Select to include current period transactions.

general:warehouse_include_next_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T22:52:28+00:00

Select to include next period transactions.

general:warehouse_include_processed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T22:51:01+00:00

Select to include processed transactions.

general:warehouse_include_show_details

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:25:06+00:00

Select to include a detailed list of all transactions. If not selected, a summary for all accounts is displayed. Summary report options are: Totals - Displays the totals of all accounts with the selected account code component. Balance Accts Only - Displays the totals for only the accounts that are selected in the account code mask.

general:warehouse_include_soft_encumbrances

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T14:38:25+00:00

Selected by default to include requisition general ledger transactions when purchase orders exist. If not selected, the soft encumbrances (where the associated purchase order has been created) is not displayed.

general:warehouse_inventory_account_codes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:50:46+00:00

Type the inventory account code that applies to the identified warehouse. If an account code component is unknown, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select from a list. Notes: The account code must be already established in the general ledger before it can be entered.

general:warehouse_inventory_location

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T17:29:12+00:00

Location DescriptionType a detailed description of the location where the item is stored.AisleType the aisle where the item is stored. The field can be a maximum of three characters.Bin CodeType the bin code where the item is stored. The field can be a maximum of four characters.

general:warehouse_item_description_populated_mass_change_item_numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:21:44+00:00

The item description is displayed, which is automatically populated based on the data populated in From Item Nbr field.

general:warehouse_item_description_populated

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:37:22+00:00

The item description is displayed, which is automatically populated based on the data populated in the Item Number field.

general:warehouse_item_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-04T14:52:54+00:00

Type the “internal use” description of the inventory item. This description is printed on the shipping order. The description can be a maximum of 30 characters.

general:warehouse_last_requested

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:02:06+00:00

The most recent date on which an order was submitted for this item is displayed.

general:warehouse_last_resock_po_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-03-01T15:31:12+00:00

The last purchase order number that was issued for the item restock order is displayed.

general:warehouse_last_restocked

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:02:38+00:00

The most recent date on which an item was restocked is displayed.

general:warehouse_long_description_display

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:32:22+00:00

The long description of the selected inventory item is displayed. It is automatically populated based on the inventory item record.

general:warehouse_long_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-04T15:08:10+00:00

Type a more detailed description of the inventory item. This description is often the official item name needed by the vendor. The description can be a maximum of 200 characters.

general:warehouse_mass_change_deletearow

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T20:45:31+00:00

The row is highlighted red to indicate that it will be deleted when the Clear Deleted button is clicked.

general:warehouse_mass_change_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T20:25:30+00:00

The Mass Change Inventory Item Number Preview report is displayed. * Click Proceed to continue. An Export message is displayed prompting you to create a backup file. Click Yes to continue with the process and create a backup file. Click No to continue with the process without creating a backup file.

general:warehouse_mass_change_from_item_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-23T21:31:29+00:00

If the item number is unknown, click [Ellipsis Icon].The Inventory Items window is displayed. A list of item numbers is displayed. To search for a specific item, type data in the Search field. As you begin typing data, a list of data that matches the search criteria is displayed.

general:warehouse_mass_change_to_item_nbr

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-07-10T18:48:32+00:00

If Auto Assign Inventory Item Number is selected on the Warehouse Options page, the field is set to AUTO. If it is not selected, type the new item number.

general:warehouse_mass_delete_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T21:03:34+00:00

Click to execute the process. One of the following reports is displayed: * Exclude Report - If the requisition accounting period is set for the current accounting period and transactions exist in the next accounting period, those requisitions can only be reversed in the next accounting period. This report displays all requisitions that are excluded from the process.

general:warehouse_mass_delete_requisiition_fund_fiscal_year_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-25T21:55:34+00:00

* If a restock or warehouse requisition is pending: * The workflow and workflow history is deleted. * This process reverses encumbrance general journal transactions created during the approval path process and updates the general ledger. *

general:warehouse_mass_delete_requisition_fund_fiscal_year_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-25T21:52:00+00:00

* Pending restock or warehouse requisition: * The workflow and workflow history is deleted. * This process reverses encumbrance general journal transactions created during the approval path process and updates the general ledger. * In addition, if a warehouse requisition is pending:

general:warehouse_mass_delete_reverse_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:32:59+00:00

VCV Click Process to mass delete the selected requisitions. A message is displayed prompting you to create an export. * Click Yes to create an export. A message is displayed prompting you to enter a password to be used for the Archive. Type the password and click

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T21:29:03+00:00

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_fund_fiscal_year_execute

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:32:32+00:00

VCV Click Execute to reverse the pending requisitions in the selected funds. One of the following reports is displayed: * Exclude Report - If the requisition accounting period is set for the current accounting period and transactions exist in the next accounting period, those requisitions can only be reversed in the next accounting period. The report displays all requisitions to be excluded from the process.

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_pending_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T21:32:54+00:00

Click to mass reverse the pending requisitions in the selected date range. A message is displayed prompting you to create an export. * Click Yes to create an export. A message is displayed prompting you to enter a password to be used for the Archive. Type the password and click

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_po_by_range

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:36:29+00:00

VCV Click Process to mass reverse the selected range of purchase order numbers. A message is displayed prompting you to delete any related requisition records that were used to create the restock purchase order. * Click Yes to delete the requisitions and complete the process. A message is displayed indicating that the mass purchase order reversal process was completed successfully.

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_pos

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:35:14+00:00

VCV Click Process to mass reverse the purchase orders in the selected funds/years. A message is displayed prompting you to create an export. * Click Yes to create an export. A message is displayed prompting you to enter a password to be used for the Archive. Type the password and click

general:warehouse_mass_reverse_requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T21:12:33+00:00

A message is displayed prompting you to delete any related requisition records that were used to create the restock purchase order. * Click Yes to delete the requisitions and complete the process. A message is displayed indicating that the mass purchase order reversal process was completed successfully.

general:warehouse_next_available_inventory_item_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T21:07:40+00:00

If Auto Assign Inventory Item Number is selected, click to automatically populate the next available number, or type the next available number.

general:warehouse_next_available_shipping_order_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T21:06:47+00:00

Click to populate the next available shipping order number to be assigned in the Next Available Shipping Order Number field, or type the next available number.

general:warehouse_nextyearuniform_dist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-06-22T12:53:18+00:00

VCV Click Uniform Acct Distr to assign one account code to the entire requisition. You can split all of the costs for a requisition item between two or more funds. The percentage split does not have to be the same for each fund, but the sum of all percentages must equal 100%.

general:warehouse_originator_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T19:08:33+00:00

The name of the logged-on user is displayed.

general:warehouse_percent_of_items_received

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T19:55:46+00:00

This field is only enabled if Allow Receiving Overage is selected. Type the percentage of overage allowed to be received. For example, if this field is set 100% and you ordered one item, you can receive two items.

general:warehouse_plus_add

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T20:47:13+00:00

Click to add a new row.

general:warehouse_po_signature

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:30:24+00:00

A signature window is displayed. * Under Signature: * In the Select to Print field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to display a list of available signature files. Select the signature file. The signature files are maintained on the Tables > Electronic Signatures page in District Administration.

general:warehouse_print_extended_description

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-11T19:30:40+00:00

Select if you want the extended description to be printed on the purchase order forms.

general:warehouse_process_utility

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-21T20:04:05+00:00

A message is displayed indicating that a system backup should be performed. * Click Yes to perform a system backup. Otherwise, click No to not perform a system backup and continue the process. * The File ID field is display only and reflects the file ID to which the user is logged on.

general:warehouse_quantity_on_hand

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T16:14:52+00:00

Type the total quantity of this item on hand at all LEAs.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_back_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T19:42:27+00:00

Indicates that an item is on back order. If the item in not on back order, the field is blank.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T19:41:13+00:00

Type the total cost of all quantities of the item indicated in the Received field.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_gain

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T19:40:08+00:00

Type the total number of issuing units received to be placed in inventory.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_items_reset

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T17:32:03+00:00

Click to clear all data from the page, and retrieve a new record.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_receive_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T19:37:53+00:00

By default, the date is set to the current date; however, it can be changed. Type a date in the MMDDYYYY format.

general:warehouse_receive_inventory_received

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T19:39:09+00:00

Type the total number of units received. For example, if the item is shipped in cases of ten, enter the number of cases received.

general:warehouse_refresh_totals

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:40:56+00:00

VCV Click Refresh Totals to update the totals if any amounts are changed in the grid.

general:warehouse_reorder_level

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-26T21:33:08+00:00

Type the level of warehouse inventory at which the item should be reordered. This number is represented in units of issue. For example, if your reorder level for paper is 10, that means your LEA would need to place a reorder for paper when there are 10 cases of paper left in your warehouse stock.

general:warehouse_reorder_quantity

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-01-26T21:25:20+00:00

Type the quantity of the item to be ordered when placing a reorder. This number is represented in units of issue (e.g., cases of paper).

general:warehouse_requestor_name_cancel_back_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:34:43+00:00

The name of the person recording the return of the warehouse inventory items is displayed.

general:warehouse_requestor_name_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T16:43:57+00:00

Displays the name of the person or organization that requested the items. requesting the requisition.

general:warehouse_requestor_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T14:47:06+00:00

Type the name of the person or organization requesting the item(s). As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the requestor.

general:warehouse_requisition_account_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T16:59:26+00:00

Type the account code components. The account code is comprised of the fund, function, object, subobject, organization, and program codes, and are the individual parts which, taken together, form an account number that uniquely identifies a specific budget category. These codes identify the account used to pay for the item(s) being ordered. The codes must exist in the general ledger and in the User Profile.

general:warehouse_requisition_accounting_period

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:24:21+00:00

The accounting period for this transaction is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_attachments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:36:34+00:00

Select if documents are attached to the purchase order.

general:warehouse_requisition_bid_category

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T16:12:15+00:00

general:warehouse_requisition_bid_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:09:56+00:00

Type the eight-digit bid number established in response to a Request for Proposal (RFP). All requisitions associated with the same RFP have the same bid number.

general:warehouse_requisition_calculate_amount

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:41:56+00:00

VCV Click Calculate Amount to populate the Amount column based on the amount entered in the Percent column.

general:warehouse_requisition_calculate_percent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-11T19:41:26+00:00

VCV Click Calculate Percent to populate the Percent column based on the amount entered in the Amount column.

general:warehouse_requisition_campus_cancel_back_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:35:15+00:00

The three-digit identification number of the campus from which these items are being returned is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_campus_dept

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:29:03+00:00

Type the name of the campus submitting the requisition. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the campus/department.

general:warehouse_requisition_comments

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T14:59:17+00:00

VCV Click Comments to add or view requisitions comments. A Warehouse Requisition Comments window is displayed. If there is a paper clip icon next to the Comments button, a requisition comment exists. In the Warehouse Requisition Comments window, type comments about the requisition.

general:warehouse_requisition_confirm_only

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:26:27+00:00

Select if you want a confirmation. This field is used primarily for those who initiated the creation of a purchase order over the phone.

general:warehouse_requisition_date_required

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:25:57+00:00

Type the date that the requisition is required. By default, the field is set to the current date; however, it can be changed.

general:warehouse_requisition_details

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T16:58:26+00:00

Click [Spyglass Icon] to select or view the account code(s) for the selected item. The account code data is displayed in the lower grid.

general:warehouse_requisition_discount_total

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:54:24+00:00

The calculated discount total cost for all items in the requisition based upon the quantity ordered and unit price per item is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_fax_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T14:46:46+00:00

Select to fax the purchase order.

general:warehouse_requisition_freight_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-12-18T13:49:05+00:00

Type the 10-digit freight cost for all items in the requisition. The amount entered is either a user-assigned flat or a percentage of the costs of the items in the requisition.

general:warehouse_requisition_freight_total

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:53:43+00:00

The calculated freight total cost for all items in the requisition based upon the quantity ordered and unit price per item is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_hold

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:35:27+00:00

Select to have the item(s) ordered held at the warehouse, or leave the option blank to have the item(s) ordered shipped to the requestor's shipping address.

general:warehouse_requisition_include_check

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:39:38+00:00

Select if the check is to be included with the purchase order.

general:warehouse_requisition_item_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T17:03:39+00:00

Type an inventory item number for the item to be ordered, or click [Ellipsis Icon] to select an item number from a list.

general:warehouse_requisition_item_quantity

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-22T19:43:53+00:00

Type the quantity in units of issue for the requested item.

general:warehouse_requisition_note

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-07-26T20:02:56+00:00

Click to add or read a note for the item. If a paper clip is displayed next to the Note button, an item note exists. In the note window, review the existing notes or type new or additional notes (justification or instructions) about the item. This information is for internal use only

general:warehouse_requisition_number_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T16:42:44+00:00

Displays the six-digit requisition number.

general:warehouse_requisition_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:12:58+00:00

Displays AUTO if Use Automatic CYR Requisition Number Assignment is selected on the District Finance Options page. The requisition number will be automatically assigned when the requisition is saved.

general:warehouse_requisition_overage

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T17:31:44+00:00

Click to view a list of account code overages. The list is only populated if the requisition will cause the budget account used to go over budget. If there is more than one budget account used in the requisition, the list will display each budget account that is over budget as a result of the requisition order.

general:warehouse_requisition_priority

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T20:25:43+00:00

Select R - Regular or U - Urgent to mark the requisition priority. By default, the priority is set to R - Regular.

general:warehouse_requisition_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-03-09T16:30:21+00:00

Type the quote number that is associated with the pricing of the items on this requisition. The field can be a maximum of 12 digits.

general:warehouse_requisition_reason_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T16:48:14+00:00

Displays the reason that the requisition was submitted.

general:warehouse_requisition_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T18:28:04+00:00

Type the reason for submitting the requisition or edit the current reason. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters. This information is displayed on various reports and on the general ledger.

general:warehouse_requisition_reference_number_cancel_back_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:35:02+00:00

The requisition identification number is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_reference_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:34:01+00:00

Type the identification number for this requisition. The field can be a maximum of 15 characters.

general:warehouse_requisition_reference_numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-04-27T16:47:33+00:00

Click to process the inquiry based on the selected values. A list of requisitions that match the search criteria is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_requested_date_cancel_back_order

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:34:31+00:00

The original date of the requisition request is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_requested_date_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T16:46:52+00:00

Displays the date of the requisition request.

general:warehouse_requisition_requested_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T15:24:33+00:00

Type the date of the requisition request. By default, the field is set to the current date; however, it can be changed.

general:warehouse_requisition_return_po

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:41:28+00:00

Select to return a copy of the purchase order to the originator of the requisition.

general:warehouse_requisition_return

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:18:00+00:00

VCV Click Return to return the warehouse item(s). A pop-up window is displayed indicating that the requisition has been approved, and prompting you to print the Warehouse Requisition Report. * Click Yes to continue and print the report. * Click

general:warehouse_requisition_shipping_address

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2022-11-22T16:26:29+00:00

Type the address where the requisition is to be shipped or press SPACEBAR to display the list of available purchasing addresses.

general:warehouse_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T16:41:08+00:00

Click [Spyglass Icon] to view the account code(s) for the selected requisition. The account code data is displayed in the lower grid.

general:warehouse_requisition_submit

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-03-25T14:29:12+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit the restock requisition. A pop-up window opens with a message indicating that the requisition has been approved, and prompting you to print the Warehouse Requisition Report. * Click Yes to continue and print the report.

general:warehouse_requisition_subtotal

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:54:55+00:00

The calculated subtotal cost for all items in the requisition based on the quantity ordered and unit price per item is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_total

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T20:14:12+00:00

The calculated total cost for each item in the requisition based on the quantity ordered and unit price per item is displayed.

general:warehouse_requisition_vendor_notes

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:03:42+00:00

VCV Click Vendor Notes to add or view vendor notes. An Inventory Restock Requisition Vendor Notes window is displayed. If there is a paper clip next to the Vendor Notes button, a requisition vendor note exists. In the Inventory Restock Requisition Vendor Notes window, type notes about the requisition.

general:warehouse_requisition_workorder_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-18T17:05:40+00:00

Type the six-digit number of the work order associated with the requisition.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_catalog_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:26:08+00:00

The item catalog number is displayed, which is automatically populated based on the Item Number field.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_dba

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T20:18:49+00:00

Retrieved from the Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address tab and printed on all purchase orders along with the vendor name.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_discount_amt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:01:11+00:00

Type the discount amount if available. Click Refresh Totals to populate the Discount % field. This amount is subtracted from the requisition’s total amount to be encumbered. The amount is displayed on the purchase order after a subtotal of the item’s extended amount.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_discount_percent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:00:46+00:00

Type the discount percentage if available. Click Refresh Totals to populate the Discount Amt field. This amount is subtracted from the requisition’s total amount to be encumbered. The amount is displayed on the purchase order after a subtotal of the item’s extended amount.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_freight_amt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T15:38:09+00:00

Type the amount of freight charges. Click Refresh Totals to populate the Freight % field.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_freight_elig

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T15:36:08+00:00

Select if the item is eligible to be charged to freight.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_freight_percent

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-19T15:39:26+00:00

Type percentage of freight charges. Click Refresh Totals to populate the Freight Amt field.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_item_total

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:26:35+00:00

The total amount of the line item including any discount and freight amounts is displayed.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_order_for

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T19:55:38+00:00

Type the shipping contact name to be displayed on the purchase order. The field can be a maximum of 30 characters. By default, if blank, the data from the Requestor Name field is displayed on the purchase order. Data from the Order For or Requestor Name

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_sort_key_vendor_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-09-27T20:03:56+00:00

Type a valid vendor name, if known. The Vendor Nbr field is populated with the corresponding vendor number. If the vendor number is not known, click [Ellipsis Icon] to select a vendor from the Vendors Directory. The Vendor Directory is populated from the vendor records established on the

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_sort_key_vendor_number

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-27T18:54:49+00:00

Populated with the vendor number based on the value entered in the Sort Key/Vendor Name field. Or, type a valid vendor number if known. The Sort Key/Vendor Name field is populated with the corresponding vendor name. If the vendor number is not known, click

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_subtotal

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:36:34+00:00

The total cost for all items in the requisition based on the quantity ordered and unit price per item is displayed.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_vendor_contact

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T20:20:15+00:00

Type a contact name for the vendor.

general:warehouse_restock_requisition_vendor_demo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-17T20:15:08+00:00

Populated with the selected vendor's information from the Finance > Maintenance > Vendor Information > Vendor Name/Address tab.

general:warehouse_retrieve_back_orders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T17:45:33+00:00

Click to retrieve a list of orders that need to be filled.

general:warehouse_route_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-06T16:51:01+00:00

Type a three-character pattern to be used in the Select SO Warehouse Route Nbr(s), or blank for All report parameter on the BWH1150 - Print Shipping Order report. Typically, the route code relates to the days of the week and the route.

general:warehouse_save_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-01T14:56:28+00:00

VCV Click Save to save the bid. The bid status is changed to N - Not Submitted. Bid details can be viewed on the Warehouse > Inquiry > Bid Processing Inquiry page.

general:warehouse_save_vendor_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T00:33:43+00:00

VCV Click Save to save the vendor quote request. The bid status is changed to Q - Request for Quotation. Bid details can be viewed on the Warehouse > Inquiry > Bid Processing Inquiry page.

general:warehouse_search_for_inventory_record

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-28T16:26:20+00:00

Type the Item Number and click Retrieve. Type an inventory Item Description. As you type the data, a drop-down list of corresponding data is displayed. Select the item you wish to select and click Retrieve. Click Directory. To search for a specific item, type data in one or more of the search fields.

general:warehouse_search_for_receive_inventory_item

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T17:15:12+00:00

Requisition NbrType the six-digit requisition number to be retrieved, if known. Leading zeros are not required. However, if alphanumeric values are entered, the field is not zero-filled.ORPurchase OrderType the six-digit number to identify the purchase order issued as a part of this requisition. This number was assigned automatically by the system at the time the requisition was initiated.

general:warehouse_search_for_reference_numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-24T17:13:38+00:00

Start AtType a reference number to indicate the starting point for the retrieval. The field can be a maximum of seven characters and is optional.Requestor NameType a number to identify the requisition for which you wish to record the receipt of items. The field can be a maximum of six digits and is optional.

general:warehouse_search_for_requisition_directory

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-01-27T18:02:51+00:00

The Requisitions Directory is displayed. To search for a specific requisition number, type data in one or more of the search fields. To search through all available data, leave all fields blank. Click Search. A list of requisition numbers matching the search criteria is displayed.

general:warehouse_search_for_requisition_reference_numbers

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2021-05-12T21:06:16+00:00

Use the following search fields to narrow your search: Start AtType a reference number to indicate the starting point for the retrieval. The field can be a maximum of seven characters and is optional.Requestor NameType the requester's name (last, first name). You can retrieve results by entering only the requestor's last name; however, you cannot enter only the first name.

general:warehouse_search_for_requisition_status

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-10-16T15:26:05+00:00

general:warehouse_search_for_requisition

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-08-28T15:36:31+00:00

general:warehouse_select_category_code

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-05-31T15:00:30+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select a five-character code to indicate any district-defined categorization.

general:warehouse_select_reason

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T23:04:34+00:00

When a reason is entered in the requisition Reason field and the requisition is submitted, approved, or returned, the Reason/Description field displays REQ plus the requisition number plus the Reason field. If a requisition reason is not entered, a default description is used for the

general:warehouse_select_vendor_name

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-23T22:58:20+00:00

Selected by default. If selected, the requisition number is not displayed.

general:warehouse_select_warehouse_id

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-20T18:02:16+00:00

Warehouse IDClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select an existing warehouse and click Retrieve.

general:warehouse_sequence

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:25:38+00:00

The order sequence of items in the requisition is displayed. The sequence number is automatically assigned when an item is added to the requisition.

general:warehouse_start_at

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:18:22+00:00

Type the three-digit starting campus ID from which to display campuses.

general:warehouse_submit_bid

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-09-01T14:56:43+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit the bid to the Request Vendor Quote page.

general:warehouse_submit_vendor_quote

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-08-20T00:34:17+00:00

VCV Click Submit to submit all bid line items to each selected vendor. The bid is transferred to the Vendor Response page. Note: You must print or email the Reports > Bid Processing Reports > Request for Quotation Report (BWH2000) before you can retrieve a bid or enter a vendor response on the Vendor Response page.

general:warehouse_to_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2020-06-05T20:09:33+00:00

Type an end date to retrieve back orders to be canceled.

general:warehouse_uniform_dist

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-01-17T20:59:37+00:00

VCV Click Uniform Acct Distr to assign one or more account codes to the entire requisition. You can split all of the costs for a requisition item between two or more funds. The percentage split does not have to be the same for each fund, but the sum of all percentages must equal 100%.

general:warehouse_unit_cost

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T16:50:44+00:00

Type the dollar value which represents the cost of one unit of issue of the item. This number is used to compute the total cost for a campus stock requisition.

general:warehouse_unit_of_issue_display

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:30:49+00:00

The unit of issue for the selected inventory item is displayed. It is automatically populated based on the inventory item record.

general:warehouse_unit_of_issue

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-13T16:52:47+00:00

Click [Drop-down Arrow] to select the unit on which the unit price is based such as each, case, box, etc.

general:warehouse_unit_price

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T20:40:24+00:00

The unit price of the selected inventory item is displayed. It is automatically populated based on the inventory item record.

general:warehouse_used_to_date

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-01-26T21:01:48+00:00

The number (units of issue) of this item ordered from the warehouse to date is displayed.

general:warehouseguides

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T13:40:14+00:00

VCV ASCENDER - (CRT) Warehouse End-of-Year Process

general:whatiswhollseparate

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-11-12T21:16:07+00:00

What is wholly separate? Wholly separate refers to duties that are not part of an employee's primary contract; therefore, not subject to the Statutory Minimum Contribution. Wholly Separate Example: * A teacher who drives a morning bus route; the bus route is most likely a wholly separate position and not subject to the Statutory Minimum Contribution.

Cancel EOY outstanding back orders

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T19:33:05+00:00

Cancel EOY outstanding back orders Warehouse > Utilities > Cancel EOY Outstanding Back Orders Cancel back orders for a specific date range depending on your fiscal year start and end dates. [Cancel EOY Outstanding Back Orders Page] For June Year-End LEAs: * In the From Date field, enter 07012022. * In the To Date field, enter 06302022.

Create a Finance export

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-03T19:28:43+00:00

Create a Finance export Finance > Utilities > Export Finance Tables Export a copy of all current finance tables, requisition tables, and accounts receivable tables and save the file. [Export Finance Tables Page] VCV In the Enter the Password to be used for the Archive, enter the password to be used to retrieve the data from the file.

Generate the BWH1250 - Back Order Report

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-02T19:50:44+00:00

Generate the BWH1250 - Back Order Report Warehouse > Reports > Warehouse Reports > BWH1250 - Back Order Report Generate the report for the current year and save a copy. [BWH1250 - Back Order Report Parameters] [BWH1250 - Back Order Report]

Initialize year inventory files

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-03-05T21:35:43+00:00

Initialize year inventory files Warehouse > Utilities > Initialize Yearly Inventory Files Reset all selected yearly inventory files for the selected warehouse ID. VCV Select one of the following: * Zero Reorder Level - Select to reset all reorder levels to zero on the Warehouse > Maintenance > Inventory Maintenance page per inventory item. * Clear Last Restock - Select to reset all restock dates on the

Mass delete requisition records by fund

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-03-05T21:11:43+00:00

Mass delete requisition records by fund Warehouse > Utilities > Mass Delete Requisition Records > Fund/Fiscal Year Mass delete warehouse and restock requisition records based on the fund and fiscal year selected. [Mass Delete Requisitions by Fund Fiscal Year] VCV Select and move over all funds (except for the funds that you are continuing). VCV Click Execute. Print and save the report.

Reverse pending requisitions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-04T13:44:54+00:00

Reverse pending requisitions Warehouse > Utilities > Mass Reverse Pending Requisitions > Fund/Fiscal Year Mass reverse pending warehouse and restock requisition records based on the fund and fiscal year selected. [Mass Reverse Pending Requisitions by Fund Fiscal Year] VCV Select and move over all funds (except for the funds that you are continuing). VCV Click Execute. Print and save the report.

Update the fiscal year for Warehouse ID(s)

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-05-04T14:43:24+00:00

Update the fiscal year for Warehouse ID(s) Warehouse > Tables > Warehouse Options Reset all selected yearly inventory files for the selected warehouse ID. [Warehouse Options Page] The following steps need to be completed for each of your warehouse IDs. * In the Warehouse ID field, click [Drop-down Arrow] to select an ID and click

general:wholly_sep_amt_jobinfo

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2018-06-25T19:46:12+00:00

Type the total annual salary that is not subject to the State Base. This field should only be used if part of the contract total includes a wholly separate amount. Example: An employee’s primary job is a teacher and his extra duty job is a bus driver. Since the bus driver salary is not subject to the State Base,

general:wholly_sep_amt

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-13T16:47:53+00:00

Type the total annual salary that is not subject to Above State Base. This field is used in computing the monthly amounts not subject to above state base salary calculations (TRS 373). There are different types of business allowance payments such as travel and uniform allowance that are paid during regular payroll processing. Some of these are taxable and subject to withholding tax. Others are nontaxable and not subject to withholding tax. Business allowances are not subject to TRS deductions…

general:wklyhrssched

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2019-10-10T20:53:13+00:00

Required TRS reporting field. Type the employee’s scheduled weekly hours for a specific job where applicable.

general:worker_s_comp_info

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-09-18T14:47:45+00:00

WC CodeClick [Drop-down Arrow] to select the type of workers' compensation for the employee. The WC code is used to calculate the workers' compensation premiums for all types of district employee records. The workers' compensation codes and descriptions are user defined and can be changed to local preference. These codes are located in the Workers' Compensation Code table and must exist before a code can be selected from this field.

general:yaagterms

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2023-10-02T19:38:57+00:00

TermDescriptionIDEA_B Maintenance of Effort (MOE)Requires LEAs to maintain the level of state/local funds spent to support federal programs from fiscal year to fiscal year.TEALTEA Login “Settle-up”Process to correct overpayments or underpayments that occurred during the fiscal year.

general:yearsofexperience

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-11-01T21:37:54+00:00

Type the maximum years of experience for the employee. The field can be a maximum of two digits. When using the Extract Teacher Service Record utility, the Years Experience field is based on the TRS position code and is populated on the service record based on the

general:ytd_and_current_and_next

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-28T15:40:07+00:00

* The program displays all the deposits and checks that have not been cleared, regardless of the accounting period. If a cash receipt or check transaction record has not been cleared (is outstanding), it is displayed. * The program displays the system cash amount based on the cash balances shown in the general ledger. Within these general ledger account records, there is a total for the next accounting period that includes the year-to-date and current figures. The program totals those next to…

general:ytd_and_current

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-28T15:38:32+00:00

* The program displays all the outstanding deposits and checks for the prior closed accounting periods plus the outstanding deposits and checks for the current period. Information from a cash receipt or check transaction record that has not been cleared is displayed if it has either a processed date or the accounting period in the record matches the current accounting period.

general:ytd_general_ledger

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-08-08T16:28:37+00:00

Select to display the balances for all accounts as of the last month that has been closed (e.g., use this option if the last month of the fiscal year has been closed in the file ID from which you are extracting). If you copied the funds from current and you closed the month (e.g., August - 08), the audit adjustments are posted in the next (e.g., September - 09) accounting period.

general:ytd_processed

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-07-28T15:36:52+00:00

* The program displays all the deposits and checks that are for the last closed accounting period or earlier. If a cash receipt or check transaction record has a process date and has not been cleared, it is displayed. * The program displays the system cash amount based on the cash balances shown in the general ledger as of the last closed accounting period. Within the general ledger account records, there is a total for all prior accounting periods that have been closed. The program totals th…

YTD Payroll Earnings Register Report Field Descriptions

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2024-08-09T16:39:51+00:00

YTD Payroll Earnings Register Report Field Descriptions The Payroll Earnings Register report provides a listing of all employees receiving payment for the pay period. The report includes a breakdown of the payroll calculations including the standard gross, absence deductions, supplemental pay, deductions, benefits, and calculated net pay by the employee.

general:zero_leave_values_for_employees_examples

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T03:45:40+00:00

Zeroing use it or lose it type leave: The selected leave for the previous school year displayed the following: Begin BalanceLeave EarnedLeave UsedEnding Balance15.05.01.518.5 Select the following options: Leave Earned Leave Used End Balance After processing the Mass Update, the selected leave for the coming school year displays the following:

general:zero_leave_values_for_employees

Anonymous (anonymous@undisclosed.example.com) — 2017-12-11T03:47:15+00:00

A list of leave type codes and descriptions currently associated with the selected employees' records are displayed under Zero Leave Values for Employees. This type of leave adjustment is performed primarily at the end of the school year to prepare the leave balances for employees for the next year.

Business general

general:403bficaalternativecalculationnotes

Create 1095 (B or C) AIR file

Submit AIR file to the IRS

Verify 1094 historical data

Complete 1094-C (Authoritative Transmission) data

Generate the comparison report

general:1095_generate_validation_report

Perform 1095 maintenance as needed

Finalize the 1095 data and print forms

Set up ACA code table

Set up insurance company codes table

general:1095_terminology

Verify reporting contact information

Add or update staff insurance data

Verify 1095 historical data

general:1095electconsent

general:1095electronicconsent

general:1099_acct_code

general:1099_create_1099_object_codes_table

general:1099_create_1099_work_table

general:1099_delete_1099_work_table

general:1099_file_1099_misc_forms

general:1099_forms_notes

general:1099_generate_1099_report

general:1099_misc

general:1099_nec

general:1099_perform_1099_record_maintenance

general:1099_po_number

general:1099_print_1099_misc_forms

general:1099_terminology

general:1099_verify_1099_report

general:1099_verify_district_finance_options

general:abbreviationcode

general:absencereason

general:aca_copy_records

general:aca_create_1095_records_manually_create_records

general:aca_create_1095_records

general:aca_extract_records

general:aca_import_records

general:access_help

general:access_permission

general:account_code_check_issue

general:account_code_field_display

general:account_code_gl_acct_summary

general:account_code_gl_emp_dist_inquiry

general:account_code_gl

general:account_code_jv

general:account_code

general:account_type

general:accounting_period

general:accountingperiod_lock

general:accrual_info

general:accrualbackground

general:accrualexpenseexample1

general:accrualexpenseexample2

general:accrualexpensefund

Accrual Overview

general:acct_code_cc

general:acct_code

general:acct_period

general:acct_rec_account_code

general:acct_rec_add_invoice

general:acct_rec_customer_address

general:acct_rec_customer_name

general:acct_rec_customer_number

general:acct_rec_delete_invoice

general:acct_rec_delete

general:acct_rec_delete2

general:acct_rec_email

general:acct_rec_invoice_amount

general:acct_rec_invoice_status

general:acct_rec_notes

general:acct_rec_po_required

general:acct_rec_printcopy

general:acct_rec_status

general:acct_rec_submit_invoice

general:acct_rec_uniform_dist

general:acct_rec_update_totals

Invoice Directory

Business
general